Alcatel 9400 LX Manual

Alcatel 9400 LX
1.5 GHz, 2 GHz and 7-8 GHz Small and Medium Capacity Digital Microwave Link ETSI rack version
with 946LUX11/946LUX12 supervision

USER MANUAL
3CC10294AAAA TQ BJA 01
September 2000
1/270
PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
2/270
September 2000
Operations & Support Services: a Team tuned to your needs for your entire satisfaction
Congratulations on having bought your radio equipment from Alcatel. We hope that it will give you full satisfaction. For any additional information or if you have any questions concerning the equipment, please to contact our hotline technical support service,(TAC), or the support service provided by your local dealer who is still available to listen to your problems, if you specify the hardware and software configurations of each item concerned. This service, available on subscription, is free for the duration of the initial warranty period.
How to reach the TAC team :
Tel : +33 (0)2 38 74 30 00 (8 am 5 pm Paris time) Fax : +33 (0)2 38 74 84 24 e-mail :tasc.tasc@alcatel.fr IMPORTANT
September 2000
3/270
PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
4/270
September 2000
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from ALCATEL
Table of contents
1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 Structure of the manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Using the manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.1 General rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.2 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.3 Symbols used in the document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.4 Declaration of conformity with European EMC directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3.5 Certificate of conformity with European safety standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13 13 13 14 14 14 15 16 17
2 Description of the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 General characteristics of the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 Operation of the equipment in 1+0 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 Operation of the equipment in 1+1 configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.1 1+1 HSB configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.2 1+1 HSB/DIV configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.3 1+1 FD configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.4 Hybrid 1+1 FD/DIV configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.5 1+1 configuration with occasional backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4 Equipment operation in N+1 configurations (1<N<6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 Configurations with space diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 Engineering service channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.1 ESC number 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.2 Engineering service channel No 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6.3 ESC numbers 3 to 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 Remote indications and remote controls (TS/TC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7.1 Basic equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7.2 16 TS/TC option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8 Loopback options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9 9400 LX network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10 Equipment management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11 Controls, indications and connectors on the rack control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12 List of boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12.1 Boards common to the various frequency bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12.2 Boards specific to the various frequency bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13 Technical and mechanical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19 19 24 26 28 28 28 31 31 32 34 34 34 35 37 37 37 38 38 39 40 41 42 42 42 44
3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.1 Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.2 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47 47 47 47
September 2000
5/270
3.1.3 Checking the delivered configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.4 Equipment identification labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 Installing the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.1 Information required for installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.2 Precautions concerning electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.3 Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 ETSI rack mechanical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.1 ETSI rack mechanical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.2 Fixing to the floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.3 Assembling ETSI racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4 Connecting to the feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.1 1.5 and 2 GHz bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.2 7 and 8 GHz bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 Installing the compressor/dryer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6 Power supply wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6.1 Control panel and power distribution unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6.2 ETSI rack grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 ETSI rack backplanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7.1 3 Tx/Rx backplane in main and extension racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7.2 Backplanes in a space diversity ETSI rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8 Links between backplanes and racks of the same network element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8.1 HDLC and CAN channel links between backplanes and racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8.2 Links between main and extension racks and diversity subracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8.3 Cable assemblies used for links between backplanes and racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9 Tributary wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9.1 Wiring 2 Mbit/s tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9.2 8 Mbit/s tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9.3 34 Mbit/s tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9.4 Auxiliary 2 Mbit/s signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10 ESC wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11 Wiring of alarms and remote controls (TS/TC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11.1 Sub-D/WAGO adapter board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11.2 16 TS/TC option board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12 Telephone handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13 Wiring between terminals of the same station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13.1 Tributary and the auxiliary 2 Mbit/s channel wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13.2 ESC wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47 47
49 49 49 49 50 50 51 53 55 55 55 56 57 59 59 60 60 67 71 71 71 72 73 73 76 77 77 78 78 79 79 79 80 80 80
4 Configuration and operation software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 Installing the software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.1 Warning note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1.2 Installing the software from diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 9400 LX applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2 Menu bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.3 Global synthesis line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.4 How to open a session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.5 Use of applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 Administrative functions application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
83 83 83 84 86 86 87 89 90 91 92
6/270
September 2000
4.3.1 File and Receive menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.2 Operator menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

92 92 95 95 99 101 102 107 112 115 117 118 121 124 124 124 125 125 126 126 127 128 129 131 132 132 134 137 137 138 140 141 142 142 143 144 144 145 149 150 151 151 152
4.4 Installation parameters application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1 Tables menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.2 File menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 Operation parameters application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.1 Terminal and Repeater menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.2 Equipment menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.3 Thresholds menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.4 Alarms menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.5 Summary menu (946LUX12 version of the software only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5.6 File menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 Software downloading application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7 Alarms, Status and Controls application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.1 Opening the application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.2 Description of the main screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.3 Viewing alarm and synthesis information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.4 Accessing secondary NE screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.5 Exiting secondary screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.6 Alarm synthesis line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.7 View menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.8 History menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7.9 Remote Control menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8 Performance Monitoring (G821) application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.1 Display menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8.2 Save menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9 Radio Transmission Parameters application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10 Remote inventory application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10.1 File menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10.2 Receive menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11 Maintenance Memory application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11.1 File menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11.2 Receive menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11.3 Clear menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12 G784 Performance Monitoring application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12.1 File menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12.2 View menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12.3 Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12.4 Configure menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13 Measures application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14 Local supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14.1 Station A of a network with supervision/station of a network without supervision 4.14.2 Station B in a network with supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 Order of commissioning for a link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 Installing and commissioning station A (phase 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.1 Preliminary operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.2 Setting up the installation parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
153 153 154 154 155
September 2000
7/270
5.2.3 Setting up the operation parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.4 Checking out operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3 Installing and commissioning station B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.1 Preliminary operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.2 Pointing the antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.3 Checking out operation of station B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4 Commissioning the link from station A (2nd phase) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.1 Pointing the antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.2 Checking the radio transmission parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.3 Remote loopback on a tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.4 Checking transmit/receive switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.5 Checking performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.6 End of commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 Reversing the order of installation and of link commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
155 155
156 156 156 156 157 157 157 158 159 160 161 162
6 Operation, servicing and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1 Network supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.1 Network supervised with the Alcatel network management system . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.2 Network without the Alcatel network management system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 Preventive maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3 Corrective servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.1 Methodology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.2 Analyzing the indicators on the control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3.3 Using the operating programs to trace alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4 Module and board positions in the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.1 N+1 configurations without space diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4.2 N+1 configurations with space diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5 Screens on opening the AS&C application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6 Zoom displays from the functional screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.1 1+0 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.2 1+1 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6.3 N+1 configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7 nx2 Mbit/s or nx8 Mbit/s tributary interface unit (TIU) boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.2 Hardware configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.3 Software configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.4 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.5 TIU board alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7.6 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8 34 Mbit/s + auxiliary 2 Mbit/s tributary interface unit (TIU) board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.2 Hardware configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.3 Software configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.4 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.5 Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.6 TIU board alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8.7 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9 2 or 8 Mbit/s + auxiliary 2 Mbit/s tributary interface unit (TIU) board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9.1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9.2 Hardware configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 164 166 166 166 167 168 168 169 170 173 173 173 174 174 174 174 175 175 175 176 176 176 176 176 177 177 177
8/270
September 2000
6.9.3 Software configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9.4 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9.5 TIU board alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9.6 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10 Multiplexing/Demultiplexing and switching unit (MSU) board 3CC05691AAxx . . . . . . . 6.10.1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.2 Software configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.3 Indications and reset control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.4 Maintenance and operation of a configuration with standby MSU . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.5 Examples of zoom on the MSU board via the supervision function . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.6 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10.7 Remote controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11 Standby MSU board 3CC06201AAxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11.1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11.2 Software configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11.3 Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11.4 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12 Transmitter module TX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12.1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12.2 Software configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12.3 Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12.4 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12.5 TX transmitter alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12.6 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12.7 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13 Receiver module RX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13.1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13.2 Software configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13.3 Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13.4 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13.5 RX receiver alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13.6 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13.7 Remote controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14 Branching filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.15 ESC 2_3 service channel board 3CC05708ABxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.15.1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.15.2 Software configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.15.3 Hardware configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.15.4 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.15.5 Zoom onto the ESC 2_3 board using the supervision function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.15.6 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16 ESC 4_5 service channel board 3CC05709AAxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16.1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16.2 Software configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16.3 Hardware configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16.4 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16.5 ESC 4_5 board alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16.6 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17 ESC_1 to ESC_5 service channel daughter boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17.1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17.2 Software configuration of the ESC_1 to 5 service channel daughter boards . . .
177 178 178 178 179 179 179 180 180 181 182 183 185 185 185 185 185 186 186 186 186 186 187 187 187 188 188 188 188 188 189 189 191 192 193 193 193 193 195 195 195 196 196 196 196 196 196 197 198 198 198
September 2000
9/270
6.18 General supervision unit GSU board 3CC05690AAxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18.1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18.2 Software configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18.3 Hardware configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18.4 Indications, reset command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18.5 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18.6 Environmental screen of the GSU board obtained using the supervision . . . . . . 6.18.7 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18.8 Remote controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.18.9 Exchanging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.19 SIMM daughter board (2 Mb Flash memory / 2 Mb DRAM) 3CC06353AAxx . . . . . . . 6.20 16 TS/TC board (optional) 3CC05705AAAA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.20.1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.20.2 Software configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.20.3 Hardware configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.20.4 Example of a zoom on the 16 TS/TC board via the supervision system . . . . . . . 6.20.5 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.20.6 Configuring the remote controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.20.7 Configuring the equipment alarm loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.20.8 Configuring the environment (housekeeping) alarm loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.20.9 WAGO connector ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.21 Power supply module PSU 77096496 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.21.1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.21.2 Indications, ON/OFF switch and fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.21.3 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.21.4 Example of zoom on the PSU via the supervision system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.21.5 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.21.6 Replacing a power supply fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.22 N+1 logic and switching unit LSU board 3CC05706AAxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.22.1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.22.2 Signalling, alarms and reset command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.22.3 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.22.4 LSU board alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.23 Software key SKU 3CC07619Axx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.23.1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.23.2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.24 3 Tx/Rx backplane fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.24.1 Fan power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.24.2 Changing a fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
203 203 203 204 204 204 205 205 206 206 207 208 208 208 208 208 208 209 209 210 210 211 211 211 211 211 211 212 213 213 213 213 213 215 215 215 216 216 216
7 Changes of configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1 Commissioning inactive tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2 Changing 2 Mbit/s tributary impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 Changing bit rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4 Changing the software key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
219 220 220 220 221
10/270
September 2000
6.17.3 Service channel daughter board: ESC_1 6.17.4 Service channel daughter board: ESC_2 6.17.5 Service channel daughter board: ESC_3 6.17.6 Service channel daughter board: ESC_4 6.17.7 Service channel daughter board: ESC_5
................................. ................................. ................................. ................................. .................................
198 199 200 201 202
7.5 Changing the bit rate (changing TIU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6 Inserting (or removing) an ESC board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
221 222 222 222 223 223 223 224 224
7.7 Deleting/Inserting/Changing a telephone number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.8 Customizing service channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9 Configuring TS and TC loops (standard configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.10 Configuring the loops of the optional 16 TS/TC board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.11 Adding multiplexer protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.12 Changing a 1+0 configuration to 1 + 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.13 Changing a 1+0 or 1+1 configuration to N+1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.14 Converting a repeater without tributary drop and insert capability into a repeater with tributary drop and insert capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 7.15 Converting a repeater into a terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.16 Changing frequency in the RF filter band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.17 Changing the physical address of the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.17.1 From the station configured as a network element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.17.2 From the station with mediation function (local supervision or master key) . . . . 7.18 Upgrading the software (changing from 946LUXn to 946LUXn+1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.18.1 Installing the software on the CT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.18.2 Downloading the software of the NE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 226 226 226 227 227 227 228
Appendix 1 Installation information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
229
Appendix 2 Troubleshooting using AS&C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
232
Appendix 3 List of remote controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
240
Appendix 4 List of RTP application alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
242
Appendix 5 Creating user profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
244
Appendix 6 Editing the initialization files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.6.1 WIN.INI file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.6.1.1 Updating the date and time on an unsupervised network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.6.1.2 Editing the RTP polling interval (POLRTP variable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.6.2 File 946LUX1x.INI - POLMEA variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
245 245 245 246 246
Appendix 7 Set of installation consumables ref : 3CC07673AAAA INFRASET01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
247
Appendix 8 User ports on the 3 Tx/Rx backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.8.1 Connectors on the 3 Tx/Rx backplane mother board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.8.2 Tributary ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
248 249 251
September 2000
11/270
A.8.3 Engineering service channel ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.8.3.1 ESC1, network interface (rQ2 bus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.8.3.2 ESC2, telephone service channel with selective calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.8.3.3 ESC 3, 4 and 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.8.4 Alarms, remote indications and remote controls (TS/TC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.8.4.1 TS/TC connector (GSU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.8.4.2 Sub-D/WAGO adapter board 3CC07444AAxx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.8.4.3 TS/TC connections on the 16 TS/TC board (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.8.5 Maintenance and AGC voltage connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
252 252 252 253 255 255 256 257 258
Appendix 9 User ports on the diversity backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
259
Appendix 10 F interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
261
Appendix 11 List of abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
262
Appendix 12 Table of catalogue items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
264
Appendix 13 List of models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.13.1 Baseboard equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.13.2 RF equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
267 267 268
Appendix 14 Preparing the coaxial tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.14.1 Wiring of the straight plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.14.2 Wiring the N series elbow connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
269 269 270
12/270
September 2000
A.8.2.1 A.8.2.2 A.8.2.3 A.8.2.4 A.8.2.5
2 Mbit/s tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Mbit/s tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3x8 Mbit/s + 4x2 Mbit/s configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Mbit/s tributary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary 2 Mbit/s stream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
251 251 251 251 252
1 Foreword
1.1 Structure of the manual

This manual is for users with a sound knowledge of how to operate and install microwave links and how to use a PC-based craft terminal running the Windowst operating system. With it, you should quickly be able to operate the equipment. It is not intended to replace the training services that we can provide for your particular needs. The manual is divided into eight sections followed by appendixes: Foreword Description of the equipment Installation Configuration and operation software Commissioning Operation, Servicing and Maintenance Changing configurations Appendixes
1.2 Using the manual

With this manual, you should be able to commission and operate the described equipment to a basic level. You should always read this manual in conjunction with the attached Update document (if provided) so that you are aware of the latest equipment upgrades. Manual updates This edition of the manual describes hardware and software releases of the following revision indexes (and above), detailed in Appendix 13 In cases where an equipment upgrade affects the content of the manual, the relevant modification should be inserted in the Update document, with the same reference number, but with code type VE (instead of TQ). When the number or extent of the changes justifies it, they should be incorporated in the body of the manual and the manuals revision index should be incremented.
Note: MS-DOS, MICROSOFT and WINDOWS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
September 2000
13/270
1.3 Safety instructions

1.3.1 General rules

The following general safety precautions must be observed by the installer and the operator. ALCATEL assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements. Ground the equipment: For Safety Class 1 equipment, always connect the earth conductor of the power cable to an appropriate earthing device. DO NOT operate the product in an explosive atmosphere or in presence of flammable gases or fumes. For protection against fire: replace the line fuse(s) only with fuse(s) of the same voltage and current rating and type. Dangerous voltages: Users must not remove equipment covers or shields. The installation and maintenance procedures described in this manual are for use by servicetrained personnel only. DO NOT operate equipment which may be damaged: Whenever it is possible that the safety protection features built into this equipment have been impaired, ISOLATE FROM THE POWER SUPPLY and do not use the equipment until safe operation can be verified by servicetrained personnel. If necessary, return the equipment to the Customer Service Department for service and repair. DO NOT substitute parts or modify equipment: Return the product to the Customer Service Department for servicing and repair. The equipment contains a lithium battery to back up data. This battery should be changed every 7 to 10 years, when inventory memory becomes empty following a power outage (see section 6.18.9). CAUTION There is a risk of explosion if the incorrect battery is used. Only replace with a battery of the same type: M4T28BR12SH1, Supplier: SGS Thomson Microlectronique Observe all applicable national standards regarding the disposal of used batteries. Do not burn and do not recharge.
1.3.2 Symbols
1.3.2.1 Danger symbols When subsystems and modules have warning labels, it is extremely important to follow their instructions. These labels are designed to indicate dangerous situations; they may contain any standard symbol or any text considered necessary to protect users and employees. The most frequent danger situations and symbols are: Danger or general warning Prompts the user to refer to the manual.
14/270
September 2000
Dangerous electrical voltages Close to dangerous voltages (>42.4 V AC peak, 60 V DC; power level >240 VA) you will find this warning label
Presence of heat-radiating mechanical parts
1.3.2.2 Earth symbols Terminal for connecting the protective earth conductor in power supply wiring
Other earth terminal
1.3.2.3 Other symbols Indicates compliance with European standards
1.3.3 Symbols used in the document

These symbols alert the reader the possible risks. They indicate: the cause and type of danger, the possible consequences, the preventive action.
1.3.3.1 Warning warning 1.3.3.2 Precautions precautions protection of equipment, warning of a procedure, practice or condition that could be dangerous to equipment or its environment, danger of damage to the equipment or its environment; permanent loss of data possible. protection of personnel, warning of a possible dangerous situation, danger of fatal or serious injury.
This symbol, introducing the description of a procedure, indicates that it will cause the link to be temporarily disconnected.
STOP
This symbol, introducing the description of a procedure, indicates that it cannot be continued without a full knowledge of the data contained in the procedure sheet concerning the stations concerned.
September 2000
15/270
1.3.4 Declaration of conformity with European EMC directives
16/270
September 2000
1.3.5 Certificate of conformity with European safety standards
September 2000
17/270
18/270 PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY

September 2000
2 Description of the equipment

9400 LX is a family of medium capacity, point-to-point digital microwave links, developed to meet the digital transmission requirements of public and private networks. It provides for radio transmission of the following signals : customer tributaries at nx2 Mbit/s (2pnp16), nx8 Mbit/s (1pnp4) or 34 Mbit/s, engineering service channels (ESC), remote signalling and remote control signals, auxiliary 2 Mbit/s tributary in the 16x2 Mbit/s, 4x8 Mbit/s and 34 Mbit/s configurations; drop and insert capability in relay (repeater) station configuration.
This full indoor equipment is available in two versions : in a standard 19 inch cabinet unit 10U high, supporting 1+0, 1+1 HSB, 1+1 HSB with space diversity and 1+1 with frequency diversity configurations, in ETSI racks, supporting 1+0, 1+1 HSB, n+1 in frequency diversity configuration, with or without space diversity (1pnp5).
This manual describes the ETSI rack version.
2.1 General characteristics of the equipment

The equipment is compatible with ETSI, ITU and FCC standards and electromagnetic compatibility standards. The lightweight and compact structure of the ETSI rack LX family of equipment provides for quick and easy installation, immediate commissioning and reduced maintenance.
Single ETSI rack, shown closed
Double ETSI rack, half open
Figure 1 9400 LX in ETSI rack The equipment is available in three frequency bands : 1.5 GHz (9414 LX) with RF access by coaxial cable and 4QAM or 16QAM modulation,
September 2000
19/270
2 GHz (9420 LX) with RF access by coaxial cable and 4QAM modulation, 7/8 GHz (9470 LX) with RF access by waveguide, and 4QAM or 16QAM modulation.
The standby channel can additionally be used for a supplementary signal: either keeping its status as a standby channel (occasional standby use), or discontinuing this standby function (independent standby channel) providing for 2+0 or 3+0 configuration options.
The various possible usable bit rates are given in the table below, based on the interface boards installed in the equipment and the type of key used. BOARD TYPES POSSIBLE BIT RATES (Mbit/s) 2x2 4x2 1x8 2x8 4x8 TIU-F1 bit rates + 8x2 4x8 + 2 Mbit/s auxiliary 2x2 16port TIUF3 (3CC05869AAAA) TIU-F2 bit rates + 3x8 + 4x2 16x2 + 2 Mbit/s auxiliary BIT RATES ENABLED BY THE SOFTWARE KEY (Mbit/s) 2x2 2x2 4x2 2x2 4x2 1x8 8x2 2x2 4x2 1x8 2x8 2x2 4x2 8x2 1x8 2x8 2x2 4x2 8x2 1x8 2x8 16x2 2x2 4x2 1x8 2x8 4x8 2x2 4x2 8x2 1x8 2x8 4x8 + 2 Mbit/s aux. 2x2 4x2 16x2 + 2Mbit/s aux. 1x8 2x8 4x8 + 2 Mbit/s aux. 3x8 + 4x2 34 + 2 Mbit/s aux. 2 or 8 Mbit/s and/or 2 Mbit/s auxiliary in repeater mode
4port TIUF1 (3CC05862AAAA)
2x2 8port TIUF2 (3CC05868AAAA)
2x2 4x2 1x8
2x2 4x2 1x8
34 Mbit/s TIUF5 (3CC05871AAAA) 8 Mbit/s TIUF6 (3CC05873AAAA)
34 + 2 Mbit/s auxiliary 2 or 8 Mbit/s and/or 2 Mbit/s auxiliary
The following bit rates are not available : 2x2 Mbit/s with 16QAM modulation in the 7.1 - 8.5 GHz bands, 16x2, 4x8, 3x8+4 x2 and 34 Mbit/s with 4QAM modulation in the 1.35 - 1.53 GHz band. Depending on the usable bit rate, the bandwidth of a channel is as follows : BIT RATE MODULATION TYPE 2x2 Mbit/s 4x2 Mbit/s 8 Mbit/s 7 MHz 3.5 MHz 8x2 Mbit/s 2x8 Mbit/s 14 MHz 7 MHz 16x2 Mbit/s 3x8 + 4x2 Mbit/s 4x8 Mbit/s 34 Mbit/s 28 MHz (*) 14 MHz
4QAM 16QAM Note :

(*) Not
3.5 MHz 1.75 MHz (**)
applicable to frequency plans in the 1.35 - 1.53 GHz band. (**) Not applicable to frequency plans in the 7.1 - 8.5 GHz band.
20/270
September 2000
Each equipment is fitted with a software key (SKU) which takes the form of a small module with a 9way connector . This key determines the operational capabilities of the equipment in terms of : Frequency band, with the optional facility to limit the usable bandwidth between a minimum frequency and a maximum frequency. Integrated mediation function : master or slave equipment. Configuration : 1+0 to 5+1. Maximum bit rate (also limited by the type of terminal interface unit (TIU) boards installed) : 2x2, 4x2, 8x2, 16x2 or 34 Mbit/s. Remote craft terminal function.
If the software key is omitted, an alarm is generated and the equipment is shut down after 24 hours. The equipment has five optional engineering service channels: one reserved for supervision, one for use as a telephone line with selective calling, three customizable by daughter boards (channels 4 and 5 are not used in the 2x2 Mbit/s version). Maintenance operations are simplified by the use of microcontrollers backing up the configuration. The standard equipment features three equipment alarms, eight environment (housekeeping) alarm loops (TS) and one environment remote control loop (TC). The first of these eight alarm loops is factory configured for assignment to the fan alarm, and cannot be modified. An optional 16 TS/TC board provides for an additional: 16 internal alarm loops, four housekeeping remote controls (TC), 12 housekeeping alarm loops (TS).
The equipment incorporates the following functions: link identification code to avoid the accidental demultiplexing of interference signals, multiplex protection and switching via a protection switching board, crossconnecting of 2 or 8 Mbit/s tributaries, controlled by the software from a master station (option), for reorganizing the routing of a networks tributaries in terminal stations, terminal or repeater mode configuration, for creating nonlinear networks using bit stream drop and insert functions in repeater type relay stations (2 or 8 Mbit/s and/or auxiliary 2 Mbit/s), auxiliary 2 Mbit/s available with 34 Mbit/s, 16x2 Mbit/s and 4x8 Mbit/s configurations.
The technical characteristics of the equipment are as follows: Direct 4QAM or 16QAM radio frequency modulation, Parity encoding and weighted decision 32/31 error correcting decoding (Wagner), Time equalizer, Transmit and receive frequencies synthesized in 10 kHz steps and controlled by the supervisory function, Climatic range: -10_C to +55_C.
The equipment includes the following builtin test functions: local loopback, remote loopback, transmit mode insertion of a pseudo random pattern on a tributary and BER measurement on reception of that tributary to check out link operation. To facilitate tributary wiring, additional distribution frames are provided (75 or 120 ). The rack includes a position for a compressor (for pressurizing feeders and waveguides). The equipment features numerous supervisory functionalities, such a link performance monitoring, alarm display, forwarding of remote controls. Supervision can be exercised at three levels: Local supervision for displaying the local equipment and a remote network element (slave key). If the key features the RCT (Remote Craft Terminal) option, the remote craft terminal can be used to receive a copy of the image that appears on the master craft terminal (CT) monitoring the network.
September 2000
21/270
9400 LX/UX network supervision (integrated mediation function), for monitoring a network of up to 63 other 9400 LX and RQ2 UX network elements.
Alcatel supervision: full compatibility with Alcatel network management (Alcatel 1300 range) using RQ2 interface.
The equipment can support 1+0 to 5+1 configurations. The composition of a terminal station, which depends on the number of channels and the accommodation capability of the ETSI rack, leads to the following distribution: one rack can accommodate terminal equipment configurations of up to three channels, two racks can accommodate 3+1 to 5+1 terminal equipment configurations, an additional rack can be used for equipment specific to configurations with space diversity.
Relay (repeater) stations theoretically comprise two sets of terminal equipment and require twice the number of racks used in a terminal station. However, only one additional rack is needed for terminal or repeater configurations with space diversity (see example in Figure 2). Section 2.12, below, lists all the boards and modules that can be used in the ETSI racks and their part numbers.
22/270
September 2000
Basic board
Option *
Compressor * RX-1 TX-2 RX-2 TX-X RX-X

bkp MSU-1 k *
ESC23 MSU-1 TX-1 MSU-2
bkp MSU-2 *
PSU-1 MSU-X
bkp MSU-X *
ESC45 * TIU-1 TIU-2 TIU-X * GSU Branch connection area
Connection area
PSU-2 LSU
PSU-X
TS/TC*

TX-3 RX-3 TX-4 RX-4 MSU-3 TIU-3 TIU-4 TIU-5
bkp MSU-3 *
MSU-4
PSU-3
bkp MSU-4 *
Branch connection area
Connection area
Figure 2 5+1 configuration with space diversity plus occasional backup, terminal station
MSU-5 TX-5
September 2000
bkp MSU-5 *
PSU-4
PSU-5
RX-5
PSU-3-4-5-WE
RXDIV-3-WE
PSU-1-2-X-WE
RXDIV-1-WE
bkp PSU-3-4-5-WE *
RXDIV-4-WE
bkp PSU-1-2-X-WE *
RXDIV-2-WE
Branch connection area
RXDIV-5-WE
RXDIV-X-WE

Connection area
Connection area
23/270
2.2 Operation of the equipment in 1+0 configuration

The block diagram of this configuration is given in Figure 3. The tributary interface unit (TIU) provides the transmit and receive mode interface between the G.703 signals for accessing the equipment and the HCMOS signals handled in the equipment, and the interface for any signals dropped/inserted from/to the microwave links frame. There are five types of TIU board, spanning all user requirements (see table of possible usable bit rates, section 2.1).
Tributaries
TIU TX MSU FILTER
Aux 2 Mbit/s Antenna ESC 2 ESC 3 ESC 4 ESC 5 RX ESC 2_3 ESC 4_5
Option
ESC 1 GSU SKU TS / TC extension (optional) 7 TS 1 TC PSU
Environment
Figure 3 Block diagram of a 1+0 configuration The multiplex and switching unit (MSU) board incorporates the following functions : On transmission : multiplexing of the tributary bit streams originating from a TIU board, insertion :
S S
of the service channels originating from the ESC boards, of the auxiliary 2 Mbit/s stream, where it exists,
framing of the resulting aggregate signal, with the addition of service and synchronization signals, and, in particular, the link identification code.
On reception : deframing of the aggregate signal, extraction (dropping):
S S
of the service channels, directed towards the ESC boards, of the auxiliary 2 Mbit/s stream, forwarded to the associated TIU board,
demultiplexing of the tributaries, applied to the TIU board.
The MSU board can be backed up by a standby MSU board. The transmitter board (TX) receives the aggregate signal originating from the MSU board and processes it for microwave transmission, that is: baseband processing :
digital filtering and error correction (parity) encoding, or forward error correction (FEC),
24/270
September 2000
digital/analogue conversion and analogue baseband filtering,
direct 4QAM modulation (16QAM as an option in the 1.5 GHz and 7/8 GHz bands) of the RF frequency produced by a local oscillator incorporated into the transmitter, with no intermediate frequency mode transfer. power amplification.
The receiver board (RX) receives a 4QAM modulated carrier (or 16QAM as an option in the 1.5 GHz and 7-8 GHz bands), and demodulates it to recover the aggregate signal intended for the MSU board. The functions incorporated into the receiver are: lownoise amplification of the received carrier, direct 4QAM demodulation (16QAM as an option in the 1.5 GHz and 7/8 GHz bands), using a local oscillator incorporated in the receiver, analogue filtering and amplification of the baseband signal with AGC, analogue/digital conversion, Nyquist digital filtering, error correction Wagner decoding.
From BER measurements, it also prepares the switching request signals for the multiplexer/ demultiplexer board (MSU). The TX and RX boards are frequency agile in 10 kHz steps. They differ according to the frequency band : two boards cover the 1.5 GHz band : 1.35 - 1.53 GHz, one in 4QAM mode, the other in 16QAM mode, three boards cover the three subbands of the 2 GHz band respectively : 1.7 - 2.1 GHz, 1.9 - 2.3 GHz and 2.3 - 2.7 GHz in 4QAM modulation mode. two boards cover the 7/8 GHz band : 7.1 - 8.5 GHz, one in 4QAM mode, the other in 16QAM mode.
The branching block comprises duplexed filters and circulators, the number of which depends on the configuration. It segregates the transmitted and received RF signals. Depending on the band, there will be a single filter (1.5 GHz band) or two filters (2 and 7/8 GHz bands) to cover the 1.7 - 2.3 GHz and 2.1 - 2.7 GHz and 7.1 - 7.7 GHz and 7.7 - 8.5 GHz subbands respectively. The filters are factoryset to the channel defined by the user, and make it possible to adapt to the various frequency plans defined by ITU-R, CEPT and some national authorities in each band. The same applies for the duplex separation between the transmit filter and the receive filter. The RF switch and the receive adapter necessary for the HSB function, when this configuration is chosen, are installed between TX, RX board and the filter. The engineering service channel boards (ESC 2_3 and ESC 4_5) provide the user interfaces for the ESCs. These boards provide a baseband mode ESC drop and insert capability. ESC N_ 2 is reserved for the telephone service channel with selective calling. The other channels can be configured by the use of daughter boards. ESC N_ 4 can be configured as a second telephone service channel with selective calling. The position for the optional ESC 4_5 board must in this case be occupied by a second ESC 2_3 board. The general supervision interface unit (GSU) can be used to: check the internal operation of the system (dialogue with the equipment boards via a serial bus), externally monitor operation of the system (F interfaces, rQ2 supervision interface), locally and remotely via the RQ2 network supervision function, and also using Alcatel Network Management (Alcatel 1300 range).
The GSU board provides: three equipment alarm remote indication outputs (Urgent Alarm, NonUrgent Alarm, Alarm Attended), eight environment remote indication (TS) inputs, the first being used for the fan alarm, a remote control (TC) output.
The GSU board uses ESC No. 1 to exchange network supervision information.
September 2000
25/270
A batterybacked maintenance memory logs all events. Note: The MSU, GSU and RX modules each incorporate a microcontroller containing a backup of the configuration to simplify maintenance operations. Builtin remote controls make it possible to set up local loopback and remote loopback test configurations and measure the bit error ratio (BER) on a tributary receiving a pseudorandom bit pattern sent out by remote control from the other end of the radio hop. The 16 TS/TC board (optional) extends the supervision capabilities by increasing the number of basic TS/TC offered by the GSU board (addition of 16 internal equipment alarm loops, of 12 housekeeping alarm remote indication loops (TS), and four remote controls (TC). A power supply unit (PSU) provides DC/DC conversion from a primary voltage to produce the regulated secondary voltages required to operate all the backplane boards. The hardware configurations can include a compressor for pressurizing the feeders and waveguides, and a special position is provided inside the rack.
2.3 Operation of the equipment in 1+1 configurations

The 1+1 configurations can enhance link quality and link availability by safeguarding against equipment failure and propagation problems. There are various possible configurations with the ETSI rack layout: 1+1 HSB (Hot Standby), with or without space diversity, 1+1 FD (frequency diversity), 1+1 FD with hybrid diversity, 1+1 with occasional backup.
26/270
September 2000
WEST
EAST
Front panel
Front panel
Front panel
Branch connections
Branch connections
Branch connections
1+1 CONNECTION
1+1 CONNECTION
1+1 CONNECTION

RXX TXX GSU Connections TS/TC *

RXX TIU1 * GSU MSU1 bkp MSU1 * Connections Connections TS/TC * GSU
ESC45 *
ESC45 *
TIU1 *
TIU1
MSU1 bkp MSU1*
MSU1 bkp MSU1*
ESC23
ESC23
Basic board

PSU1

PSU1

PSU1
COMPRESSOR *
COMPRESSOR *
PSUX
PSUX
TERMINAL STATION
Option *
RELAY STATION
Figure 4 Layout of the 9400 LX in ETSI rack configuration (configuration 1+1)
Caution! To convert a 1+0 configuration to a 1+1 configuration requires wiring that is not easy to set up on site. It is therefore essential to make provision when defining the equipment to define the final wiring. Only the boards and configurations will then be changed subsequently. These configurations are obtained by adding to the 1+0 configuration: a transmitter TX board, a receiver RX board, a power supply unit PSU board.
PSUX
TS/TC *
RXX
TXX
RX1
RX1
RX1
TXX
TX1
TX1
TX1
September 2000
27/270
Each channel (Tx, Rx) is powered by its own PSU board, the common elements being powered simultaneously by the two PSU boards for protection. In these configurations, the MSU board, on reception, provides hitless switching between the normal channel and the standby channel.
2.3.1 1+1 HSB configuration

In 1+1 HSB configuration, the system uses two transmitters at the same frequency. A microwave relay switches the power from one to the antenna and the power from the other to the load comprising its output circulator; in the event of a transmission failure, the relay switches in the signal from the other transmitter. In reception, the signal is sent to two receivers via a divider circuit, and the MSU chooses the stronger of the two signals. This system has the advantage of requiring only a single RF transmission channel. It protects the system against a transmitter or receiver failure.
Backup MSU Tributaries TIU MSU Aux 2 Mbit/s
TX_X
TX_1 Microwave relay FILTER
Relay control cable RX_1 ESC 2_3 ESC 4_5

RX_X
Antenna
ESC 2 ESC 3 ESC 4 ESC 5
3dB divider Option ESC 1 GSU SKU TS / TC extension (optional) 7TS 1TC PSU PSU
Environment
Figure 5 Block diagram of a 1+1 HSB configuration (with backup MSU option) This configuration (Figure 5) requires only a single branching filter, but the following must be added: for transmission, a relay for selecting the transmitter, for reception, a 3 dB divider to send the received RF signal to the two receivers. The MSU board selects the receiver from which to take the signals.
2.3.2 1+1 HSB/DIV configuration

This configuration (Figure 6) differs from the 1+1 HSB configuration by the presence of a second antenna for reception, linked to the standby receiver. It does not feature a 3 dB divider, but is equipped with an additional branching filter. This configuration improves availability by introducing space diversity providing protection against propagation problems.
2.3.3 1+1 FD configuration

In a frequency diversity configuration( figure 7), the signal is sent simultaneously over the normal and standby channels, the frequencies of which are sufficiently far apart for propagation fading to be correlated as little as possible (this configuration is not available in the 1.5 GHz frequency band).
28/270
September 2000
TX_1 Tributaries
TIU MSU
Microwave relay
TX_X
FILTER
Aux 2 Mbit/s Antenna ESC 2 ESC 3 ESC 4 ESC 5 ESC 2_3 ESC 4_5
RX_X RX_1
FILTER
Option ESC 1 GSU SKU TS / TC extension (optional) 7TS 1TC PSU PSU
Space diversity antenna
Environment
Figure 6 Block diagram of a 1+1 HSB/DIV configuration (without backup MSU option)
In reception, the MSU chooses the channel receiving the best quality signal. This system safeguards against propagation problems and provides effective protection against the failure of a transmitter and/or a receiver. This configuration is obtained by adding a branching filter and an RF coupler.
Backup MSU Tributaries TIU
TX_1 FILTER RX_1
MSU Aux 2 Mbit/s

TX_X
Antenna
FILTER ESC 2_3 ESC 4_5

RX_X
Option
ESC 1 GSU SKU TS / TC extension (optional) 7TS 1TC PSU PSU
Environment
Figure 7 Block diagram of a 1+1 FD configuration (with backup MSU option)
September 2000
29/270
Tributaries Antenna Antenna

TX_X
RX_1
FILTER
September 2000
FILTER PSU PSU TS/TC Extension (optional)
30/270
Antenna TX_1 FILTER RX_1 TIU Backup MSU Tributaries Aux. 2 Mbit/s FILTER
RX_X
TX_1
Aux. 2 Mbit/s
TX_X
ESC 23 ESC 45
RX_X
ESC 1 GSU
1+1 FD CONFIGURATION (Detail of figure 7)
7TS
1TC Environment Option
1+1 Hybrid FD/SD CONFIGURATION
Figure 8 1+1 Hybrid FD/SD configuration (with standby MSU option)

2.3.4 Hybrid 1+1 FD/DIV configuration

This configuration (Figure 8) can be used on a link when the remote station is a 1+1 FD type station. It enables the signals from that station to be received on two antennas, so adding receive mode space diversity. It requires two branching filters (one for each transceiver), each linked to one antenna (this configuration is not available in the 1.5 GHz frequency band).
2.3.5 1+1 configuration with occasional backup

In this configuration (Figures 9 and 10), the backup channel has no elements in common with the normal channel, and can therefore be independent. It requires: an MSU board for the backup channel (MSU-X) which can itself be backed up (backup MSU-X), a TIU board for the backup channel (TIU-X) which can be different from that of channel 1, a logic switching unit (LSU) which manages switching requests on the basis of alarms occurring during data transmission on the main channel.
If a fault affects channel 1, when transmitting, MSU 1 switches the channel 1 aggregate to the channel X transmitter, whereas, when receiving, it distributes the backup aggregate signal to the different MSU boards (for example, in an N+1 configuration), otherwise MSU board 1 routes the channel X aggregate to channel X. Output to extension
TIU 1 Data ESC OW Aggregate 1 MUX Enable command MSU EXT X ESC 2_3 Enable cmd Enable cmd
Tx 1
ESC 4_5
MSU1 Tx
Data MUX TIU X
Zs = 1 Enable command MSU EXT X Zs = 0 Enable cmd Zs = 1 Enable cmd
Aggregate X
Tx X
MSUX Tx
Note: MSU X is present only in an occasional or independent backup configuration
Extension input Figure 9 Block diagram of a 1+1 FD transmit mode configuration with occasional backup
September 2000
31/270
Extension input
Aggregate 1 Norm Div Bkp div. Bkp DEMUX Data ESC OW TIU 1 reception
Rx 1
DCA, DC X EXT MSU 2 MSU X
ESC 2_3 reception
MSU1 Rx
ESC 4_5 reception
Aggregate X
Norm Div Bkp div. DEMUX
Data
Rx X
DCA, DC X EXT MSU 2 MSU X
Bkp
TIU X reception
Output to extension
Note: MSU X is present only in an occasional or an independent backup configuration
MSUX Rx
Figure 10 Block diagram of a 1+1 FD receive mode configuration with occasional backup
2.4 Equipment operation in N+1 configurations (1<N<6)

In these configurations (see Figure 11), each channel is independent. It comprises a transmitter/receiver combination (transceiver), linked to an MSU board, which may be protected, a TIU board and a PSU. The TIU boards of the N channels are the same. The backup channel sends and receives the channel 1 aggregate (always priority), unless transmission performance on one of the other channels is degraded. In this case, the logic switching unit, LSU, when sending, switches the failed channels aggregate to the backup channel via the MSU boards and sends the switchover information to the remote station via a secured engineering order wire. When receiving, the LSU board, under control from the remote station, switches the aggregate signal on the standby channel via the MSU boards to send it to the protected channels demultiplexer. This means that the data sent via the N channels have the same bit rate. Dialogue data with the remote logic system is routed simultaneously via the order wire on channels 1 and 2, and in both directions in the case of a relay station. Section 6.22.1 briefly explains operation of the LSU board. The concept of very high priority channel means that if switching requests are received from a channel of medium or low priority and at the same time from channel 1 (very high priority), channel 1 is always protected whatever the state of the other channel with medium or low priority. If there is no request on behalf of channel 1, the channel with impaired quality will be protected. When channel 1 simply has priority, it is protected if the concurrent switching requests have the same level of severity. If the switching request for channel 1 is of lower severity, the other channel is protected.
Figure 11 is a block diagram of a 2+1 configuration.
32/270
September 2000
Tributaries 1 to 16 Backup MSU Multiplex & switching unit RX 2 Receiver TIU 1 Tributary interface MSU Multiplex & switching unit TX 1 Transmitter ESC 3 Backup MSU Multiplex & switching unit RX 1 Receiver ESC 4 ESC 5 MSU Multiplex & switching unit TX X Transmitter
TIU 2 Tributary interface Duplexed filters
MSU Multiplex & switching unit TX 2 Transmitter
Enginering Service channels (ESC23) Engineering Service channels (ESC45) TIUX (Optional) Tributary interface Backup MSU Multiplex & switching unit Serial bus Serial bus EOW LSU N+1 logic switching unit EOW Serial bus with MSUs 3 Tx/Rx BACKPLANE BRANCH CONNECTION RX X Receiver Antenna GSU Supervision interface TSTC (Option) DC PSU X power supply PSU 1 power supply PSU 2 power supply POWER SUPPLY SUBRACK
Tributaries 1 to 16 Auxiliary bitstream
ESC 2
ESC 3
ESC 4
Figure 11 Block diagram for a 2+1 configuration
September 2000
ESC 5
Tributaries 1 to 16
7TS1TC
NMS (rQ2)
TSTC
33/270
The backup channel can be configured as an occasional or independent backup channel. In this case, a TIU X board and an MSU X board must be added, which can, if necessary, be protected .
Protected configurations in which N is greater than 2 require the addition of an extension rack.
2.5 Configurations with space diversity

Whatever the basic configuration, upgrading from a configuration with space diversity entails adding a diversity rack containing: as many receivers (RX) as there are channels, a power supply unit (PSU) for each group of three receivers (1, 2, X or 3, 4, 5), optionally, a second power supply unit (PSU) for each group of three receivers for protection purposes.
2.6 Engineering service channels

The equipment includes five engineering service channels (ESC 1 as standard and ESC 2 to 5 optionally) when the tributary bit rates are greater than 2x2 Mbit/s (it has only three with 2x2 Mbit/s rates). ESC 1 is reserved for the supervision function integrated on the GSU board. In the equipment, two positions, ESC23 and ESC45, are for adding and dropping engineering service channels 2 to 5. Depending on the board used, these ESCs can be configured and customized as indicated by the table below. SLOT BOARD ESC 2_3 3CC05708ABAA ESC 2 3 4 5 4 5 TYPE OF SERVICE CHANNEL First telephone channel with selective calling, used for calls between stations of the network Customized by daughter boards (see following table) Second telephone channel with selective calling, used for calls between the stations of the network Customized by daughter boards (see following table) Customized by daughter boards (see following table) Customized by daughter boards (see following table)
ESC23
ESC45 (Bit rates > 2x2 Mbit/s)
ESC 2_3 3CC05708ABAA ESC 4_5 3CC05709AAAA
The table below summarizes the options supported by the service channels depending on the type of daughter board used by ESCs 3 to 5. DAUGHTER BOARD ESC_1 ESC_2 ESC_3 ESC_4 ESC_5 REFERENCE 3CC05710AAAA 3CC05711AAAA 3CC05712AAAA 3CC05713AAAA 3CC06482AAAA ENGINEERING SERVICE CHANNEL TYPE 64 kbit/s point to point, G.703 codirectional interface 600 4wire analogue 64 kbit/s point to point, V.11 or V.28 Asynchronous digital (1 x 9.6 kbit/s or 2 x 4.8 kbit/s maximum) V.11 point to point or point to multipoint (threeway adapter) Asynchronous digital (1 x 9.6 kbit/s or 2 x 4.8 kbit/s maximum) V.28 point to point or point to multipoint (threeway adapter)
2.6.1 ESC number 1

ESC 1 supports the supervision bus. This bus is routed between the stations via the radio link (channel 1 and channel X in a 1+1 configuration) and is available, in the stations, on the NMS1 and NMS2 ports, for pointtomultipoint links (Figure 12).
34/270
September 2000
STATION A EAST TERMINAL A1 WEST RACK B1
STATION B REPEATER EAST RACK B2
STATION C
WEST TERMINAL C1
NMS1
NMS2
NMS1
NMS2
NMS1 Link
NMS2
NMS1
NMS2
STATION D EAST RACK B3 WEST TERMINAL D1
NMS1 : J154 NMS2 : J160 Link
NMS1
NMS2
NMS1
NMS2
Figure 12 Pointtomultipoint mode supervision links
With an integrated mediation function, one of the networks stations is designated a master station. It then supervises a network of up to 63 other 9400 LX and/or 9400 UX type network elements. When coupled with an external mediation device from the Alcatel 1300 range, the bus supports other Alcatel network elements. This terminal is identified by a physical address from 1 to 253, with address 0 reserved for the master station of the 1322 NX-SRL network mediation device. Two terminals of the same network must not have the same physical address. Supervision bus continuity is provided by a switching matrix defined in the system software (Operation Parameters application, see section 4.5.2). This matrix will interconnect radio (MSU1), cable (NMS1, NMS2) and equipment (SCC1) input/output ports via the bus (Figure 13).
MSU1 (Radio) SCC1 (Supervision)
NMS1
NMS2
Figure 13 Supervision bus switching matrix The six interconnections are normally used (Standard Configuration option in the 946LUX11 system software, or all check boxes selected in the 946LUX12 version).
2.6.2 Engineering service channel No 2

Note: All the ESCs are available in digital (nondemultiplexed) form on connectors ESC 2-3 and ESC 4-5. The ESCs are available in baseband mode (speech mode calls) if ESC x_y boards are installed. ESC 2 is a telephone service channel with selective calling. The handset is connected to the connector marked 1 on the racks top panel. Each network element equipped with a telephone is assigned a number between
September 2000
35/270
in digital form, on the ESC 2-3 connector (J156) in the connection area on the backplane mother board, for executing a digital transfer in node stations.
In a terminal station, the equipment includes an ESC 2_3 board and can have a telephone handset. In a node station, the various components of the repeaters are configured as follows (Figure 14):
ESC 2_3 board Connector ESC2 Dir 1 Dir 2 Baseband analogue link
Connector ESC 2-3 Digital link
Connector ESC 2-3
NODE STATION
Telephone that can be disabled
ESC2 direction 1 : J161 ESC2 direction 2 : J166 ESC2_3 : J156
ESC 2_3 board Connector ESC2 Dir 1 Dir 2
Connector ESC 2-3 Digital link To next rack
Connector ESC 2-3
Figure 14 Telephone ESC connections in a node station The stations telephone handset is connected to one of the network elements that includes an ESC 2_3 board. The software can be used to disable this function in the other elements of the station which contain ESC 2_3 boards. An ESC 2_3 board must be present in each of the racks connected by an analogue link or connected to a telephone handset. There must not be a digital link between two racks equipped with ESC 2_3 boards, only an analogue link, since the ports have an audio frequency interface. NOTE: Service channels ESC 2 to ESC 5 are bidirectional, so each channel has two connectors, located one above the other and assigned to each direction. The top connector is assigned to direction 1 and the bottom connector to direction 2. The result is that (Figure 15) : in the remote station in direction 1, the service channel is located on the bottom connector (since it originates from direction 2), in the remote station in direction 2, the service channel is located on the top connector (since it originates from direction 1).
36/270
September 2000
011 and 999 (the value X00 is excluded) on installation. The number 00 is for a general call. No two network terminals may have the same number. ESC 2 is available (see Figure 45 in section 3.13.2.2) : in analogue form, on the ESC2 connectors (J161 - direction 1 and J166 - direction 2) in the connection area of the backplane mother board, for setting up a pointtomultipoint link,
Direction 1
Direction 2
Direction 1
Direction 2
Figure 15 Service channel transmission over a link
2.6.3 ESC numbers 3 to 5

These ESCs may be digital (G.703 or V.11/V.28 64 kbit/s, V.11 or V.28 9.6 or 2x4.8 kbit/s maximum) or analogue (3003400 Hz 4wire E+M audio channel), and of the pointtopoint or pointtomultipoint type. In the particular case of an ESC 4 assigned as a second telephone channel with selective calling, refer to section 2.6.2, replace ESC2 with ESC4 and ESC 2_3 with ESC 4_5. The connectors are identified as follows: ESC4 direction 1 : J163, ESC4 direction 2 : J168, ESC4-5 : J171.
STATION B REPEATER WEST RACK B1 ESC3 Dir 1 ESC3 Dir 2 J162 J167 EAST RACK B2 ESC3 Dir 1 ESC3 Dir 2 J162 J167 STATION C WEST TERMINAL C1 ESC3 Dir 2 J167 V.11 or V.28 EQPT STATION D
STATION A EAST TERMINAL A1 ESC3 Dir 1 J162 V.11 or V.28 EQPT
Interrack link
EAST RACK B3 ESC3 Dir 2 ESC3 Dir 1 J167 J162 interrack link
WEST TERMINAL D1 ESC3 Dir 1 J162 V.11 or V.28 EQPT
ESC x_y board + ESC 3 daughter board
Figure 16 Example of pointtopoint ESC 3 configurations
2.7 Remote indications and remote controls (TS/TC)

2.7.1 Basic equipment
The equipment has : Three loops, respectively preassigned for Urgent alarm (URG), Non-urgent alarm (NURG) and Attended (ATT) states. Each alarm or event generated by the equipment can be classified as Urgent, Not Urgent, Inhibited or Status by the supervisory software (section 4.5.4). a remote control loop, available to the user:
September 2000
37/270
The three contacts of these loops (common, normally closed and normally open) are available on connector J210 TS/TC (GSU) in the connection area of the 3 Tx/Rx backplane. The loop formed by the common and normally closed contacts is normally open in the absence of an alarm; seven out of eight housekeeping alarms (remote indications by dry loops), which are available to the user. The first is assigned for the fan alarm. The installer or operator can configure the housekeeping loops as normally open or normally closed according to the configuration of the soldered links (swaps) on the GSU board (see section 7.9). On installation, the software should be used to name each loop. All these loops are available on connector J210 TS/TC (GSU) in the 3 Tx/Rx backplanes connection area.
EQUIPMENT Relay setting in the absence of an alarm or remote control Housekeeping loop normally open (in the absence of an alarm) Normally open Common Normally closed 0.5 A / 100 V dry loops OPTION Housekeeping loop normally closed (in the absence of an alarm) EQUIPMENT
ALARMS AND REMOTE CONTROLS
REMOTE INDICATIONS
Figure 17 Alarms, remote controls and remote indications An adapter board (ref. 3CC07444AAAA), which mates with connector J210 TS/TC (GSU) on the 3 Tx/Rx backplane, facilitates the loop wiring by providing the user with two WAGO type connectors.
2.7.2 16 TS/TC option

The 16 TS/TC option provides the user, in addition to the basic configuration, with: 16 equipment alarms, 4 remote controls, 12 environment alarms,
The environment remote indication inputs are loops that can be open or closed on an alarm condition. On installation, the software can be used to name each loop. The option comprises a unit containing a board which provides the user with three WAGO connectors. The unit is installed in a position provided in the bottom part of the rack, above the position of the backup channels power supply unit.
2.8 Loopback options

The loopback options are provided to facilitate commissioning and maintenance operations. Figures 18 and 19 show the positioning of the loops according to the configuration. The local loopback configuration loops the aggregate signal at the output of the MSU multiplexer.
38/270
September 2000
Tributaries
TIU TX
Aux 2 Mbit/s
MSU RX Local loopback of aggregate
ESC 2_3 ESC 4_5
Option
ESC 1 GSU SKU TS / TC extension (optional) 7TS 1TC PSU 1 PSU X
Environment
Figure 18 Local loopback A local loopback configuration disconnects the link and isolates it from the network. A local loopback cannot be set up in a remote station (remote control rejected). The remote loopback configuration loops the receive output of a tributary to its transmit input at the MSU output to the TIU. This makes it possible, with a BER analyzer located in the local station, to check out the operation of a hop (Figure 19). The remote loopback configuration can be set up only on an active tributary.
TX Tributaries TIU MSU RX RX
TX MSU TIU Tributaries
Remote tributary loopback
LOCAL STATION Figure 19 Remote loopback
REMOTE STATION
2.9 9400 LX network

9400 LX network elements can be used to set up pointtopoint transmission networks. The network end points are made up of terminal stations, in which all the tributaries are connected to the customer s equipment. The various intermediate stations are made up of repeater type relay or terminal network elements. In a repeater type relay station, all or some of the tributaries are transmitted to a second station of the same type without being demultiplexed. If all the tributaries are transmitted, the two network elements are configured
September 2000
39/270
as repeater without drop/insert capability and have no TIU board. Otherwise, the two network elements are configured as repeaters with drop/insert function and each has a TIU board installed (see Figure 20). Similarly, to add/drop an ESC n_ 2 or n_ 3, the network element must include an ESC 2_3 board, and to drop an ESC n_ 4 or n_ 5, there must be an ESC 2_3 board in position ESC23 and an ESC 4_5 board in position ESC45.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Aggregate signal containing tributaries 1 to 4 5 6 5 Terminal A Routing matrix Repeater without drop/insert Repeater without drop/insert Repeater with drop/insert Repeater with drop/insert Terminal B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
In a terminaltype relay, all the tributaries are dropped and the equipment includes a TIU.
TIU board
Aggregate
TIU board
TIU board
TIU board
Terminal Terminal Terminal A B C 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 1 5 2 5 3 6 4 (nu) 7 (nu) 6 (nu) 8 (nu) 7 (nu) 8 (nu)
Terminal C 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Tributaries
TIU board
TIU board
(nu) = not used (not enabled)
Figure 20 Example of drop/insert function in a relay station Compared to terminal stations, relay stations require twice the equipment (two racks for configurations up to 2+1, four racks for configurations from 3+1 to 5+1). However, the ESC boards of one direction are not needed in some configurations, as explained in section 2.6.
2.10 Equipment management

System configuration is normally handled by connecting a laptop PC with dedicated craft terminal (CT) software installed. The equipment is managed by the GSU boards 68360 microprocessor. When the equipment is installed and commissioned, the Installation Parameters (see section 4.4) and Operation Parameters (see section 4.5) applications of the supervision function are used to load the parameters of the link (configuration, bit rate, frequency, etc.) from the CT. The configuration is backed up in three microcontrollers, located respectively on the GSU board, the MSU board and the RX board. On power up, the 68630 microprocessor compares the contents of the three microcontrollers : if the contents match, it loads them into the various modules of the equipment and switches the equipment to operational mode, if the contents of two of the three microcontrollers match, it configures the third microcontroller the same, loads the contents into the various modules of the equipment and switches the equipment to operational mode (majority configuration loading). if the contents of the three microcontrollers all differ, the equipment switches to the default configuration. The three urgent alarm, nonurgent alarm and alarm attended lamps (see section 2.11) on the racks top panel flash simultaneously. The installation parameters and operational parameters must then be reloaded.
40/270
September 2000
This simplifies maintenance, by avoiding having to reload the configuration manually after a change of GSU, MSU or RX board. When the new board is inserted into the equipment, the configuration is automatically reloaded into the new subsystem, and the system switches automatically to the operational state.
The other supervisory applications are for monitoring link quality (performance), displaying alarms, sending remote controls, etc.
2.11 Controls, indications and connectors on the rack control panel

The control panel at the top of the ETSI rack is equipped with the following controls and indicators:
BUSY AL STP NURG TEST AL CUT OPER URG ATT LED
L 1
H OFF
BUSY 2
9400LX
Figure 21 Control panel on the main rack
ITEM OPER / AL. STP
TYPE Twoposition switch Threeposition switch with automatic return to centre position
FUNCTION To the right: alarm outputs (urgent and non urgent) disabled from GSU board relays (maintenance operations). To the left: normal operation To the left: alarm LED test In the middle: normal operation To the right: acknowledgement of urgent and/or nonurgent alarms, which remain indicated by the ATT LED Speaker volume adjustment (telephone channel N_ 1) : To the left: low In the middle: loudspeaker off To the right: high
TEST LED / AL. CUT
L / OFF / H
Three stable position switch
URG NURG ATT BUSY F

1 2
Red LED Red LED Yellow LED Green LED Green LED 9way Sub D connector RJ11 connector RJ11 connector
Urgent alarm Nonurgent alarm Alarm attended (acknowledged) Line associated with telephone handset N_ 1 (left ESC 2) or N_ 2 (right - ESC 4) busy
RS232 link with craft terminal (PC) Connection for telephone handset N_ 1 (ESC 2) Connection for telephone handset N_ 2 (ESC 4)
September 2000
41/270
2.12 List of boards

The tables below list the boards that can be used to create the various 9400 LX configurations in a 19inch cabinet, with their parts list numbers.
2.12.1 Boards common to the various frequency bands

DESCRIPTION Multiplex and switching unit board (MSU) Backup multiplex and switching unit board (backup MSU) with ribbon cable connecting to the main MSU N+1 logic switching unit (LSU) TIU board (five possible variants): S 4x2 Mbit/s TIU (TIU_F1) S 8x2 Mbit/s TIU (TIU_F2) S 16x2 Mbit/s + aux 2 Mbit/s TIU (TIU_F3) S 34 Mbit/s + aux 2 Mbit/s TIU (TIU_F5) S 1x2 or 1x8 Mbit/s + aux 2 Mbit/s TIU (TIU_F6) ESC board channels 2 and 3 (ESC 2_3) ESC board channels 4 and 5 (ESC 4_5) ESC daughter board (five possible variants) S G.703 64 kbit/s channel (ESC_1) S Fourwire audio 64 kbit/s channel (ESC_2) S Synchronous 64 kbit/s channel (ESC_3) S V.11 9.6 kbit/s channel (ESC_4) S V.28 9.6 kbit/s channel (ESC_5) General supervision unit (GSU) SIMM memory board Power supply ($ 20 V to $ 60 V) Software key unit (SKU) for versions of the 946LUX1x system software TS/TC board (TSTC) a TYPE Basic Option Basic Variant Variant Variant Variant Variant Basic Option Variant Variant Variant Variant Variant Basic Basic Basic Basic Option PART N_ 3CC 05691 AAxx 3CC 06201 AAxx 3CC 05706 AAxx 3CC 05862 AAxx 3CC 05868 AAxx 3CC 05869 AAxx 3CC 05871 AAxx 3CC 05873 AAxx 3CC 05708 ABxx 3CC 05709 AAxx 3CC 05710 AAxx 3CC 05711 AAxx 3CC 05712 AAxx 3CC 05713 AAxx 3CC 06482 AAxx 3CC 05690 ABxx 3CC 06353 Axxx 3AW 00435 AAxx 3CC 07619 ABxx 3CC 05705 AAxx
2.12.2 Boards specific to the various frequency bands

2.12.2.1 1.5 GHz band DESIGNATION 1.5 GHz transmitter board S 4QAM S 16QAM 1.5 GHz receiver board S 4QAM S 16QAM TYPE PARTS LIST NUMBER 3CC 08715 AAxx 3CC 08776 AAxx 3CC 08714 AAxx 3CC 08962 AAxx
Variant Variant Variant Variant
42/270
September 2000
2.12.2.2 2 GHz band DESIGNATION Transmitter board (three possible variants) S 2 GHz transmitter (1.7 2.1 GHz) (TX_1.7) S 2 GHz transmitter (1.9 2.3 GHz) (TX_1.9) S 2 GHz transmitter (2.3 2.7 GHz) (TX_2.3) Receiver board (three possible variants) S 2 GHz receiver (1.7 2.1 GHz) (RX_1.7) S 2 GHz receiver (1.9 2.3 GHz) (RX_1.9) S 2 GHz receiver (2.3 2.7 GHz) (RX_2.3) 2.12.2.3 7/8 GHz band DESIGNATION 7/8 GHz transmitter board S 4QAM S 16QAM 7/8 GHz receiver board S 4QAM S 16QAM TYPE PARTS LIST NUMBER 3CC 05702 AAxx 3CC 08440 AAxx 3CC 08439 AAxx 3CC 08941 AAxx TYPE PARTS LIST NUMBER 3CC 05696 AAxx 3CC 05697 AAxx 3CC 05698 AAxx 3CC 05699 AAxx 3CC 05700 AAxx 3CC 05701 AAxx
Variant Variant Variant Variant Variant Variant
Variant Variant Variant Variant
September 2000
43/270
2.13 Technical and mechanical specifications

RADIO System
Frequency band (GHz)
9414 LX
1.351.53 ETS 300630 TIUR Rec. 746 Ann. 1 ERC. T/R 13-01 (Mbit/s) 2x2 4x2 8 2x8 8x2 4x8 3x8 + 4x2 16x2 34
9420 LX
1.72.7 ETS 300633 TIUR Rec. 283 TIUR Rec. 746 Ann. 2 TIUR Rec. 382 2x2 4x2 8 2x8 8x2 4x8 3x8 + 4x2 16x2 34
9470 LX
7.18.5 EN 301216 TIUR Rec. 385/386 Contel standard OIRT-2 standard 2x2 4x2 8 2x8 8x2 4x8 3x8 + 4x2 16x2 34
Reference standard (system)
Frequency plan
Bit rate
Channel spacing
(MHz) 3.5 1.75 4.937 7 3.5 14 7 14 3.5 7 14 28 3.5 4.937 7 3.5 14 7 28 14
S 4 QAM modulation S 16QAM modulation

Framed bit rate (Mbit/s) Transmitted power (Transmitter output) (dBm) Branching losses (Tx+Rx) (dB)
9.874 19.748 39.497
4.937 9.874 19.748 39.497 +30
9.874 19.748 39.497
+33 (4QAM) +30 (with 16 QAM option)
+27 (4 QAM) +24 (with 16QAM option)
S in 1+0 S in 1+1 HSB (Main channel) S in 1+1 FD (Frequency diversity)

Frequency stability Synthesizer increment Receiver threshold at 10-3 (ppm) (kHz) 97 93 126.5 119.5 94 90
3.5 8.0 $5 10 91 87 84 110.5 97 94
3.5 8.0 5.2 $5 10 91 117.5 88.5 115 97 119.2 94 90
4.8 9.3 5.6 $5 10 91 87 113.2 88.5 84 110.7
(dBm) (Receiver input) 4 QAM modulation
Receiver threshold at 10-3 (dBm) (Receiver input) 16 QAM modulation System gain at 10-3 in 1+0 4QAM modulation (*) System gain at 10-3 in 1+0 16QAM modulation (*)
123.5 120.5 116.5 113.5
123.5 120.5
116.2
109.2 106.2 103.2
(*)Excluding antenna, includes branching losses
MODEM
Modulation Error correcting code Equalizer Link identification code 4 QAM (16 QAM in option for 9414 LX and 9470 LX) Parity 32/31 with software decision (Wagner code) for all bit rates 32 codes
44/270
September 2000
MULTIPLEXING
Tributary interface
2 Mbit/s G.703 75 or 120 8 Mbit/s 75 34 Mbit/s G.703 75 UIT-T G.823 / G.921 Automatic hitless switching Number of 64 kbit/s channels: 5 (at 4x2 Mbit/s and above) 3 (at 2x2 Mbit/s) Supervisory channel Telephone channel with selective calling (DTMF) four-wire 3003400 Hz telephone channel + E&M signalling, 600 ohms Codirectional 64 kbit/s G.703 Codirectional 64 kbit/s, V11 (RS485) or V28 (RS232) 1 x 9600 or 2 x 4800 bauds max. V11 1 x 9600 or 2 x 4800 bauds max. V28 2 Mbit/s channel for the 16x2, 4 x 8, 3x8 + 4 x 2 and 34 Mbit/s rates Not available in 9414 LX version with 4 QAM modulation
Jitter Receive mode switching Engineering service channels
ESC interface
Auxiliary bit stream
MANMACHINE INTERFACE
Visual indications Other interfaces Six light emitting diodes (LEDs) on the control panel F interface for PC (Windowst) Interface for telephone handset (ESC 2 or 4)
MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
Equipment alarms Environment alarms 3 outputs (+16 with 16 TS/TC option) 7 inputs / 1 output (+12 inputs / 4 outputs with 16 TS/TC option)
POWER SUPPLY
Nominal voltage (primary) Polarity Max. electrical consumption $20 to $60V + or or floating (ground insulated) 1+0 : 60 W 1+1 : 105 W
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Sizes (LxPxH) Weight 300 x300 x1800 mm 1+0 : 37 kg; 1+1 : 43 kg; 2+1 : 50 kg
ENVIRONMENT
Temperature Electromagneticcompatibility Safety 10C to +55C ETSI ETS 300385 EN 60950
September 2000
45/270

September 2000
3 Installation
3.1 Delivery
When you receive the equipment in its packaging: Check the condition of the packaging. If damaged, make your reservations known to the carrier as quickly as possible.
3.1.1 Unpacking
Unpack the equipment according to the instructions on the packaging. Take an inventory and identify any missing items. If the delivery does not match the delivery advice note, notify ALCATEL within 48 hours of receipt of the equipment. Leave the equipment readily accessible during the work.
3.1.2 Storage
If installation is to be deferred, the type of packaging will define the equipment storage conditions: cardboard boxes should be warehoused indoors, in a well aired room, wooden or plywood boxes may be stored outdoors, provided that they are protected from rain and the suns rays.
3.1.3 Checking the delivered configuration

The configuration is normally shipped by substation (one substation = one transmission direction, sometimes includes a diversity rack common to both directions); it comprises: a box containing a single, double or triple rack depending on the configuration, a customer service envelope, Faston terminals for wiring up the power supply and an optional connector kit, an installationspecific box with contents depending on the type of installation hardware ordered (telephone, PC, diskettes, Flextwist waveguides, compressor/dryer, mounting, cable, etc), one box, where appropriate, for each antenna, one box, where appropriate, containing antenna support pipes for each antenna, where appropriate, one set of site materials (rags, cable trays, tools, etc), packaged according to the type of equipment.
The substation label affixed to the wooden box is reproduced below in figure 22 and indicates the content. The software key label, which is also affixed to the box, specifies its functional capabilities.
3.1.4 Equipment identification labels

Both kinds of label mentioned in the previous section and affixed to the box are also affixed to the equipment: the substation label (Figure 22) is mounted on the inside of the racks side panel and the other is mounted on the software key itself (Figure 23).
September 2000
47/270
3.1.4.1 Label for ETSI racks
Ordre Station name Direction Mechanics Station type Config. Capacity hard Drop-insert Capacity soft Frequency MHz
Pays Bordeaux Sud ETSI
Station name Far end station Equipment receptacle Station type
ETSI rack Relay (repeater) or Terminal 1+0 ; 1+0 extendable; 1+1 FD* ; 1+1 FD* extendable; 1+1 FD/SD* ; 1+1 FD/SD* extendable; 1+1 HSB ; 1+1 HSB/SD ; 2+0 ; 2+1 FD* ; 2+1 FD/SD* ; 3+0 ; N+1 FD* ; N+1 FD/SD*
Configuration
Tributary capacity (TIU) 4 x 2 ; 8 x 2 ; 16 x 2 ; 8 and 34 Mbit/s Tributary drop/insert YES or NO (repeater option) Max tributary rate Tx frequency: TX Rx frequency: RX for channels X, N1, N2, N3, N4, N5 Capacity given by software key Polarization: V = Vertical H = Horizontal
Tributary impedance
75 or 120 YES or NO 37way SubD or1.6/5.6 adapteror BNC 75 or 120 Option: YES or NO
Impedance 2 Mb way-side Access 2 Mb way-side TS / TC MSU stand-by PSU div. stand-by Local display Simm
Aux 2 Mbit/s present Port connector Aux 2 Mbit/simpedance 16 TS/TC option board Backup MSU board Backup PSU board Not used Nb mem extensions Telephone number ESC 3 port type
Dehydrator Edition date Model / ICS Serial number Mnemonic

* Occasional backup channel optional ** Bar coded and in plain language ESC 4 port type
1 per GSU Not entered in the factory G.703 codirectional 64 kbit/s G.703P to P P to P or P to MP analogue V.11 or V.28 64 kbit/s, P to P 9 600 bit/s max. / 2 x 4 800 bit/s max. V.11, P to P or P to MP. 9 600 bit/s max. / 2 x 4 800 bit/s max. V.28, P to P or P to MP. With ESC 23, second ESC with selective calling or with ESC 45, same capabilities as ESC 3
ESC 5 port type Capabilities as in ESC 3 Model code N_ and revision index** Serial number** Marketing identifier, eg: 9400LXG406
Figure 22 Substation labels
48/270
September 2000
3.1.4.2 Software key label

Integrated mediation function: MASTER or SLAVE Configuration : 1+0 max. or N+1 max. (with 1p N p 5) Remote craft terminal (RCT) : OPTION Y (yes) or N (no)
Maximum bit rate (Mbit/s) : 2 x 2 4 x 2 8 x 2 16 x 2
7415.50 - 7440.50
TX : Permitted transmit frequency band
Figure 23 Typical software key label
3.2 Installing the equipment

3.2.1 Information required for installation
Appendix 1 contains tables to be completed, to collate all the general information required for the installation. It is assumed that the installer has already carried out installation of the other peripheral equipment (cable ways, multiplex, etc).
3.2.2 Precautions concerning electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

1) Installation is designed to meet all new requirements concerning electromagnetic compatibility and safety. 2) The EMC performance of the equipment depends largely on installation practices (cable installation, earthing connections, etc) which should be based on best trade practices.
3.2.3 Tools required

The list of the tools required to install the microwave links of the 9400 LX family in an ETSI rack is given below. TOOL Drill and set of masonry bits 5 mm Allen key 3 mm Allen key 3 mm Allen key for HMC4 screws 3 mm Allen key with handle* 7 mm flat wrench 8 mm flat torque wrench* 10 mm box wrench or flat wrench Special wrench shown in Figure 24 or, failing this, 30 mm box wrench 3/100 mm flat blade screwdriver USE For fixing the ETSI racks to the ground (see section 3.3.2.1) For fixing the ETSI racks to the floor: securing/dismantling multiple ETSI racks (M6 socket cap screws) For fixing the distributor to the top of the ETSI rack (M4 socket cap screw) Connecting/disconnecting waveguides and branching filters For mounting/dismantling subracks (M4 socket cap screws) For tightening EMC contact tabs For fastening/unfastening flexible coaxial cable connectors For securing/dismantling racks (nuts for M6 socket cap screws) For securing lock nuts on ETSI rack plinth jacks For fixing BNC or 1.6-5.6 port adapter boards to Sub-D connectors in the connection area of 3 Tx/Rx backplanes
September 2000
49/270
TOOL 20 mm torque driver or wrench Crimping tool, ref: 9400LXT005 * if necessary.
USE For securing/dismantling ETSI rack side panels For crimping Sub-D connectors
Naturally, standard installer s tools are essential: drill bits, soldering iron, cable tie pliers, etc. A kit of consumable materials, ref: 3CC07673AAAA for four stations, is available as an option. The tools described above are the same whatever the 9400 LXs frequency band.
3.3 ETSI rack mechanical installation

The 9400 LX is installed in a single, double or triple ETSI rack depending on configuration. The single rack (without 2 Mbit/s port distributor) measures 1850 x 300 x 300 mm. The equipment is shipped complete with boards installed. Unless otherwise specified, the system is prewired and configured in the factory according to the configuration requested by the customer. DO NOT MOVE THE BOARDS The equipment has associated accessories and standard installation kits that can be supplied as options. The next part of this document describes the installation methods, based on the standard kits defined by ALCATEL. The installer should refer to Appendix 12 for a list of items available.
3.3.1 ETSI rack mechanical installation

Distributor Rack
The basic equipment is in the form of a rack which can be installed in a row, in the middle of a room or against a wall. Basic equipment dimensions are: (Values in mm) Without distributor With distributor Height 1850 2170 Width 300 300 Depth 300 300
With distributor
Without distributor
S Rack stability is provided by its floor fixing. S In the top part of the rack, allow sufficient clearance for fixing and connecting cables and waveguides or feeder(s). S Also allow clearance at the front for opening the door.
50/270
September 2000
3.3.2 Fixing to the floor

3.3.2.1 Fixing a single rack
BOTTOM VIEW 299 239 FRONT M6 socket cap screw
S The equipment is supplied with screw fastenings as standard. S The rack is secured by four M6 socket cap screws, inserted through the jacks in the rack plinth and into the expansion inserts (RAWL plugs) previously inserted in holes drilled in the floor. Drill hole : 12 mm
Height adjusting jack Lock nut
Depth
: 60 mm
S When the position of the rack has been decided, the holes should be drilled in the floor in accordance with the diagram opposite. S When the inserts have been installed, position the rack and insert an M6 socket cap screw into the hole of each jack and screw it into the tapped insert without preventing the jack from rotating. S Use a wide wrench or the optional special wrench (shown in Figure 24) to level the rack, engaging it in the crossconfigured notches of each of the four plinth jacks to rotate the jack. When the rack is in place, tighten each jack lock nut against the plinth using the wrench shown in Figure 24 while holding the jack in positon (see Figure 25). S Finish by tightening the M6 socket cap screws in the four jacks.
299,7
Rack plinth
182
Expansion bolt Floor
119,5
Figure 24 Wrench for adjusting the rack jacks, ref. : 3CC07956AAAA
66
September 2000
51/270
ADJUSTABLE JACK
LOCK NUT CROSS SECTION KK RAWL INSERT
GROUND
Figure 25 Leveling and fixing the rack to the ground 3.3.2.2 Fixing multiple ETSI racks Whatever the configuration, each rack will be secured to the floor. In line, the drilling template for fixing the plinth will be in accordance with the dimensions given in Figure 26 :
30 239 60 239
182
66
Front
Figure 26 Fixing multiple racks in line
In the case of a node station (triple, quadruple terminal, etc), the equipment will be installed in rows, back to back, to allow for future extensions (see Figure 27).
Front panel
66
182
104
182
30
239
60
Front panel 239
Figure 27 Fixing multiple racks back to back
52/270
September 2000
3.3.3 Assembling ETSI racks

In theory, the ETSI racks of a link are supplied assembled. However, if needed in particular station, it is possible to combine or modify the assembly of terminal or relay equipment and put together two or more racks with all the basic configurations (see example in Figure 27). Assembly is facilitated by a front embellishing bar and a set of screws and nuts for the sides. It is also possible to secure the racks in position back to back using the tapped holes located in the top rear corners of the rack, with a connecting bar and two M6 screws per fixing.
September 2000
53/270
DETAIL C
RACK ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE 1) Remove the facing side panels of the racks (17 M4 Torx screws), 2) Place the two racks side by side, 3) Fasten the racks together using M4 socket cap screws to fasten together the side reinforcing bars (top and bottom) of the two racks as shown:
in detail B for the back of the racks, in detail A for the front of the racks.
4) Fix the embellishing piece at the top and bottom of the racks (four screws, see details C and A).
DETAIL B
Back of rack M4 socket cap screw M4 socket cap screw DETAIL A Front of rack 1 Front of rack 2
Embellishing piece
Figure 28 Assembling ETSI rack
54/270
September 2000
3.4 Connecting to the feeder

In the configuration with no space diversity, only the left feeder port is used.
3.4.1 1.5 and 2 GHz bands

In the 1.5 and 2 GHz frequency bands, the radio output is via a female N plug. Connection to the feeder is via a 1.5 m coaxial tail terminated by male N plugs and with reference 3CC07568AAAA (or see Appendix 13 for how to construct the tail).
1.5 and 2 GHz RF port with coaxial tail Support bracket L : 300 (can be cut on site) Coaxial tail Colson cable tie Colson cable tie Flange 7-8 GHz RF port with flextwist waveguide Fixing bracket, L : 300 (can be cut on site) Flextwist waveguide Waveguide antenna connector
FRONT
FRONT

12.62 17.17 28.49 17.17 47.8

4 holes 4.17
1800 mm
Coaxial tail fitted with male N plugs (detail))
Waveguide antenna connector
Antenna end
Radio end
Sealing window Flange
Figure 29 Connecting the radio port to the feeder
18.72
18.72 47.8
UBR 84 or WR112 FLANGE
3.4.2 7 and 8 GHz bands

Connection can be set up in two ways: directly on the roof of the rack: the connector + sealing window assembly is fixed directly to the racks UBR84 flange. The minimum height of the waveguide relative to the floor is 2.4 m. on the roof of the rack, with flexible waveguide (flextwist): the connector + sealing window assembly is fixed directly to the UBR84 flange of the 800 mm long flextwist waveguide. The two ends of this waveguide are terminated with a flange for connecting to the waveguide. The minimum height of the waveguide relative to the floor is 2 m.
Refer to the manual supplied with the antenna connector for how to assemble the waveguides and connector.
1800 mm
September 2000
55/270
3.5 Installing the compressor/dryer

The compressor is used if the antenna/equipment link is by waveguides or pressurized coaxial cable. The role of the compressor is to maintain the feeder at low pressure. The compressor is installed vertically at the bottom of the rack, to the left of the power supply unit backplane. It is fitted with a power supply cable, an alarm/remote indication cable and a pressurizing pipe 2.5 m long.
Power supply and alarms Pressurizing pipe Fixing bracket + screw fastenings
Compressor Rack Power supply boards
Drying tablet
Compressor in ETSI rack Overall view of the compressor Air outlet for 7 mm dia pipe
Yellow/green
5 core cable, L = 2.5 m for remote indications
Blue
White
3way HE15 connector
3way power supply connector
yellow/green/ ground
Compressor wiring
J01 J02 Top view of compressor
Figure 30 Installing the compressor Note : The compressor can supply compressed air to two feeders via a T adapter supplied as standard. The compressor s 48 V power supply cable is connected: either to connector P102 (see Figure 31) of the fan power supply board, or to one of the power supply boards located in the bottom part of the rack.
Power supply: $ 48 V (20 V to 60 V) 11 W maximum. The remote indication cable (5 core) is connected to the Sub-D/WAGO adapter board (see Appendix 8.4.2). Connector strip wiring:
Remote indications Power supply
Pins J011 = + V, J012 = V J021 Pressure alarm, normally closed J022 Pressure alarm, normally open J023 Operating time alarm, normally closed J024 Common J025 Operating time alarm, normally open Wire Brown Yellow Blue Black White
Relay contact characteristic

I max. : 1 A V max. : 48 V
56/270
September 2000
Fan power supply board
Position of connector P102, protected 48 V output WAGO GAA862 adapter
Fans Compressor
Power supply boards
Figure 31 Compressor wiring Typical compressor remote indication wiring: the normally open pressure alarm is connected to remote indication loop 2 on the GSU board, the normally open operating time alarm is connected to remote indication loop 3 on the GSU board.
The table below gives a list of the links required (see Appendix A.8.4.1) : LOOP Pressure alarm TS n_ 2 Operating time alarm, TS n_ 3 Compressor connector strip Pin 2 Pin 4 Pin 5 Pin 4 WAGO TB101 connector linked to GSU board (Appendix 8.4.2) Pin 13 Pin 15 Pin 16 Pin 18
3.6 Power supply wiring

The connection kit: 48 V (3x1.5 mm2 ; ref. : 3CC08812AAAA), or 24 V (3x2.5 mm2 ; ref. : 3CC08813AAAA),
is used to set up the power connection between the radio equipment and the distribution panel supplied by the operator.
September 2000
57/270
In a main or extension rack, in which each radio channel power supply is connected to its own power supply filter, a maximum of three filters will be mounted on the rack. In a relay (repeater) station rack with space diversity, since the power supply for the three diversity receivers, which may be protected, of each of the two diversity subracks has its own power supply filter, a maximum of four filters will be mounted on the rack.
Ground terminal with two crimp terminals Power supply connection (one cable for each channel or for each diversity power supply)
Figure 32 Power supply and ground terminal connection on the ETSI rack
Back of rack
Terminal station 3 Tx/Rx subrack
Back of rack
1st diversity subrack 2nd diversity subrack Relay station or diversity rack
Figure 33 Positioning of power supply filters inside the racks
58/270
September 2000
The top part of each rack has four positions for Schaffner type power supply filters. The connection to the power source is via a power supply cable with a minimum cross sectional area of 3x1.5 mm2 at 48 V and 3x2.5 mm2 at 24 V (floating power supply operating between 20 V and 60 V), linked to the filter in accordance with the polarity etched on the cover. Each conductor is terminated with an insulated Faston terminal. The green/yellow wire will be connected to the ground terminal.
3.6.1 Control panel and power distribution unit

These are available as options to facilitate rack power supply wiring.
3U 19 power panel (ref : 77096294). This provides six protected outputs (6A fuses) to facilitate rack power supply wiring and for remote connection to the operator s power incomer.
Wallmounted power distribution unit (ref : 77096248)
This provides six protected outputs (6A fuses) providing remote connection to the operator s power incomer.
For these two products, the fuses used (and replacement fuses) are domestic type cartridges, 8.5x31.5 mm, 6A 400V gG. To connect the operator s incomer to these distribution units, the recommended cable is: for 48 V supply (4 mm2) : 3CC08815AAAA, for 24/48 V supply (10 mm2) : 3CC08816AAAA.
3.6.2 ETSI rack grounding

The framework of the ETSI rack is grounded via a green/yellow insulated cable with a minimum cross sectional area of 1x16 mm2 (reference: 3CC08166AAAA). The ground terminal, comprising a threaded rod and two nuts, is located on the roof of the rack (see Figure 32 page 58). A ring terminal (reference: Yav 16M6 Burndy), supplied with the equipment, must be crimped onto the green/yellow insulated cable, and is for connection to the threaded rod. When several racks are installed in the station, bridging is required. The terminals for this bridging are supplied screwed to the equipments ground terminal (see Figure 32).
September 2000
59/270
3.7 ETSI rack backplanes

3.7.1 3 Tx/Rx backplane in main and extension racks

The physical representation of this backplane is given in Figure 34 below. Apart from the power supplies in a backplane at the bottom of the rack and the 16 TS/TC extension (optional), the modules plug into the connectors on the mother board of a 3 Tx/Rx backplane located in the main rack and in the extension rack if included. The equipment connectors are also located on this mother board (Figure 35), which has two areas: board insertion area, supporting the connectors for the various boards,
Fan power supply board fuses
Fans
Position for fan power supply board
Positions for transmitters/receivers
Positions for ESC 2_3, MSU and LSU boards
Mother board
Positions for ESC 4_5, TIU and GSU boards Connection area
Figure 34 3 Tx/Rx backplane assembly
60/270
September 2000
Auxiliary 2 Mbit/s port
AGC voltage port
Position for transmitters and receivers
Positions for service channels 2 and 3 multiplexers
ESC 1 to 5 connection area Connector for SKU key Position for service channels 4 and 5 TIU Supervision Tributary connection area
ESC45 ( ) J131/J130/J129 J134/J133/J132 TIU-1 (TIU-3) J137/J136/J135 TIU-2 (TIU-4) J149 IAU-2 (IAU-4) J140/J139/J138 TIU-X (TIU-5) GSU ( ) J126/J125
SKU Channel2-4 ESC1-EXT
J160 MSU-1 (MSU-3) J118/J117/J116
J154 J165
J147 IAU-1 (IAU-3)

Channel1-3
ESC23 ( ) J115/J114/J113
TX-1 (TX3) J102/J101/J201 RX-1 (RX3) J104/J103/J202 J106/J105/J203
J166
2M-AUX
J161 J155
IAU-AUX J148 IAU-1 (IAU-3)
J167
J162
backup MSU -1 (backup MSU -3) J218/J217/J216 MSU-2 (MSU-4) J121/J120/J119 backupMSU -2 (backup MSU -4) J221/J220/J219 MSU-X (MSU-5) J124/J123/J122
Front Panel
ESC1-NMS2 ESC2 ESC3 ESC4 ESC5
ESC1-NMS1 ESC2 ESC3 ESC4 ESC5
J168 J170 J150 IAU-2 (IAU-4) J151 IAU-X (IAU-5) J144 J145 J146 J159 J211 J213
BUS IN ChannelX-5
J163
TX-2 (TX4) P202 RX-2 (RX4) J108/J107/J204 TX-X (TX5)
J169
J164
ESC4-5
References between brackets correspond to the boards in the 3 Tx/Rx backplane of the extension rack in an N+1 configuration (N q 3). ( ) : Board not installed in the extension rack
Figure 35 3 Tx/Rx backplane mother board (main rack and extension rack)
September 2000
J208 J225
PSU1-3 PSU2-4 PSUX-5
J171
J156
J157 J152 IAU-X (IAU-5)
TS/TC
J210
J158
backupMSU -X (backup MSU -5) J224/J223/J222 LSU ( ) J128/J127/J207
J110/J109/J205 RX-X (RX5) J112/J111/J206
J209
Loop Power
J172 J212
Bus (Out) HDLC In CAN Out
Repeater 2+1Rack Maintenance ESC2-3 Diversity 5+1Rack AGC V
TS/TC Optional board
J173
Inputs for voltages from the three rack bottom power supplies
Interequipment connections Connection area Interrack connections
61/270
the connection area, located in the bottom part and partially in the right middle part, which includes the user access connectors, interbackplane connectors and connectors for interrack links.
3.7.1.1 Accessing the 3 Tx/Rx backplane in main and extension ETSI racks Figure 35 shows the connection area located in the bottom part of the 3 Tx/Rx backplane used in these two racks. See section 3.7.1.3, below, for details of the configuration components of the 3 Tx/Rx backplane mother board. 3.7.1.2 Functions of the connectors on the 3 Tx/Rx backplane of main and extension ETSI racks The table below lists the various connectors in the connection area, with their functions. Figures between brackets represent the numbers of the extension racks radio channels. See section
Connector J144 J145 J146 J147 *
Item PSU 1-3 PSU 2-4 PSU X5 CHANNEL 1-3
Function Channel 1 (3) power supply by PSU 1 (3) in the rack Channel 2 (4) power supply by PSU 2 (4) in the rack Channel X (5) power supply by PSU X (5) in the rack 34 Mbit/s or 4x8 Mbit/s or 2 Mbit/s ports 1 to 8 of channel 1 (or 3) 2 Mbit/s tributary ports 9 to 16 of channel 1 (or 3)
J148 * J149 * CHANNEL 2-4 J150 * J151 * CHANNEL X-5 J152 * J154 * J160 * J155 * J156 J157 ESC1 - NMS1 ESC1 - NMS2 2M AUX ESC 2-3 REPEATER
34 Mbit/s or 4x8 Mbit/s or 2 Mbit/s tributary ports 1 to 8 of channel 2 (or 4) 2 Mbit/s tributary ports 9 to 16 of channel 2 (or 4) 34 Mbit/s or 4x8 Mbit/s or 2 Mbit/s tributary ports 1 to 8 of channel X (or 5) 2 Mbit/s tributary ports 9 to 16 of channel X (or 5) ESC N_ 1 interface, direction 1 (network management) ESC N_ 1 interface, direction 2 (network management)
3.9 & A.8.2
A.8.3.1
2 Mbit/s auxiliary bit stream port (available according to bit rate) A.8.2.5 Digital link for ESC 2 and 3 between the two main racks of a repeater. Linked to the corresponding connector in the other directions main rack 3.13.2. 2 3.13.1 Interface with the space diversity backplane (option): S linked to J127 of the diversity backplane if handling direction 1 (In a repeater, linked to the corresponding connector of the other directions main rack to transmit aggregatesE-W) S linked to J128 of the diversity backplane if handling direction 2 (WE)
J158
DIVERSITY
J159 J161 * J166 *
FRONT PANEL ESC 2
Link with the control panel at the top of the main rack ESC 2 interface, direction 1 ESC 2 interface, direction 2 A.8.3.2
62/270
September 2000
Connector
Item
Function ESC 3 interface, direction 1
See section
J162 * J167 * J163 * J168 * J164 * J169 * J165 * J170 * ESC 5 ESC1-EXT ESC 4 ESC 3
ESC 3 interface, direction 2 ESC 4 interface, direction 1 ESC 4 interface, direction 2 ESC 5 interface, direction 1 ESC 5 interface, direction 2 Reserved for Alcatel future extension A.8.5 A.8.3.3 A.8.3.3
MAINTENANCE Maintenance interface (reserved for factory tests) and received AGC V field information on receivers 1 and X (or 3 and 5) (0 to 4 VDC) ESC 4-5 Digital link for ESC 4 and 5 between the two main racks of a repeater. Linked to the corresponding connector of the other directions main rack Fan alarm input (cable from the fan power supply board, located at the top of the backplane) Interface for the 16 TS/TC module supplied as an option Basic TS/TC (GSU) Input on the extension 3 Tx/Rx backplane for the HDLC and CAN channels from J212 of the main 3 Tx/Rx backplane, linking the GSU board to the various boards of the extension backplane and the LSU board to the various MSU boards of the extension backplane. Interface for the HDLC and CAN channels linking the GSU board to the various boards in the extension backplanes and/or diversity backplanes, and linking the LSU board to the other MSU boards in the extension and/or diversity backplanes. Reserved for Alcatel use Connector for the software key unit (SKU) for the configuration and enabling the equipment to operate (must be fitted) Control and power supply port for the bi-stable RF relay for switching over the transmitter in 1+1 Hot StandBy configurations
J171
J208 J209 J210 *
VENT 16 TS/TC
(OPTIONAL BOARD)
A.8.4.3 A.8.4.1
TS/TC (GSU)
J211
BUS (IN)
J212
BUS (OUT)
HDLC
J213 J225
LOOP POWER SKU
3.1.4.2 and 6.23
P102
HSB
* User ports, pinout explained in section A.8.2 in Appendix 8. The mother board of 3 Tx/Rx backplane also has DIP switch modules that must be set in accordance with the configuration, as explained below in section 3.7.1.3.
September 2000
63/270
3.7.1.3 Setting up the 3 Tx/Rx backplane mother board (main/extension rack) DIP SWITCH SETTINGS ON THE MOTHER BOARD The table below gives the configuration of the DIP switches on the backplane mother board according to the presence or absence of the service channel board in positions ESC23 and ESC45 (Figure 36). SETTING SWITCH FUNCTION
S101 S102, S103 S104, S105 S106, S107, S108, S109 S110, S111, S112, S113 S114, S115
Reserved for Alcatel use Cable on connector J212 of HDLC OUT bus CAN bus impedance matching on the first and last 3 Tx/Rx backplanes in the presence of the LSU board ESC 2_3 board in the ESC23 position ESC 2_3 board or ESC 4_5 in the ESC45 position GSU board in its position in the 3 Tx/Rx backplane, at J125/J126
Prohibited Present LSU absent or intermediate backplane Present Present Present Main rack
Allowed Absent LSU present
Absent Absent Absent Extension rack
Note : If S101 is not set to the right position, the CT cannot monitor the boards connected to the 3 Tx/Rx backplane. POSITIONS OF SWAPS ON THE MOTHER BOARD The table below gives the configuration of the soldered links (swaps) on the backplane mother board: Connection area SWAP POSITION FUNCTION Main backplane (Tx/Rx 1, 2 and X) SW101, SW104 Extension backplane (Tx/Rx 3, 4 and 5) Main backplane (Tx/Rx 1, 2 and X) SW102, SW103 Extension backplane (Tx/RX 3, 4 and 5) Main backplane (Tx/Rx 1, 2 and X) SW113, SW114 Extension backplane (Tx/Rx 3, 4 and 5) Transmitter and receiver connector area (swaps on the back of the mother board) SWAP SW105 to SW110 POSITION FUNCTION Prewired in the factory. Must not be modified.
64/270
September 2000
ESC 2_3, MSU and backup MSU board connector area SWAP
POSITION
FUNCTION Main backplane (Tx/Rx 1, 2 and X)
SW111, SW112 Extension backplane (Tx/Rx 3, 4 and 5) SW115 to SW120 Prewired in the factory. Must not be modified.
September 2000
65/270
TX-1/3
RX-1/3
S101 S114/S115 S102 to S105 SW101 to SW104
Figure 36 Locations of configuration elements on the 3 Tx/Rx backplane mother board (main and extension racks)
MSU X/5
MSU 1/3
RX-2/4
MSU X/5
MSU 2/4
LSU
sec.
sec.
September 2000
sec. TIU 2/4 TIU X/5 GSU SW115 to SW120 J159 Link to the control panel
MSU 2/4
MSU 1/3
ESC23
TIU 1/3
ESC45
66/270
S106 to S109 S110 to S113 P102 Link to HSB switch J208 Fan alarms TX-2/4 TX-X/5 RX-X/ 5 SW111/SW112
SW113/SW114
3.7.2 Backplanes in a space diversity ETSI rack

Area for installing receivers
Connection area
Power supply distribution terminal block
Position for power supply units
Figure 37 Diversity backplane assembly
September 2000
67/270
one for channels 3, 4 and 5, direction 1 (W-E) and direction 2 (E-W), or 2x3 receivers.
RX DIV-X-EW (5-EW) RX DIV-2-EW (4-EW) RX DIV-1-WE (3-WE) RX DIV-2-WE (4-WE) RX DIV-X-WE (5-WE) RX DIV-1-EW (3-EW)
Area for installing receivers
Backup PSU-1-2-X-EW. (bkp3-4-5-EW)
Backup PSU-1-2-X-WE (bkp3-4-5-WE)
PSU-1-2-X-EW (3-4-5-EW)
PSU-1-2-X-WE (3-4-5-WE)
DIVERSITY DIR 2 DIR 1 J125/J126
J121/J122
Area for installing power supplies
J123/J124
J119/J120
J127
J128
AGC V
BUS DIR 1 OUT
BUS DIR 2 OUT
BUS DIR 1 IN
BUS DIR 2 IN
J130
J131
J132
Connection area
References between brackets represent the boards connected to the diversity backplane concerning channels 3 to 5: EW : EastWest direction WE : WestEast direction
Figure 38 Diversity backplane mother board
The diversity backplane is fitted with a mother board for installing a maximum of six receivers and four power supply unit boards. It is linked: to the second, identical, backplane, installed in the same rack, for 3+1 to 5+1 configurations, to the 3 Tx/Rx backplanes of a main rack (terminal station) or two main racks (relay station),
68/270
September 2000
J133
J129
Figure 37 shows the mechanical structure of the backplane used in the diversity rack. This rack can accommodate two diversity backplanes: one for channels 1, 2 and X, direction 1 (W-E) and direction 2 (E-W), or 2x3 receivers,
J101/J102/J103
J104/J105/J106
J107/J108/J109
J113/J114/J115
J116/J117/J118
J110/J111/J112
to the 3 Tx/Rx backplane(s) of an extension rack (terminal station) or of two extension racks (relay station).
In addition, the backplane protects the voltages from the normal and standby power supplies (if there is a backup), for the three receivers in each direction. 3.7.2.1 Access to the backplanes of the space diversity ETSI rack Figure 38 shows the various parts of the backplane mother board used in the diversity rack. All the connectors in the connection area, located in the bottom right part, are for setting up links between backplanes and between racks. See section 3.7.2.3 for information on the configuration elements on the diversity backplane mother board. 3.7.2.2 Functions of connectors on the space diversity ETSI rack backplanes The table below lists the various connectors in the connection area, and gives their functions. Figures between brackets represent the numbers of the second diversity backplanes radio channel. Connector J127 J128 J129 * Item DIVERSITY DIR 1 DIVERSITY DIR 2 AGC V Function Interface with connector J158 on the 3 Tx/Rx backplane of the main or extension rack, direction 1 Interface with connector J158 of the 3 Tx/Rx backplane in the main or extension rack, direction 2 Received field information concerning diversity receiver 1 (3), directions 1 and 2 Input for HDLC and CAN channels from port J212 of the 3 Tx/Rx backplane in the main or extension rack, linking the GSU board to the various boards in the equipment and the LSU board to the other MSU boards for direction 1 Output for the HDLC and CAN channel to input J130 of the second diversity backplane, channels 3, 4 and 5 for direction 1 Input for the HDLC and CAN channels from port J212 of the 3 Tx/Rx backplane in the main or extension rack, linking the GSU board to the various boards of the equipment and the LSU board to the other MSU boards for direction 2 A.9 See section
J130 BUS DIR1 J131
J132 BUS DIR2 J133
Output for the HDLC and CAN channels to input J132 of the second diversity backplane for channels 3, 4 and 5 for direction 2 * user port, pin out details are given in Appendix 9. DIP switch modules in the connection area are used to set up this backplane according to its position in the rack and the path of the CAN and HDLC channels, and presence of the LSU board, as explained in section 3.7.2.3). 3.7.2.3 Configuring the diversity backplane mother board DIP SWITCH SETTINGS ON THE MOTHER BOARD The tables below give the settings of the DIP switches on the backplane mother board according to its use in the rack (Figure 39). SWITCH SETTING FUNCTION Diversity receiver backplane, channels 1, 2 and X S101, S102, S103 Diversity receiver backplane, channels 3, 4 and 5
September 2000
69/270
DIP switch modules S104, S105, S106, S107, S108 and S109 are used to enable and disable load resistors R106, R107, R108, R110, R111 and R112 on the CAN and HDLC buses, according to the position of the diversity backplane concerned in the equipment subsystem.
RX 1/3 Direction 1
RX 2/4 Direction 1
RX X/5 Direction 1
RX 1/3 Direction 2
RX 2/4 Direction 2
RX X/5 Direction 2
DIVERSITY DIR 1 DIR 2 S101
PSU N Direction 1
Standby PSU Direction 1
PSU N Direction 2
Standby PSU Direction 2
AGC V
S102
S103
Connection areas
BUS DIR 1 OUT BUS DIR 2 OUT R111 R112 S108 S109 HDLC BUS DIR 1 IN BUS DIR 2 IN R108 R110 S107 CAN
R106
R107
S104 CAN
S104 S106 HDLC
Direction 1
Direction 2
Figure 39 Locations of configuration elements on the diversity backplane mother board The HDLC bus links the GSU management board to the various boards of all the backplanes, while the CAN bus links the logic switching unit (LSU) to the different MSU boards of the 3 Tx/Rx backplanes.
70/270
September 2000
SETTING
SWITCH
FUNCTION
S104, S105, S106
Bus impedance matching resistors of direction 1 diversity backplanes enabled/disabled (On/Off) Bus impedance matching resistors of direction 2 diversity backplanes enabled/disabled (On/Off)
On : last backplane On : last backplane
Off : intermediate backplane Off : intermediate backplane
S107, S108, S109
3.8 Links between backplanes and racks of the same network element
3.8.1 HDLC and CAN channel links between backplanes and racks
3.8.1.1 HDLC channel This channel links the GSU management board to the various equipment boards. The clock and data transmitted are loaded via a resistor connected to the plus in the backplane of the subsystem furthest from the GSU (Fig. 40). 3.8.1.2 CAN channel This channel links the logic switching unit (LSU) to the various MSU boards of the equipment. The data transmitted is loaded via a resistor connected to the plus in the backplane of the subsystem furthest from the LSU. GSU
Note: J211 is not used in the main rack J211 OUT CAN LSU HDLC GSU J212 J212 J130 Dir1 or J132 Dir2 IN OUT J131 Dir1 or J133 Dir2 J211 OUT IN IN IN OUT
J130 Dir1 or J132 Dir2
J131 Dir1 or J133 Dir2
Diversity backplane Channels 1, 2 and X
Diversity backplane Channels 3, 4 and 5
Main rack Channels 1, 2 and X
Extension rack Channels 3, 4 and 5
Figure 40 HDLC and CAN bus links between racks and between subracks for one direction
3.8.2 Links between main and extension racks and diversity subracks
3.8.2.1 Channel 3 to 5 management bus link between the extension rack and the main rack A cable links the 2+1 Rack connector J172 of the 3 Tx/Rx backplane in the extension rack to the 5+1 Rack connector J173 of the 3 Tx/Rx backplane in the main rack. This cable carries channels which include the order wires needed for switching control by the n+1 logic switching unit (LSU) board involved with channels 3 to 5 and the data on the dialogue bus with the MSU boards of channels 3 to 5. 3.8.2.2 Aggregate links between main or extension rack and the diversity backplane A cable links the Diversity connector J158 of the 3 Tx/Rx backplane in the main or extension rack to the Diversity Dir 1 connector J127 or Diversity Dir 2 connector J128 of the diversity backplane for channels 1,
September 2000
71/270
2 and X or 3, 4 and 5, depending on the appropriate direction (East or West). This cable returns the aggregates of diversity channels 1, 2 and X or 3, 4 and 5 to the corresponding MSU boards (Figure 41).
J127 Dir1 or J128 Dir2 DIVERSITY DIVERSITY
Diversity backplane channels 1, 2 and X
J158 J172 2+1 DIVERSITY Rack
J173 5+1 Rack
J158
J172 2+1 Rack
J173 5+1 Rack J127 Dir1 or J128 Dir2 DIVERSITY
Main rack Channels 1, 2 and X
Extension rack Channels 3, 4 and 5
Diversity backplane channels 3, 4 and 5
Figure 41 Aggregate links between main and extension racks and diversity backplanes
3.8.3 Cable assemblies used for links between backplanes and racks
The cables and ribbon cables in the table below are supplied according to the equipment configuration. REFERENCE CHARACTERISTICS Ribbon cable terminated with two 25way SubD connectors Ribbon cable terminated with two 50way miniD connectors Ribbon cable terminated with two 37way SubD connectors Ribbon cable terminated with two 37way SubD connectors LINK From J5 of each power supply in the rack bottom backplane to J144 PSU1-3, J145 PSU2-4 or J146 PSUX-5 on the 3 Tx/Rx backplane
3CC06684AAAA
3CC06685AAAA
From J159 Font Panel of the main 3 Tx/Rx backplane to J101 on the main rack top control panel board
3CC06686AAAA
From J211 Bus IN of the 3 Tx/Rx backplane to J130 Dir 1 or J132 Dir 2 of the diversity backplane
3CC06686AAAA
From J212 Bus OUT of the main 3 Tx/Rx backplane to J211 Bus IN of the extension 3 Tx/Rx backplane
3CC06688AAAA
Cable terminated with From J158 Diversity on the 3 Tx/Rx backplane to J127 two 50way miniD Diversity Dir 1 or J128 Diversity Dir 2 of the diversity connectors backplane Cable terminated with From J156 ESC2-3 or J171 ESC4-5 of the 3 Tx/Rx two 50way miniD backplane in a main rack to the corresponding connector of connectors the 3 Tx/Rx backplane in another main rack of a dual terminal
3CC06688AAAA
72/270
September 2000
3.9 Tributary wiring

3.9.1 Wiring 2 Mbit/s tributaries

3.9.1.1 Connections The user ports are implemented on the following 37way connectors (see Figure 35 and the table in section 3.7.1.1) : J147 and J148 for channel 1 or channel 3, J149 and J150 for channel 2 or channel 4, J151 and J152 for channel X or channel 5, J155 for the 2 Mbit/s auxiliary bit stream (if it exists, that is, with the 16x2, 4x8 and 34 Mbit/s rates).
For the 2 Mbit/s tributary ports, the user must choose between the balanced 120 impedance and the unbalanced 75 impedance, according to the configuration of the equipment to be connected (use of distributors equipped with terminal blocks for balanced 120 impedance or distributors equipped with BNC or 1.6/5.6 coaxial sockets). It is good practice not to wire directly to the connectors (very difficult on site), but to use octopus adapters connected to the distributors provided which also provide for nondisconnecting extensions. If the option without distributor is chosen, wire the adapters supplied with the connector kit (ref : 3CC07899AAAA + 3CC7920AAAA) using the crimping tool, 77096484 (AMP) (see Appendix 8, connector wiring). 3.9.1.2 4x2 Mbit/s wiring with distributor The components and wiring used are as for the 8x2 Mbit/s configuration. 3.9.1.3 8x2 Mbit/s wiring with distributor Marketing identifier of distributor assembly OUTPUT TYPES
37way connector 2 m 3CC07885ABAA 37way connector 2 m 3CC08061ABAA 3CC07759ABAA
CABLE
DISTRIBUTOR
9400XXI408
75 1.6/5.6
1U
3CC08061AAAA
9400XXI408 2x9400XXI405
75 BNC
1U
September 2000
73/270
3 U EMC
120
2m 3CC07658AAAA 3CC07810AAAA
9400XXI408
1 U non EMC
120
2m 3CC07658AAAA 3CC08062AAAA
3.9.1.4 16x2 Mbit/s wiring with distributor Marketing identifier of distributor assembly OUTPUT TYPES
37way connector 2 m 2 x 3CC07885ABAA 37way connector 2 m 3CC08061ABAA 2 x 3CC07759ABAA 3CC08061AAAA
CABLE
DISTRIBUTOR
9400XXI416
75 1.6/5.6
1U
9400XXI416 4x9400XXI405
75 BNC
1U
74/270
September 2000
Marketing identifier of distributor assembly
OUTPUT TYPES
CABLE
DISTRIBUTOR
Marketing identifier of distributor assembly
OUTPUT TYPES
CABLE
DISTRIBUTOR
3 U EMC
120
2 m 2 x 3CC07658AAAA 3CC07810AAAA
9400XXI416
1 U non EMC
120
2 m 2 x 3CC07658AAAA
3CC08062AAA A
3.9.1.5 Arrangement of tributaries on the distributors LAYOUT OF 120 TERMINAL BLOCKS The ends of the 120 cables described above have two terminal blocks which clip onto the distributor as shown below.
Direction 1 1 2 3 4 Auxiliary 2 mbit/s 5 6 7 8 Tx Rx Tx Rx 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Tributaries 1 to 8 Tributaries 9 to 16 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Direction 2 1 2 3 Auxiliary 2 Mbit/s 4 5 6 7 8 Tx Rx Tx Rx
Figure 42 Arrangement of the 120 terminal blocks on the distributor (case of a repeater)
September 2000
75/270
ARRANGEMENT OF THE 75 BNC OR 1.6/5.6 SOCKETS

The 75 cables described above are terminated by BNC or 1.6/5.6 sockets, arranged on the distributor as shown below.
Figure 43 Arrangement of the tributaries on the 75 BNC or 1.6/5.6 distributors 3.9.1.6 Distributor wall mounting
WALL MOUNTING
(3CC07957AAAA)
19 MOUNTING
COVER
3U 120 VERSION
3U 1.6/5.6 or BNC VERSION
Figure 44 Examples of 2 Mbit/s distributors with support and cover
3.9.2 8 Mbit/s tributaries

3.9.2.1 Connections The wiring of the unbalanced 75 ports for the 2 Mbit/s tributaries can be used. The 8 Mbit/s signals of the various RF channels can be accessed on connectors J147, J149 and J151 on the 3 Tx/Rx backplanes of the main and extension racks, and occupy the positions of tributaries 1 to 4 (see table in section 3.7.1.1 and Appendix A8). In the (3x8) + (4x2) Mbit/s configuration, the 8 Mbit/s tributaries of the various RF channels occupy positions 1 to 3 of connectors J147, J149 and J151 on the 3 Tx/Rx backplanes of the main and extension racks and the 2 Mbit/s tributaries occupy positions 9 to 12 of connectors J148, J150 and J152 on the 3 Tx/RX backplanes of the main and extension racks (see table in section 3.7.1.1 and Appendix A8). 3.9.2.2 2 or 8 Mbit/s 75 ohm, 4 port adapter boards In addition, for the wiring of each tributary in 75 4x2 Mbit/s and 4x8 Mbit/s configurations, it is possible to use one of the two adapters boards (1.6/5.6 or BNC) inserted into the connector identified in the table in section
76/270
September 2000
3.7.1.1 (see Figure 35) according to the number of the RF channel and the racks 3 Tx/Rx backplane (main or extension).
Tx1
Rx1
Tx2
Rx2
- four BNC port adapter board: 3CC07080AAAA - four 1.6/5.6 port adapter board: 3CC07083AAAA
Tx3 Rx3
Tx4
Rx4
3.9.3 34 Mbit/s tributary

The port is implemented using an adapter board installed on connector J147 : either board 3CC07176AAAA with two 75 BNC coaxial sockets, or board 3CC07177AAAA fitted with two 75 1.6/5.6 coaxial sockets. The interconnection with the distributor or the multiplexes obtained by two 75 coaxial cables (one transmit, one receive), of type L910-39 (or equivalent), terminated at the 9400 LX end with a BNC plug or 1.6/5.6 plug (see Appendix 12).
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
34 Mbit/s interface board
Auxiliary 2 Mbit/s interface board
3.9.4 Auxiliary 2 Mbit/s signal

The 2 Mbit/s auxiliary bitstream is available with the following board versions: 16x2 Mbit/s, 4x8 Mbit/s and 34 Mbit/s. Wiring of the 2 Mbit/s auxiliary bit stream is implemented: either via an adapter board (see figure above) installed on connector J155 :
S S
the 1.6/5.6 - 75 board, reference: 3CC07423AAAA, or the BNC - 75 board, reference: 3CC07422AAAA ; 120 auxiliary 2 Mbit/s cable, reference: 3CC07881AAAA, or 75 BNC auxiliary 2 Mbit/s cable, reference: 3CC07898AAAA, or
or directly with the auxiliary 2 Mbit/s cable, one end of which is connected to J155 :
S S
September 2000
77/270
75 1.6/5.6 auxiliary 2 Mbit/s cable, reference: 3CC07897AAAA.

For customized wiring see Appendix 8.
3.10 ESC wiring

NUMBER AND TYPES OF ENGINEERING SERVICE CHANNELS The maximum number of 64 kbit/s ESCs is 5 (three only for the 2x2 Mbit/s rate). ESC 1 is used for network management. ESC 2 is a telephone channel. ESCs 3, 4 and 5 are codirectional service channels (data, clocks and byte synchronization; their function depends on the ESC board (or boards) and the daughter boards chosen.
The first engineering service channel board, ESC 2_3 supports a daughter board which determines the type for ESC 3. The second engineering service channel board (optional) is: either an ESC 2_3 which provides for a second telephone channel with selective calling on ESC 4, or an ESC 4_5 which supports two daughter boards determining the types for ESC 4 and ESC 5. VDS1 NMS1 - J154 NMS2 - J160 ESC2 J161 J166 ESC3 J162 J167 ESC4 J163 J168 ESC5 J164 J169
CONNECTOR Direction 1 Direction 2 NOTE
For the wiring of the ESC connectors, see Appendix A 8. ESC 2 to ESC 5 are bidirectional, so each channel is linked to two connectors, located one above the other and each assigned to a direction. The top connector is assigned to direction 1 and the bottom connector to direction 2. The result is that (Figure 45) : in the remote station in direction 1, the service channel is on the bottom connector (since it originates from direction 2), in the remote station in direction 2, the service channel is on the top connector (since it originates from direction 1).
Direction 1 Direction 2 Direction 1 Direction 2
Figure 45 ESC transmission in a link
3.11 Wiring of alarms and remote controls (TS/TC)

In standard mode, the TS/TC interface on the 25way TS/TC connector (GSU), supports: supply of three signals (outputs) to the equipment (0.5 A/100 V dry loops), supply (output) of one remote control (0.5 A/100 V dry loop). supply (inputs) of seven housekeeping alarms (alarms 2 to 8, alarm 1 is reserved for fans). These seven alarms are implemented by normally open loops (if the input configuration of the housekeeping alarm loops is to be modified, refer to section A.8.4.1 in Appendix 8, and section 6.18.3 Hardware configuration of the general supervisory unit GSU board).
78/270
September 2000
3.11.1 Sub-D/WAGO adapter board

An adapter board (3CC07444AAAA) can be used by the operator to connect the alarm and remote indication loops as required. It is installed on the TS/TC 25way connector J210 (GSU) and supports two WAGO connecting strips. The wiring of terminal blocks TB101 and TB102 is given in the Appendix, section A 8.4.2
3.11.2 16 TS/TC option board

The optional 16 TS/TC board (ref : 3CC05705AAxx) is installed on the optional TS/TC boards connector J209 in the connection area; it supplements terminal blocks TB101, TB102 and TB 103 with: 16 signal outputs to the equipment (dry loops: 0.5 A/100 V), four remote control loops (dry loops 0.5 A/100 V), twelve housekeeping remote indication inputs (by open loop, or loop closed to earth for an alarm).
The wiring of terminal blocks TB101, TB102 and TB103 is given in the Appendix, section A 8.4.3 .
3.12 Telephone handset

The telephone handset is shown below: for selective calling, it uses DTMF dialling (voice frequencies). It connects to the RJ11 connector on the control panel identified by a telephone handset symbol. Connect the handset to the cabinet. Important: for it to operate, you must set the switch on the handset to FV (tone dialling). Set the changeover switch to FV On/Off button for starting a call Fixing support Doublesided adhesive
RJ 11 connector
Handset support
A bracket mounting, with double sided adhesive tape so that it can be affixed to a flat surface, is used to hang the telephone handset on a vertical wall, such as one of the outer side panels of the ETSI rack. This is a standard multifunction handset which can be used for: voice calls, a loudspeaker being incorporated to the equipment, general calls, by dialling 00. The ESC then behaves like an omnibus channel, selective calls, by dialling the three digits of the number of the station required. You can also, during the conversation, dial the number of another station to set up a conference with three or up to N stations. Confidentiality is assured: anyone who picks up the handset on a station that has not been called, will hear busy tone (the line busy condition is indicated by a green LED on the control panel of the equipment).
September 2000
79/270
3.13 Wiring between terminals of the same station

This wiring provides continuity for the tributaries and for the service channels between the various terminals of the same station.
3.13.1 Tributary and the auxiliary 2 Mbit/s channel wiring

SINGLE OR MULTIPLE TERMINAL Interconnect the wiring of the various tributaries using N x 2/8 Mbit/s distributors or 34 Mbit/s connectors and, if appropriate, the auxiliary 2 Mbit/s channel of each terminal, according to the wiring diagram provided by the network administrator. REPEATER Without tributary or auxiliary 2 Mbit/s bit stream drop and insert facility, for each transmission channel:
link connector J157 (REPEATER) of one of the directions to connector J157 of the other direction via a 2 m cable, ref. : 3CC06688AAxx.
With tributary or auxiliary 2 Mbit/s bit stream drop and insert facility, for each transmission channel:
S S
as previously, link J157 (REPEATER) of one direction to J157 of the other direction using a 2 m cable, ref. : 3CC06688AAxx, on J147/J149/J151 (tributaries 1 to 8) and J148/J150/J152 (tributaries 9 to 16) of each channel and each main and extension system (if any), add and drop the tributaries specified for each direction, on J155 (2 M-Aux) of each main and extension system, add and drop the 2 Mbit/s auxiliary bit stream for each direction; for wiring details, see section 3.9.4.
Remember to use the software to declare the tributary and auxiliary 2 Mbit/s channels dropped/inserted.
3.13.2 ESC wiring

3.13.2.1 ESC1 (supervision channel) STATION WITH TWO TERMINALS, TWO DIRECTIONS Link the NMS1 connector (J154) of the first terminal to the NMS1 connector of the second terminal using a 2 m cable, ref. : 3CC07711AAxx, or 8 m cable, ref. : 3CC07711ABxx. STATION WITH THREE TERMINALS, THREE DIRECTIONS
NMS1 3CC07711AAxx
NMS2
NMS1
NMS2
3CC07711AAxx
NMS1
NMS2
Link the NMS1 connector (J154) of the first terminal to the NMS1 connector of the second terminal using a 2 m cable, ref. : 3CC07711AAxx, or an 8 m cable, ref. : 3CC07711ABxx Link the NMS2 connector (J160) of the first terminal to the NMS1 connector (J154) of the third terminal using a 2m cable, ref. : 3CC07711AAxx, or an 8 m cable, ref. : 3CC07711ABxx.
80/270
September 2000
The supervision bus can extend the wiring to n items of equipment by linking the NMS2 connector (J160) of one to the NMS1 connector (J154) of the next, as many times as are needed, using a 2 m cable, ref. : 3CC07711AAxx, or an 8 m cable, ref. : 3CC07711ABxx.
3.13.2.2 ESCs 2, 3, 4 and 5 When the ESC 2 or 3, or ESC 4, 5 are not dropped or inserted, transfer can be set up between the terminals digitally: Interlink the ESC 2-3 or ESC 4-5 connectors (J156 or J171 respectively) of each terminal using a 2 m cable, ref. : 3CC06688AAxx, or an 8 m cable, ref. : 3CC06688ABxx. Inserting/dropping one of service channels 2 to 5 (when it exists) entails installing an ESC board in the terminal at the location provided. When the corresponding ESC boards are present, the ESC 2, 3, 4 or 5 may be dropped or inserted; in baseband (analogue) mode: link together the ESC 2, 3, 4 or 5 analogue ports of each terminal having ESC 2_3 or ESC 4_5 boards using a 2 m cable, ref: 3CC07711AAxx, or an 8 m cable, ref. 3CC07711ABxx. STATION WITH N REPEATERS You can then extend the transfer of the ESCs to N terminals of the same station by alternately inserting digital and analogue links as indicated in the example below.
ESC 2_3 T1 T2 ESC2 T3 ESC 2_3 T4 ESC2 T5 ESC 2_3 T6
ESC 23 boards are required in the terminals T1, T3 and T5.

STATION A TERMINAL A1 TERMINAL A2 ESC 2_3 board STATION B TERMINAL B1 ESC 2_3 board TERMINAL B2 STATION C TERMINAL B1 ESC 2_3 board
J141 J149 ESC 2 ESC 23
J149 ESC 23
ESC 2 ESC 23 J141 J142 J149 Analogue link cable 3CC07711AAxx
J149 ESC 23
J141 ESC 2
J149 ESC 23
Digital link cable 3CC06688AAxx
Digital link cable 3CC06688AAxx Analogue link cable 3CC07711AAxx
J141 ESC 2
J149 ESC 23
J141 J149 ESC 2 ESC 23
ESC 2_3 board TERMINAL B3
ESC 2_3 board TERMINAL B4
Figure 46 Typical wiring for an ESC2 telephone service channel
September 2000
81/270

September 2000
4 Configuration and operation software

Systems are commissioned, operated and maintained via a portable PC with the 9400 LX/UX application supervision software installed and running in Windows. The computer is connected directly to the control panel of the 19 cabinet (F interface connector marked in the figure below), by a 9-way/9-way cable (1AB 054120027) supplied with the set of software installation diskettes.
AL STP
NURG ATT
OPER
URG
BUSY TEST LED AL CUT
BUSY L 1 OFF H 2
9400LX
The basic 946 LUX11 or 946 LUX12 version of the software installed on the PC can be used, for the terminal to which it is connected and for the remote terminal (when the link is established), to: display and administer all alarms, states, remote controls, read and modify the configuration (bit rate, frequencies, etc), display transmission parameters (received power, bit error ratio, etc), monitor performance (G.821), download software.
The optional extended version supports four additional applications: Remote inventory, Event storage, Performance monitoring (G.784), Analogue measurements.
The applicability of the various versions of the software to the hardware is given by the table below: EQUIPMENT 9414 LX 9420 LX 9470 LX MODULATION 4QAM 16QAM 4QAM 4QAM 16QAM 946LUX10 X X 946LUX11 X X 946LUX12 X X X X X
X : Software/hardware compatible : Software/hardware incompatible The Software downloading application (Software downloading management/Software management menu, see section 4.6) can be used to ascertain the software version installed in the equipment (GSU board).
4.1 Installing the software

4.1.1 Warning note
You are assumed to be familiar with: use of the PC installed and its devices, how to operate the PC in MS-DOS and WINDOWS 95 *.
September 2000
83/270
The PC must have the following minimum specifications: S Pentium processor operating at 100 MHz or above,
S S S S S S S S
serial asynchronous communication port, 500 Mbytes hard disk, 3.5 high density floppy drive (1.44 Mbytes), SVGA graphic adapter, SVGA colour monitor, Microsoft compatible mouse, keyboard, Windows 95 installed on the hard disk.
Before installing the system, check the following points: if there is a virtual disk, uninstall it, delete the following Windows programs: manufacturer s overlay (Dashboard, Tabworks), programs in the startup group, disable the screen saver, make sure that no other software is running at the same time as NECTAS.
4.1.2 Installing the software from diskette

4.1.2.1 946LUX11 SOFTWARE NECTAS RTP 946LUX11 946LUX11 software extension Number of diskettes 3 1 2 2 Diskette labels WGA 736 BQA 751 BQA 758 WGA 740 Diskette reference DESCRIPTION
3CC08597AAAA System software, version 3.76 or later 3CC04457AAAA Radio transmission parameter measurement 3CC07386AAAA 9400 UX equipment software 3CC07386ABAA 946LUX11 extension applications (Diskettes supplied only if this option has been requested)
* MS-DOS, MICROSOFT and WINDOWS are registered trademarks of MICROSOFT Corporation
84/270
September 2000
16 Mbytes of RAM,
4.1.2.2 946LUX12 SOFTWARE NECTAS RTP 946LUX12 946LUX11 software extension Number of diskettes 3 1 2 2 Diskette labels WGA 736 BQA 751 WGA 737 WGA 741 Diskette reference DESCRIPTION
3CC08597AAAA System software, version 3.76 or later 3CC04457AAAA Radio transmission parameter measurement 3CC08734AAAA 9400 UX equipment software 3CC08734ABAA 946LUX12 extension applications (Diskettes supplied only if this option has been requested)
The system files are installed on the hard disk, in the basic C:\ALCATEL directory. Procedure: Insert the system diskette (WGA 736, diskette 1/3) in the drive. Click Start in the WINDOWS 95 taskbar and select Run.
Type a: in the Open text box then click Browse. The files on the diskette are then listed in a window. From these, select Install.exe or Setup.exe depending on software release. Click Open then OK. The following window appears:
Do not alter the path specified in this dialogue box
Click Next then follow the instructions displayed by the installation program.
September 2000
85/270
Do not check the Installation boxes in the Multiple performance monitoring and R_ECT mode fields.
Choose the same language for all the software installed to maintain consistency in the system software.
Proceed in the same way to install each of the application programs. These should be installed in the following order: NECTAS, RTP, 946 LUX11 or 946 LUX12 (diskette 2/2 of the 946 LUX11 or 946 LUX12 software is not used for a French-language installation), 946 LUX11 or 946 LUX12 extension (diskette 2/2 of the software is not used for a French-language installation), if this option has been ordered.
When you have finished installing the link, reboot the PC by Start, Shut Down. Check the Restart option and click OK. Wait for the Windows desktop to reappear and run the NECTAS software. The Alarm Synthesis application is run automatically. Accessing the applications entails entering the user name and password. Each user is assigned a profile defining the applications to which he or she is allowed access. The network administrator is responsible for defining the profiles and assigning them to the various users, as described in section 4.4. On leaving the factory, all equipment recognizes two predefined name/password pairs (all in uppercase): ADMIN/ADMIN: Administrator profile (defined in the equipment and not modifiable), USER/USER: User profile write mode operator profile, see appendix 5).
The administrator is advised to: change the password of the ADMIN user, delete the user name USER as soon as some operators have been profiled.
This operation should be carried out in each equipment of the network.
4.2 9400 LX applications

4.2.1 Introduction
This manual describes how to use the craft terminal only for the applications associated with the 9400 LX equipment . These applications can be accessed from the Alarm Synthesis (Alarm summary) main menu on the craft terminal (figure 47).
86/270
September 2000
The operator is assumed to be familiar with the WINDOWS 95 environment and the various resident applications.
The screens supplied in this manual are examples. The screens you see on site will depend on the final configuration and may differ from these. In particular, they may include the legend 946LUX11 or 946LUX12 depending on the software version installed.
Figure 47 Alarm summary screen The alarm summary screen comprises: a menu bar providing access to the applications, a global summary, or synthesis, line, showing a summation of all the alarms on all the network elements.
4.2.2 Menu bar

4.2.2.1 View menu 9400 LX with Slave key (without built-in mediation function)
Reference Displays information on the selected NE (reference of the software installed, with its revision index). The equipment software (946LUX1x) must be compatible with the software loaded on the PC. The reference of the software installed should be entered in the sheet reproduced in Appendix 1.
9400 LX with Master key
Refer to section 4.2.4 for information on accessing the applications from this screens.
September 2000
87/270
4.2.2.2 Bell menu
Disable: Locally and permanently disables (until the software is closed) the audible alarm on the PC. If the alarm bell is enabled, you will see a p symbol alongside the command in the pulldown menu. Simply click the command to toggle it on or off. PC Cut Off: Cancels the alarm on the PC until a new alarm appears. Alarm Cut Off : Broadcasts an acknowledgement of urgent and non-urgent alarms to all the NEs. Thes alarms then disappear from the summary.
4.2.2.3 History menu
Display and Print commands Select the events for display or printout. Mnemonic Selects events concerning a particular mnemonic (All option : Selects all mnemonics). Date Filter You can check this box to select all events between a start date and time and an end date and time that you specify in the appropriate text boxes. File command Saves the history log in ASCII format in the Sy_memo.0 file located in C:\Alcatel\946lux11 (or C:\Alcatel\946lux12) depending on version. This file can be transferred to diskette using the standard WINDOWS commands and then viewed on another workstation. The history log display screen contains the following information: the date and time when the event started, the name of the NE concerned, the type of NE, the type of alarm or event, event start or end indication (appearance/disappearance).
Two log files, each holding up to 1000 events, are used: the second of these is filled after the first. When the second is full, new events overwrite the contents of the first.
88/270
September 2000
The history log is updated in real time even when left open. 4.2.2.4 Help or ? menu
This menu often comprises two submenus. It may also appear in the form of a question mark (?): HELP This menu, just like this manual, is designed to assist the user. ABOUT This option calls up a panel on screen showing the software release and copyright information: Help, About .
Simply click Ok to quit this screen.
4.2.3 Global synthesis line

The global synthesis line comprises 15 information boxes, the meanings of which are detailed in the table below: MNEMO EF DF COLOUR Red Red MEANING Equipment fault Dialogue fault COMMENT Supervision function is no longer responding or has failed S Command not understood S Erroneous transmission S Protocol error Switches off the audible alarm Indication that an alarm is present and acknowledged Indication requiring prompt attention Indication not requiring prompt attention Environment, or housekeeping, alarm, (for example, in a microwave station, door open, generator set fault, abnormal temperature rise, etc) Transmission problem requiring prompt attention Alarm detected that is not local to the NE Signal failure at the equipments customer input The equipment has received a remote control A CT is connected to this equipment
AS AT UG NG HA
Green Magenta Red Yellow Magenta
Alarm stop Alarm attended Urgent alarm Non urgent alarm Housekeeping alarm
SA DA SF ST TC
Magenta Magenta Magenta Green Green
Service affected Distant alarm Signal fail Status Terminal connected
September 2000
89/270
MNEMO AE
COLOUR Green
MEANING Access enabled
COMMENT
Access to the remote controls (in the AS&C Alarms, Status and Controls application) and to the configuration (Equipment configuration and Operational configuration applications) is enabled by a command from a hierarchical level above the CT The equipment is in a default configuration. It needs a complete configuration to be downloaded for the first commissioning. Not used in 9400 LX/UX.
DC
Black
Default configuration
LC
Loss of configuration
4.2.4 How to open a session

When you run NECTAS, the alarm synthesis screen appears with the Application_Choice... menu: If the Application_Choice... menu is greyed out (Inaccessible), the key on the equipment is a Master key. Select View/All Element menu to view all the network elements declared in the network, then click M:0S:0 to select it. The Application_Choice... menu is then accessible. Click the Application_Choice... menu. The screen for you to enter the password then appears.
Give your name and password and click OK. (For more details on user profiles and passwords, refer to section 4.4).
A list of the applications (Figure 48) that you can access, according to your profile, is then displayed. Each application has its own help function, which can be accessed via a pull-down menu.
Figure 48 List of applications specific to the 94xx UX range
90/270
September 2000
4.2.5 Use of applications

The functions performed by the various applications, and their uses, are summarized in the table below.
APPLICATION Administrative functions Installation parameters
TYPE Administration
FUNCTION Managing passwords and access to the applications Managing a network elements hardware configuration
USE Installation, operation and maintenance Commissioning Changing the hardware configuration Commissioning Changing the NE or network configuration Updating network element software
Operational parameters
Managing a network Commissioning elements operational configuration Updating network element software
Software downloading Alarms, Status and (remote) Controls
Displaying alarms and status Routine operation information Selecting and sending remote controls Viewing information contained in the various performance counters for the different entities (links, sections, etc) Monitoring the main transmission parameters (power levels, bit error ratios) Providing an initial diagnostic on transmit and receive alarms Preventive maintenance Checks after commissioning or changing the network configuration Routine operation Preventive maintenance Checks after: S commissioning or changing the network configuration S restarting after corrective maintenance work Network management
Performance monitoring (G.821)
Operation Radio Transmission Parameters
Remote inventory
Reading inventory information from network elements Reading events logged by NEs Extended 946LUX11 or 946LUX12 applications for operation Analyzing the performance levels of terminal points (TP) supported by an NE in accordance with ITU-T Recommendation G.784
Event logging Performance monitoring (G.784)
Operation Corrective maintenance Preventive maintenance Checks after commissioning or changing the network configuration
Analogue measurements
Viewing measurement results Operation performed on the various Preventive maintenance points of an NE Corrective maintenance
September 2000
91/270
4.3 Administrative functions application

The Administrative functions application lets: the administrator manage operators rights of access to the various applications via predefined profiles, each operator change his or her password as stored in the equipment.
The way the various profiles are created is explained in Appendix 5. Path: Alarm synthesis Application_Choice... Administrative functions
4.3.1 File and Receive menus

The File and Receive menus cannot be accessed with the 946LUX11 or 946LUX12 application from 9400 LX equipment.
4.3.2 Operator menu
Global synthesis
The Create, Modify and Delete submenus are accessible only to an operator with the Administrator profile.
Logout Command for disconnecting from the equipment. A dialogue box appears for you to confirm the operation.
92/270
September 2000
Password Command for you to modify your password in the NE for which the session is opened. Enter the current password in the Old password field, making sure that you enter the correct sequence of uppercase and lowercase characters (only the letters A to Z and digits from 0 to 9 are allowed). Enter your new password in the next two fields then click Ok. If you do not enter the two new passwords identically, a dialogue box appears prompting you to repeat the operation. If you enter the old password incorrectly, a warning message is displayed. NOTE: After three unsuccessful attempts to change your current password in a particular session, you are automatically disconnected from the application. Date Shows the date and time: S Current date: date and time stored in the equipment. S New date: PC date and time. The date and time cannot be modified from 9400 LX equipment. The date and time can be modified only from a mediation CT (see Appendix 7).
Screen showing the profile of an operator name USER
Display Command enabling: S you to view your profile, but not your password. S the administrator to display the profiles of all operators, except their passwords. The screen lists the read and write operations you can perform. The method used to create or modify a user profile is explained in Appendix 5.
September 2000
93/270
Create Accessible only to an operator with the Administrator profile Command used by the administrator to assign a profile to a new operator in the NE for which the session is opened. The maximum number of operators is 32. S Enter the operator name in the Operator Identifier field. S Select one of the profiles from the Application Groups list box. S Enter the temporary password (at least four characters) in each of the next two fields. S Click Ok. If the operator name already exists, a warning message is displayed.
Modify Accessible only to an operator with the Administrator profile Command used by the administrator to modify an operator s profile, in the NE for which the session is opened. The operator s password cannot be changed. A dialogue box appears in which to enter the name of the operator. When confirmed, a new dialogue box appears from which to choose the new profile from a list. If the operator is not known to the system, a warning message is displayed.
Delete Accessible only to an operator with the Administrator profile Command used by the administrator to remove an operator from the equipment for which the session is opened. The dialogue appears in which to enter the name of the operator. If the request is accepted, a prompt for confirmation is displayed. If the operator is not known, a warning message is displayed.
94/270
September 2000
4.4 Installation parameters application

The Installation parameters application is used to declare the equipment hardware settings to the management software. Path: Alarm synthesis Application choice Installation parameters
When you start up the application the current settings are read from the equipment and loaded into the craft terminal. A progress indicator bar can be used to monitor the progress of this loading operation. When loading is finished, the HARDWARE CONFIGURATION screen of the connected network element (NE) appears. No configuration can be stored if a Key missing alarm is generated.
4.4.1 Tables menu
TERMINAL
REPEATER WITH ESC DROP/INSERT FACILITY
REPEATER WITHOUT TRIBUTARY DROP/INSERT FACILITY AND ESC DROP/INSERT FACILITY
REPEATER WITH TRIBUTARY DROP/INSERT FACILITY
September 2000
95/270
The submenus are dynamic and the list displayed varies with the options selected in the submenus, as indicated in the previous figure. The submenus can be used to declare the equipments hardware parameters. The Frequency band submenu should be set up before the Modulation submenu, which is not applicable in the 2 GHz band.
Equipment type Select the 9400 LX in ETSI rack equipment type.
Station type Select the station type (see section 2.6): S Repeater without ESC board: no ESC add/drop facility in the repeater station. S Repeater with ESC board: ESC add/drop facility in the repeater station. S Terminal : The terminal station of a link.
Station designation Specify the local station name and the remote station name (each name should have a maximum of eight characters, and not include any characters prohibited by MS-DOS)
Configuration From the dropdown list, select the right option for the equipment configuration.
Backup channel type Select the appropriate button for the backup channels mode of use
96/270
September 2000
MUX protection Select one of the two buttons depending on whether a backup MSU board is omitted (no protection) or included (protection through MSU board) for multiplexer protection purposes. Appears only with 946LUX12 and in 1.5 and 7/8 GHz configurations Modulation Select the modulation type. S 4QAM modulation: not available, in the 1.5 GHz band, for the 16x2, 4x8, 3x8+4 x2 and 34 Mbit/s rates. S 16QAM modulation: not available, in the 7/8 GHz band, for 2 x 2 Mbit/s rate. Frequency band Select the frequency band of the equipment from the dropdown list (the 1.5 GHz frequency appears only with the 946LUX12 version). Tributary units This screen appears once for channels 1 to N and once for channel X. Channels 1 to N must be fitted with 16tributary boards and this configuration must be declared. Channel X, if declared as a separate or occasional channel, can have a capacity different from that of channels 1 to N. Additional boards In each of the three sections, click the appropriate button for the configuration. This depends on the absence or presence of: S an extension ESC 4_5 board (see section 2.6) S a 16 TS/TC extension board (see section 2.7.2). The Absent button in the Local display option should remain selected.
September 2000
97/270
For each ESC, select the type of daughter board associated: S with the ESC 2_3 board for ESC 3, S with the ESC 4_5 board for ESCs 4 and 5. If an ESC has no customizing daughter board, choose the No daughter board option. The options of definition of ESC 4 include 2wire audio, to be selected when the ESC 4_5 board position has a second ESC 2_3 board installed for a second telephone ESC.
Hardware configuration/line impedance Unlike the bit rate, the port impedance of each tributary of each channel must be defined (one screen for channel 1 to N and one screen for channel X, if declared as an occasional backup channel). The following configuration options are available: S All 75 ohms : all the tributary and auxiliary 2 Mbit/s ports are set to 75 ohms configuration. S All 120 ohms : all the tributary and auxiliary 2 Mbit/s ports are set to 120 ohms configuration. S Customized: The impedance of each tributary or auxiliary 2 Mbit/s port is selected by checking the appropriate box. The configuration selected by the software should correspond to the hardware configuration set up on the TIU board.
98/270
September 2000
ESC extension absent option ESC 3 definition Select the type of daughter board linked to the ESC 2_3 board. if this board has no daughter board customizing the ESC, choose the No daughter board option. ESC extension present option ESC 3, 4 and 5 definition
To declare a repeater with tributary drop/insert facility, you must:

in the Hardware configuration submenu, define for each tributary the number of channels to be covered by the drop and insert facility using the Drop/Insert option, Repeater with tributary drop/insert facility Hardware configuration/Drop Insert Select the type of TIU board used for the tributary drop/insert capability in a channel (one screen for each channel). For any choice other than No drop insert, you must then return to the Hardware configuration menu, which then includes a Line impedance submenu (see screen above). This submenu is not displayed if you choose No drop insert.
return to the Tables menu, then reselect the Hardware configuration submenu which then includes the Drop/Insert and Line impedance options. The impedance must be defined for all tributaries dropped and inserted.
4.4.2 File menu
Receive Uploads the current NE configuration and updates the configuration displayed on the CT.
Save Saves the current file. The file is saved by the same name, so a message warning you that the existing file is about to be deleted appears. You can enter a comment in the Header field. Send Sends the NE the new configuration. When you confirm the request to save the file, the screen displays a progress indicator bar (bottom screen). If the software key is incompatible with the new configuration, the new configuration is disregarded.
September 2000
99/270
100/270 Progress indicator bar displayed while the configuration is being uploaded.
September 2000
4.5 Operation parameters application

The Operation parameters application is for declaring the operating parameters of the equipment for which the hardware parameters have already been declared via the Installation parameters application. S This application should be run only after the Installation parameters application has been closed. S No configuration can be stored in the event of an Key absent alarm. Path: Alarm Synthesis Application_Choice... Operational Parameters
When you run the application, the current parameters are read from the equipment and uploaded to the CT. A progress indicator bar is displayed showing the progress of the upload. The following main screen appears when uploading has finished. If the configuration includes inconsistencies (undefined frequencies, bit rates inconsistent with the hardware configuration, etc), intermediate screens appear prompting you to correct the inconsistent settings.
Note:
when the application is run, the configuration parameters are automatically uploaded from the NE. the CT of the station and the master CT must not modify the installation and operation parameters at the same time.
The screens for the Terminal, Equipment, Thresholds and Alarms menus are for declaring the network elements operation parameters.
September 2000
101/270
4.5.1 Terminal and Repeater menus

One or other of these menus is available in the menu bar depending on the station type declared in the installation parameters. The Repeater menu has fewer submenus than the Terminal menu.
TERMINAL
REPEATER WITHOUT TRIBUTARY DROP/INSERT FACILITY WITH ESC DROP/INSERT FACILITY
REPEATER WITH TRIBUTARY DROP/INSERT FACILITY WITH ESC DROP/INSERT FACILITY
REPEATER WITHOUT TRIBUTARY DROP/INSERT FACILITY WITHOUT ESC DROP/INSERT FACILITY
The Switching priority submenu appears only in configuration 2+1 In the case of a repeater without ESC drop/insert facility in the station, the Station number submenu does not appear.
102/270
September 2000
Appears in configurations 2+1. Switching priority For defining the priority levels of the channels in the configurations with backup channel. Channel 1, which carries the engineering service channels, is always highest priority. The other channels can be defined as having low or medium priority.
2+1 configuration
To define the priority of a channel: S click the appropriate button for the channel S click the Low priority or Medium priority option. The corresponding option appears alongside the button linked to the channel. Click the OK button when you have finished defining priorities for all the channels. Channel 1 very high priority: when a switching request occurs on channel 1 (whatever its type), channel 1 is switched to the backup channel. Channel 1 priority: Channel 1 is switched over to the backup channel according to the degrees of urgency relating to the switching requests for the different channels.
3+1 configuration
5+1 configuration
September 2000
103/270
When ESC 4 is declared as a second telephone channel, the screen opposite appears, for you to choose the ESC 2 number and ESC 4 number.
Does not appear in the case of a repeater without tributary drop/insert facility. Bit rates For selecting the operational bit rate (Do). The bit rate is limited by the maximum bit rate allowed by the software key and/or the maximum bit rate permitted by the hardware configuration. Only bit rates compatible with the declared hardware configuration and the software key are displayed.
Link identification Two dialogue boxes (send and receive). For protecting transmission by the introduction of a code in transmit mode (possible values: 0 to 31). This same code must be introduced, in receive mode, into the remote equipment, so that the received code can be compared with the expected code. Similarly, on reception, the programmed code must match that programmed on transmission in the remote station. It is best to use different codes for the two directions. When using a loopback configuration, make the codes the same to avoid having an alarm generated, and restore the initial configuration when the loopback has been cancelled.
104/270
September 2000
Does not appear in the case of a repeater without service channels. Station telephone number ESC 2 number: Selects the station telephone number for ESC. Possible values: 011 to 999, but no more than one 0 in the number. ESC disabled box checked: No telephone for the terminal.
Does not appear in the case of a repeater without tributary drop/insert facility. Tributary connection Dialogue box displayed for transmission and reception. Used to enable or disable each of the tributaries. A tributary that is not loaded but marked active will generate an alarm. The Configuration drop down list can be used to enable or disable all the tributaries simultaneously. The Customized configuration option lets you enable or disable the tributaries individually by checking the appropriate boxes. Terminal: All the customer tributaries connected must be checked as active and the others as inactive. Repeater: All the tributaries dropped or inserted must be checked as active and the others as inactive. Does not appear in the case of a repeater without tributary drop/insert facility. AIS configuration Dialogue box displayed for transmission and reception. Used to indicate, for the active tributaries, whether AIS insertion is enabled or not. The Configuration dropdown list lets you enable or disable all insertions simultaneously.
September 2000
105/270
INPUTS
OUTPUTS
Used to modify the order of the tributaries sent. By clicking at the point of intersection at column i and line j, tributary N_ i incoming to the local terminal is transmitted in TS N_ j of the radio frame. The Standard configuration button restores the configuration shown opposite. The columns represent inputs. The rows represent outputs.
Radio configuration/transmit frequency Radio configuration/receive frequency Dialogue box displayed in transmission and reception. Three horizontal bars let you adjust the frequency values in: S GHz (step = 1 GHz), S MHz (step = 1 MHz), S kHz (step = 10 kHz). The values that can be programmed are limited by the frequency band of the equipment and by the software key. Check that the transmit and receive frequencies of the equipment are correct. In the case of 1+1 HSB configurations, the transmit and receive frequencies of the backup channel, although the same as those of the normal channel, must be programmed by the operator.
106/270
September 2000
Appears only in the case of a terminal station, if all the inputs are the same (does not appear in 34 Mbit/s or 3x8 + 4x2 Mbit/s configurations). Tributary cross connect
4.5.2 Equipment menu

This menu manages the parameters which make it possible to insert the network element into the network management system, that is, it is used to manage the network element from the mediation function or from the master station.
The Network element submenu gives access to a screen from which you can select the equipment as a: network element without mediation, mediation device.
In local supervision mode, you can access the local equipment and the remote equipment. When the PC is connected to a terminal with a key incorporating the RTC option, choosing the PED946LUX option lets you obtain a copy of the screen on the networks supervisory PC (1322 NX or Master 94xx craft terminal) and therefore view all of the network.
September 2000
107/270
4.5.2.1 Network element without mediation (Slave equipment) Network element Bit rate: The chosen rate must match that of the mediation functions rQ2 bus. The rate selected in the Bit rate (MSU port) box is automatically copied into the other boxes. Type of device: The unit is declared as a network element (without mediation). Terminal type: The RCT 946LUX terminal type appears only if the unit is a network element with an RCT (Remote Craft Terminal ) type software key (see section 2.1). NE physical address: This address (1 to 253 or 01H to FDH in hexadecimal) is defined by adjusting the scroll bar. Performance monitoring: For selecting the type of performance monitoring. The G.784 type is available only if the extended 946LUX11 (or 946LUX12) software has been installed. NOTE A network element reset, which takes a few minutes, is performed in each of the following cases: S change of NE physical address, S switch between G784 { G821, S change of equipment type.
108/270
September 2000
SCC/NMS Connection matrix

Screen for setting up, for a particular NE, the connections used to transmit information from the network management system to the selected NEs (see section 2.6.1). 946LUX11 Normally, the standard configuration will be selected, unless otherwise indicated by the network administrator.
946LUX11
946LUX12 The links are set up either by checking the boxes in the lefthand windows, or by drawing them, using the mouse, on the graphical representation in the righthand window. A link can be deleted only in the lefthand window.
946LUX12
September 2000
109/270
4.5.2.2 Mediation device These screens apply to equipment fitted with a Master key or to equipment fitted with a Slave key changing to local mediation mode. Network Element Bit Rate: The bit rate selected must match that of the mediation functions rQ2 bus. The bit rate selected in the Bit rate (MSU access) box is automatically copied into the other boxes. Type of device: The unit is declared as a mediation device. Terminal type: No choice possible. NE Physical Address: When the unit is configured with local mediation function, the physical address is set to 00, and this window is not accessible. Performance Monitoring: Selects the type of performance measurement. The G784 type is available only if the extended 946LUX11 (or 946LUX12) software has been installed. NOTE The NE is reset, which takes a few minutes, in each of the following situations: S on switching between G784 { G821 mode S when the type of equipment is modified.
110/270
September 2000
SCC/NMS Connection matrix

Screen for setting up, for a particular NE, the connections used to transmit information from the network management system to the selected NEs (see section 2.6.1). 946LUX11 Normally, the standard configuration will be selected, unless otherwise indicated by the network administrator.
946LUX11
946LUX12 The links are set up either by checking the boxes in the lefthand windows, or by drawing them, using the mouse, on the graphical representation in the righthand window. A link can be deleted only in the lefthand window.
946LUX12
NE Physical Addresses Option displayed when the element is declared as Mediation Function (master key). Gives a list of the physical addresses of each secondary network element (slave station) managed by the Mediation Function. If you double click a network element or click the Ok button after selecting a network element, a dialogue box opens for you to select the physical address below. Secondary NEs slave key Local supervision lets you view another network element in addition to the local equipment. The option is displayed when the NE is declared as mediation function to allow local supervision (slave key). The equipment can supervise only one remote NE, so just one NE physical address appears. If you double click the NE or click the OK button after selecting an NE, the following dialogue box appears.
September 2000
111/270
Dialogue box for altering the physical address (NDS) of the remote equipment to be displayed. Address 00: No NE connected.
4.5.3 Thresholds menu
946LUX11
946LUX12
The Propagation and Alarm thresholds (946LUX11) or Switching thresholds (946LUX12) menus let you define: the threshold value at which the propagation alarm is triggered, compared to the nominal receive power value (value obtained by link circulation), the threshold values at which alarms associated with switching requests will be triggered in configurations other than 1+0. Two thresholds may give rise to the early switching request: received power level or bit error ratio.
These thresholds should be applied in the order indicated by the figure below:
ESR (-80 to -90 dBm according to bit rate) Propagation alarm P nominal received
Pr (dBm)
BER 1.10-3 PSR 1.10-6 SR 1.10-8 ESR
112/270
September 2000
This screen appears only if the G784 option has been chosen (Equipment/Network Element Configuration screen). It appears only with the extended versions of the 946LUX11 and 946LUX12 software. G826 block size Defines the size of the G826 blocks between 2 and 8 bytes.
Switching thresholds Early switching request (ESR): S Horizontal bar: Selects the absolute received power level at which the early warning alarm is triggered. S Pull-down list: Selects the BER threshold at which the early warning alarm is triggered. Switching request (SR): Selects the BER threshold at which the low Bit Error Ratio switching request alarm is triggered. Priority switching request (PSR): Selects the BER threshold at which the High Bit Error Ratio switching request alarm is triggered. The threshold settings should be such that:
ESR < SR < PSR
Propagation Nominal power: Indicates the nominal received power (derived from link calculation). Power threshold: Selects the attenuation value compared to nominal receive power at which the propagation alarm is triggered. In this example, the alarm is triggered when the received power falls below -70dBm (-40dBm - 30dB).
September 2000
113/270
S a prompt maintenance alarm for the first four thresholds (this alarm appears immediately), S a deferred action maintenance alarm for the last three thresholds (this alarm appears at the end of the 24 hour period). These alarms are normally disabled in the initial NE configuration when shipped. They are enabled via the Alarms menu of the Operation parameters application (section 4.5.4). These alarms are reset by the remote control function Remote_Control/All/MAINTENANCE ALARMS : Reset in the Alarms, States and Remote controls application. The threshold values programmed in the factory are given in the table below.
The acronyms used are as follows: ACRONYM PSAC PSAD PSRC NORMAL CHANNEL Number of switchovers from active channel to standby channel Number of one-second periods during which the active channel is backed up Number of automatic switching requests observed on the normal channel STANDBY CHANNEL* Number of switchovers from any active channel to the standby channel Number of one-second periods during which any active channel is backed up Number of automatic switching requests observed on the normal channel
* Not applicable in the 1+0 configurations.
Factory-set threshold values THRESHOLD Section ES Threshold Section SES Threshold PSAC Threshold PSAD Threshold (Meaningless) Hop ES Threshold Hop SES Threshold PSRC Threshold VALUE 97 2 100 86410 97 2 100
114/270
September 2000
Maintenance Thresholds Defines the thresholds at which maintenance alarms are triggered. The equipment analyzes and logs ES, SES, PSAC, PSAD and PSRC, etc, using counters that are reset every 24 hours. When one of the counters exceeds the programmed threshold, it triggers:
4.5.4 Alarms menu

Radio alarms
Radio alarms or Housekeeping alarms validation Displaying the list of alarms: S Use the scroll bar in the righthand part of the dialogue box. S Click the See ALL button and a list of alarms (see table in Appendix 2) appears. You can double click an alarm to return to the dialogue box with the alarm selected. Changing the alarm criterion: Assign the selected alarm criterion by checking one of the boxes. A coloured box appears alongside the alarm name, depending on the criterion you select: Inhibited (Grey), Urgent (Red) or Not Urgent (Yellow). If you do not check any of the boxes, the criterion is set to Status, coloured magenta. Changing the criterion for all alarms: Click the Set default values button to set the criteria for all the alarms managed by the current configuration in a single operation: S The alarms are declared as Urgent alarms S Remote controls and indications are declared as Not urgent alarms
Housekeeping alarms
September 2000
115/270
This is for selecting one of the isolated equipment loops. When you select a loop, the following screen appears.
Accessible only if the optional 16 TS/TC board is present. Microwave loop configuration n_ x Each of the 16 loops can be controlled by a synthesis of several alarms, defined using the screen opposite (the alarms are divided into five groups). Two possible methods: S check the alarms contributing to the synthesis of loop 1, enable by clicking OK then repeat the operation for the other loops, S configure all the loops, by moving from one to the other using the horizontal Loop reference scroll bar and confirm them all by clicking OK. By clicking List all, the screen opposite, describing the allocations of all the loops, is displayed and can be printed out.
116/270
September 2000
Accessible only if the optional 16 TS/TC board is present. Equipment dry loop definition
Housekeeping alarms labels Select one of the loops available from the lefthand column and, after double clicking the Label box, assign a name (up to 12 ASCII characters). Click Apply then OK in that order to exit. The number of loops displayed depends on the presence or absence of the optional 16 TS/TC board.
Remote Controls (loops) labels The principle here is the same as for the environment loops. The number of loops displayed depends on the presence or absence of the optional 16 TS/TC board.
4.5.5 Summary menu (946LUX12 version of the software only)

This calls up the window below, summarizing the configuration of the equipment. This screen is display only. The cursor in the horizontal scroll bar at the bottom of the normal channel area can be used to display the parameters of the different channels (1 to 5). The fields cannot be edited. You exit from this screen by clicking Hide summary in the menu bar.
September 2000
117/270
4.5.6 File menu

Open .. Opens a Configuration table file saved previously. The directory containing open files is: c:\Alcatel\946lux11 (or c:\alcatel\946lux12). The command uses the variables of the station name to name the files. When the local station name is PARI(S) and that of the far-end station is NANT(ERRE), the file name may be: parinant.b60 (for the file used), parinant.old or parinant.p01 to parinant.p09 (for the files saved). Note: Before you open a configuration file, the current configuration is saved as parinant.old. Save Saves the configuration tables in the file. The directory for open files is: c:\alcatel\946lux11 (or c:\alcatel\946lux12). The command uses the variables of the station name to name the files. When the name of the local station is PARI(S) and that of the far-end station is NANT(ERRE), the file name is: parinant.B60 Note: A warning message is displayed.
The configuration is not sent to the equipment.
118/270
September 2000
The Save as command opens the same window as the Save command, but with an extra Change the file button. If you click this button, the window below opens.
Save As ... Saves the configuration tables in a file. The directory for open files is: c:\alcatel\946lux11 (or c:\alcatel\946lux12). The command uses the variables of the station name to name the files. When the name of the local station is PARI(S) and that of the far-end station is NANT(ERRE), the file name is: parinant.p01 to parinant.p09 (Replace the ? with a value from 1 to 9 as required). Note: A confirmation prompt window is displayed.
Send ... Sends the current configuration tables to the NE. These tables are saved first. All the configuration parameters are then downloaded to the NE. Note: S The configuration tables may be rejected by the Network Element, if a software key problem arises. S Wait for downloading to finish before carrying out any other operations. Download progress is indicated by a progress indicator bar (see screen below).
Configuration upload progress indicator bar.
Receive Command for: S Uploading configuration tables from the NE. S Matching the current CT configuration to the NE configuration. Note: When the application is started up, the configuration tables are automatically uploaded from the NE.
September 2000
119/270
The result appears on the background of the applications main window. Only configuration tables that do not match appear. The Erase menu lets you clear the result of the audit from the window.
120/270
September 2000
Audit Compares the current configuration on the CT with the configuration files previously saved. This menu is used in particular to check changes made to the configuration between opening the program and the time of the audit. Files are select from the screen displayed (Open).
4.6 Software downloading application

This application can be used to update the GSU board software in 9400 LX type network elements. The download can be executed from: an ECT (Equipment Craft Terminal) connected to the NE, an OCT (Office Craft Terminal) connected to the mediation device, an LCT (Local Craft Terminal) at the CS (Central Station),
to all the stations of a network (to update GSU board software in 9400 LX equipment). The download operation is in three stages: installation of the new software release on the craft terminals hard disk, from the diskette supplied by Alcatel, NOTES For a given NE, the application must not be run simultaneously from more than one craft terminal. For a given type of NE and craft terminal, the operation for installing the software is performed just once, on receipt of the diskette supplied by Alcatel containing the software release. Only the downloading and activation stages need to be repeated for all the NEs of the network supervised by the craft terminal. When you have opened the application: if a download had been begun previously with an unfinished transfer of data to RAM, a window appears prompting you to finish the transfer; if a software release had been previously transferred to NE RAM but not activated, a window appears prompting you to activate the software. Alarms Synthesis Application_Choice... Software downloading downloading of the software to the RAM of the NEs that need to receive it, activation of the software in each NE.
Path:
SOFTWARE_DOWNLOADING_MANAGEMENT MENU
September 2000
121/270
Block size (247 bytes by default) may be reduced if a high BER reading is obtained on the link, by checking the appropriate box (see later in this table). Click the Download button to initiate the download. Progress indicator bars are displayed for you to monitor installation and downloading progress. Without installation: To be used if an installation had been completed previously. The Install and Expand file boxes can no longer be accessed. The .bin type files to be installed must be selected from the hard disk C:\. The block size can be adjusted. Click the Download button to initiate the download. A progress indicator bar is displayed for you to monitor the progress of the download. NOTES S Installation and expansion of the .cmp file supplied on diskette, which includes transferring of the file to the craft terminals hard disk followed by its decompression to obtain a .bin binary file, takes about half an hour. S The process of transferring the .bin file to the NE also takes about half an hour.
Adjusting the block size Use the cursor that appears when the corresponding box is checked. To be used only if a high bit error ratio is obtained.
122/270
September 2000
Software Downloading Selects the source file for the download. With installation: Downloading following delivery of a new software release by ALCATEL. The Install and Expand file boxes should both be checked (.cmp, type compressed files supplied on diskette for installation from drive a:\).
Software Management For identifying the GSUs software release. Equipment identification: S NE name: name of network element S NE type: type of network element Committed software package status S Name: the identity of the software (ALCATEL reference) S Version: the software revision index S Status: the system software activated is the software downloaded into the NEs flash memory Uncommitted software package status S Name: software identity (ALCATEL reference) S Version: software revision index S Status: Enabled: Software transferred into RAM and available for activation (by clicking the Activation (Activate) button to transfer from RAM to flash memory) S Under download: Status that applies during installation and data transfer S Download interruption: Status that applies after a command to abort the download When you click the Activate button, the uncommitted software becomes committed.
Enabled
Identification of the craft terminal from which downloading is performed. The server is the PC performing the download Read only information screen NE name: identifies the name of the NE Type: identifies the type of NE Server type: indicated by the button that is checked
September 2000
123/270
4.7 Alarms, Status and Controls application

4.7.1 Opening the application

Path: Alarm synthesis Application_Choice... Alarms, Status & Controls
In the 946LUX11 version of the software, the main screen appears (section 4.7.2). In the 946LUX 12 version of the software, the following screen appears :
When you click the blue rectangle, the main screen appears.
4.7.2 Description of the main screen

Alarm synthesis area Channel identifier
LED
Synopsis area diagram
Physical representation of the equipment 5+1 configuration with space diversity
LED
1+1 configuration
3+1 configuration
Figure 49 9400 LX alarms, status and controls main screen
124/270
September 2000
This screen contains all the dynamic information concerning the connected equipment. It normally comprises three areas of information: a synthesis part, in the top portion of the screen, containing:
S S

boxes for signals and alarms supported by the network element, the type of network element connected, the name of the station and of the remote station.
a functional part containing a synopsis diagram of the equipment (in this case, on the right of the screen); a physical representation of the equipment to locate board alarms or internal functions (in this case, on the left of the screen).
From this screen, you can obtain and view alarm and status information on the various components of the network element connected. In the case of an internal fault on a board or network element, the LED in the physical representation of the equipment concerned changes colour. The presence of this symbol on a background other than green, indicates that an alarm has been detected; its colour depends on the severity of the alarm. red background: Urgent alarm, yellow background: Non Urgent alarm, magenta background: alarm that is neither urgent or non urgent (status; for example, equipment taken out of service by the operator), green background: no alarm, normal state or alarm disabled.
The meaning of the alarm is given in a window displayed by clicking the alarm symbol.
4.7.3 Viewing alarm and synthesis information

To obtain the meaning of an alarm or status indication, simply position the cursor (appears with several different shapes) on the graphic representation of the alarm or state and click. General shape of the selection pointer. This cursor is moved by the mouse to the various graphic objects displayed on screen. Depending on the object to which it points, it can assume the shape of a hand or magnifying glass, as shown below. It can also be moved from one graphic object to another by the cursor control keys on the keyboard. The hand calls up an information bubble concerning the element to which it points, such as an alarm or configuration fault message. When the cursor is moved by the keyboard, the Return key toggles the information bubble on and off. The magnifying glass is used to activate the Zoom function on network element mimics, to provide access to additional NE information. When the cursor is moved via the keyboard, the Return key activates the Zoom function on the equipment to which the cursor points.
4.7.4 Accessing secondary NE screens

See screens in Figure 50. Example of access to the secondary screens by zooming in on the mimic diagram: In the functional part of the main screen, you can access various secondary screens detailing the components of the NE. You zoom in on the components by moving the cursor to the name of the element concerned (white background). When the cursor changes from an arrow to a magnifying glass, click to obtain the secondary screen (in this case, in the top screen of Figure 50, click CHANNEL 1). The secondary CHANNEL 1 screen (middle right screen) shows the mimic diagram of the channel and provides access to the names of its component subsystems and their associated alarms. If you click the magnifying glass on the representation of the MSU, the bottom left screen appears, detailing the MSU.
September 2000
125/270
Example of access to the secondary screens from the physical representation: In the main screen, click on the physical representation, of a board when the arrow changes to a magnifying glass. The mimic diagram of the board then appears (MSU board in this example). The View menu (see section 4.7.7) provides an alternative way of accessing the secondary screens.
4.7.5 Exiting secondary screens

Click View and First to return to the main screen, Click Previous or the right mouse button, or press Escape to return to the previous screen, Click the button in the top right corner to close the application immediately.
Figure 50 Paths to secondary screens (5+1 configuration with diversity)
4.7.6 Alarm synthesis line

The various acronyms in the information boxes that make up the alarm synthesis line are explained below:
EX
PA
SA
HA
UG
NG
AT
AS
ST
AE
PR
126/270
September 2000
MNEMO EX PA SA HA
COLOUR Red Magenta Magenta Magenta
MEANING External alarm Propagation activity Service affected
COMMENT Synthesis of alarms associated with a signal failure or a signal fault on the tributaries or auxiliary tributaries Received field below a threshold defined on configuration Transmission problem requiring prompt attention
Housekeeping alarm Housekeeping, or environment alarm (one of the remote indication loops wired to the equipment is generating an alarm) Urgent alarm Non urgent alarm Alarm attended Alarm stop Status Access enabled Alarm indication requiring prompt attention Alarm indication not requiring immediate attention Alarm indication that has been acknowledged The equipment alarms have been disabled The equipment has received a remote control Access to the remote controls (in AS&C) and configuration (CFG) applications is enabled by a command from a hierarchical level above the CT (OS) Appears only in the 946LUX12 version : The software key is incompatible with the equipment. Check consistency between the configuration of the equipment and that permitted by the key. Otherwise, change the key, or reset the equipment (see section 6.18.7). 946LUX11 version : see section 6.18.7.
UG NG AT AS ST AE
Red Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Green White if access not enabled Red
PR
Provisioning Refused
4.7.7 View menu
The View menu calls up a list of the functions described in the mimic diagram and containing additional information, as well as a means of accessing the first screen of the menu or the previous screen. This information can also be obtained by moving and clicking the magnifying glass cursor, on the name of the block concerned.
September 2000
127/270
4.7.8 History menu

The History, or log, provides information on all the events that have occurred on the NE. It cannot be viewed until an event occurs. As long as no event has been recorded, the option remains greyed out and inaccessible. The history comes into operation only when the application is opened. It then displays events as they occur, with their date and timestamps. When the application is closed, events occurring since the last time the log was consulted (in other words, the last time the application was closed for the NE) are logged. They will then be displayed when the application is reopened, with the date and time of reopening (an * character indicates that the date and time are those at the time of reopening and not the actual time the event occurred). Up to 1000 events can be logged. Beyond this number, the most recent event overwrites the oldest event.
Display... and Print... commands Select alarms to be displayed or printed out. Display title Selects alarms for a single item. For example, alarms concerning just one function (All option: Selects all items). Mnemonic Selects alarms concerning a single mnemonic across all items (All option: Selects all mnemonics). Classification Selects alarms assigned the same criterion: Urgent, Non Urgent (All the classifications option: Selects without criteria). Date Filter When you check this box, selects alarms between a start date and time and an end date and time, to be entered in the appropriate boxes. Save command Saves events affecting the network element in chronological order. There is no selection capability. Events are saved in a text file, in the file named al_memo.NDS, NDS being the number of the network element in the list. In the case of a slave key, the local equipment has the number 0 and the remote equipment is number 1. The file can be read using any word processor or text editor such as Windows NOTEPAD.
128/270
September 2000
The History screen shown in Figure 51 contains the following information: the date when the application was opened,
the events, arranged from most recent to oldest, for each event:
S S S S S
the time the event started, the name of the item, the alarm mnemonic, urgency criterion (Urg, Nurg, ...), start or end of alarm.
The scroll bar can be used to view alarms that have occurred but could not be fitted on the screen. When the application is opened, the History menu shows the physical address of the NE and all alarms active at the time of opening. All these lines are prefixed by an asterisk.
Figure 51 View of the History log
4.7.9 Remote Control menu
All command Lists all the remote controls that can be sent to the NE (the list of remote controls is given in Appendix 3). When you select a remote control, the dialogue box below opens.
September 2000
129/270
List of all items that can be affected by the remote control selected above. When you confirm the remote control, an acknowledgement message is displayed.
Current Display command List all the remote controls that can be associated with one (or more) items graphically represented on the current screen (the case of a transmitter opposite). When you confirm the remote control, an acknowledgement message is displayed.
Remote control acknowledgement message.
Transmission of a remote control from the CT will be allowed only if the AE (Access Enable) mnemonic appears on a green background in the alarm synthesis line. Permission to send the remote control is subject to authorization from the central station (if there is one), or entry of a password, if one was introduced when the software was installed. Otherwise, the message Remote control not allowed appears.
130/270
September 2000
4.8 Performance Monitoring (G821) application

The Performance monitoring (G821) application lets you view information contained in the performance counters. These counters record: Errored seconds (ES): one-second intervals that include at least one error, Severely errored seconds (SES): one-second intervals with a binary error ratio greater than 1.103. US (unavailable seconds): period beginning with the first ten consecutive SES and ending at the start of ten periods with no consecutive SESs.
SES SES SES SES SES SES SES SES SES SES SES SES
SGE SGE
SES
First unavailable seconds
Next unavailable seconds
First available seconds
Figure 52 Example of unavailable periods
These values are defined for a link, a section, a hop, a channel, the definition of which, in G821, is given by the figure below.
Normal Channel Normal Channel Reception STATION A STATION B Normal Channel Normal Channel Reception STATION C
Channel X Channel X Reception SECTION
LINK (if no drop/insert in station B)
Figure 53 Elements that make up a link (in G821)
When the application is opened, the date of opening and the address of the connected network element are displayed, with the values accumulated in the counters since the application was last closed. These counters are reset when the application is next closed. This information is generated and sent by the network elements, and can be displayed in G821 format. Path: Alarm Synthesis Application_Choice... Performance Monitoring G821
When the application is started up, the first screen gives all the monitoring information on the connected network element, as shown in Figure 54. The title of the screen identifies the NE concerned.
September 2000
131/270
Figure 54 First performance monitoring (G821) screen
4.8.1 Display menu

The Display menu lets you view the performance measurements recorded by the equipment. This information is displayed in chronological order, as shown in Figure 54. A scroll bar lets you view all the events logged. VERTICAL SCROLLING Vertical scrolling can be controlled by the mouse or by the keyboard (using the up and down arrows). To scroll through one event at a time, click the arrow boxes on the scroll bar. The symbol ../.. in the bottom right corner of the page indicates that the display of the latest information received is incomplete; scroll the table down to view the next block of information. G821 PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENTS the information displayed includes: the date and time of start of measurement, the type of counter: Receive, the measurement duration in seconds, for each entity (section, link, channel):
S S S
the identity of the entity, an indication of loss of data if necessary, the readings of the counters attached to the entity.
If there are no errors, no corresponding display appears on screen. The display is refreshed at 60-second intervals, and updated to include all new errors that might have occurred.
4.8.2 Save menu

The Save menu lets you save performance monitoring information to disk (File) or to printer (Print).
132/270
September 2000
File OPTION This option lets you save the performance monitoring information supplied by the network element to disk, in the network element directory and in the file named PM_MEMO.sn (sn=secondary number). This ASCII file can be viewed by the operator and analyzed outside of the application using a package like EXCEL, for instance. Print OPTION With this option, all the performance monitoring information can be printed out in chronological order.
September 2000
133/270
4.9 Radio Transmission Parameters application

The Radio Transmission Parameters (RTP) application (Figure 55), lets you: monitor the trends of the main transmission parameters (transmitted power, received power, bit error ratio), run an initial diagnostic on transmit and receive alarms.
No more than two RTP applications can be opened simultaneously, on two different stations. The polling interval of the RTP application can be adjusted, by setting the POLRTP variable in the Win.ini file as indicated in Appendix 6. Path: Alarm Synthesis Application_Choice... Radio Transmission Parameters
10 48
Figure 55 Radio Transmission Parameters (RTP) screen FIELD FUNCTION Indicates the state of communication with the remote NE: Communication OK, the remote NE is contacted at intervals of less than three seconds, Communication No response, communication with the remote NE has been lost for more than three seconds; a string of ???? characters appears in place of the data. Flashing green signal if the remote NE is contacted. White signal if communication with the remote NE is lost. The right end of this information line shows the current time. Transmitted Power Shows the transmitted power level as an absolute value. In an HSB configuration, the value displayed is the transmitted power set point value for the switched transmitter. Shows the received power level, as an absolute value (dBm) and relative to the nominal threshold defined in the configuration.
Received Power
134/270
September 2000
FIELD
FUNCTION Shows the alarm furthest back up the transmission chain for transmission, reception or both directions in the case of a repeater station. Click once on the alarm mnemonic to see its meaning, Click twice and the list of mnemonics with their meanings is displayed. Shows the bit error ratio (BER): Hop, Channel and Section BER information. Reading the bargraph: Each division of the bargraph that becomes red represents a BER value as shown below.
5.108 1.107 2.107 5.107 1.106 2.106 5.106 1.105 2.105 5.105 1.104 2.104 5.104 1.103 cutoff
Alarm Diagnosis
Binary Error Rate
Figure 56 is a visual representation of the concepts of channel, hop, section and link in RTP.
HOP HOP
STATION A
STATION B
STATION C
HOP CHANNEL LINK (if there is no drop/insert function in station B)
HOP CHANNEL
Figure 56 Elements that make up a link (in RTP)
COMMANDS IN THE RTP SCREEN The commands in the top part of the RTP screen are accessed by clicking once. The functions of these commands are described in the table below.
September 2000
135/270
COMMAND Quit Closes the RTP application
FUNCTION
Activates or deactivates graphic display: of the bit error ratio, BarGraph of transmitted power, of received power.
A display without bargraph can be selected to view two RTP windows representing different network elements side by side. Events Used, when the application is open, to display a list of the latest events (80 events for a terminal), as explained after this table. Three RTP application representation and layout options: icon form, Windows screens cascaded from the top left corner of the screen, different coloured screens.
Caution : the RTP window is positioned in the foreground of the NECTAS window (network display) when using the NECTAS window. To access the RTP screens: use the ALT TAB key combination, or double click the background to call up the task list box and then double click RTP.
When you select the Events command in the RTP screen, the Events List 946LUX11 or Events List 946LUX12 screen appears, as shown below (946LUX11 version).
Sends a list of events to the Windows printer Can be used to suspend the screen refresh function, or resume it (dynamic) Closes the window Relative variation in transmitted power Relative variation in received power
Transmit alarm
Receive alarm
Figure 57 List of most recent events The meanings of the alarm messages are given in Appendix 4. The relative power levels represent variations relative to values defined on configuration. The menu bar contains the Freeze/Dynamic menu: Freeze when the display refresh function is enabled, Dynamic when the display refresh function is fixed.
136/270
September 2000
4.10 Remote inventory application

Application available only with the extended 946LUX11 or 946LUX12 software. This application can be used by an operator or NMC manager to access inventory information concerning the selected network element. The information is designed to assist in the administration of the network elements as performed by the customer s maintenance and repair centres. The inventory data can be accessed from a craft terminal or from a remote management device. The data is displayed at the request of the operator and can be printed out. All the data contained in backup .rur files provides for complete identification of a replaceable unit (generic name RU), and can be used to facilitate management of the equipment by installation and maintenance teams. The various data fields shown by the application contain the following information: identity of Alcatel CIT or subsidiaries (ACIT, ASEL, ASES, ATEL), the mnemonic representing the type of network element (GAN 301 for example), the reference (for example 3CC05702AAAA), reference of the resident software installed (for example 3CC06954AAAA), the CLEI code (Bellcore specification), on up to ten characters, the place of manufacture (four characters), serial number, date of manufacture (YYMMDD format). The information supplied can be used by the operator to identify a unit remotely for management and administration purposes. The information supplied replaces the labels and markings previously affixed to or visible on the equipment. All the inventory data is loaded before delivery to the customer, during the factory tests and/or inspections. This cannot be modified by the operator. Path: Alarm Synthesis Application_Choice... Remote Inventory
4.10.1 File menu
Open... For reading and displaying, with a selection filter, the NE data previously backed up on disk (file name with the .rur extension). The selection filter (see below) appears when you confirm the selected file. The events previously displayed are lost. The display takes the form shown in section 4.10.2.
September 2000
137/270
Filter for selecting data to be displayed.
Delete... Deletes a backup file (with the extension .rur) chosen from the list. A prompt for confirmation is displayed.
Print Prints out the data in the .rur file selected from the list.
4.10.2 Receive menu
Display To read and display, according to the selection filter opposite, data contained in the NE. When you confirm, the screen below appears (in this case, no selection filter was specified).
138/270
September 2000
Save as... Stores an inventory file for reuse by the application. Enter the name of the file to be saved (the software automatically adds the extension .rur) and confirm. If a file already exists with the same name, a warning message is displayed.
September 2000
139/270
4.11 Maintenance Memory application

Application available only with the extended 946LUX11 or 946LUX12 software. The Maintenance Memory application can be used to store the appearances and disappearances of events occurring when the link between the operating system and the NE is cut, or when the CT is not connected. The NE supports an event memory for each physical or logical entity. Reading the memory does not delete it, but each NE can reset the content of the memory. Access is protected by the access rights mechanism. The maintenance memory is read at the request of the operator. You can delete the content of the maintenance memory by a specific command. Path: Alarm Synthesis Application_Choice... Event Memory
140/270
September 2000
4.11.1 File menu

Open... To read and display, with a selection filter, network element data previously saved to disk (file with the extension .evt). The selection filter (see below) is displayed when you confirm the file selected. The data previously displayed is lost.
Filter for selecting the events to be displayed.
Delete... To delete a backup file (with the extension .evt), chosen from the list. A prompt for confirmation is displayed.
Print To print out data from the .evt file selected from the open list.
September 2000
141/270
4.11.2 Receive menu

Display... To read and display, according to the selection filter opposite, events contained in maintenance memory. Sort by date: S checked: events are displayed in chronological order S box not checked: events are displayed by groups of entities.
Save as ... To save an event file that can be reused by the application. Enter the name of the file to be saved (with the extension .evt) and confirm. If a file already exists with the same name, a warning message is displayed.
4.11.3 Clear menu
Clears the maintenance memory. A message is displayed prompting you to confirm the operation.
142/270
September 2000
4.12 G784 Performance Monitoring application

Application available only with the extended 946LUX11 or 946LUX12 software..
This application can be used to analyze the performance of the Terminal Points (TP) supported by a network element in accordance with ITU-T Recommendation G784. The TPs are divided into various classes. Each TP class requires an appropriate error count format. Some TPs correspond to the sections and links defined, in G.784, by Figure 58.
Normal Channel Normal Channel Reception STATION A STATION B Normal Channel Normal Channel Reception STATION C
LINK (if no drop/insert in station B)
Figure 58 Elements that make up a link (in G.784)
Users of the G784 application can transfer errors detected (all kinds or those selected by sort criteria) either continuously (AUTOMATICALLY), or upon request (MANUALLY). In automatic mode, the measurement results are counted over two accumulation periods, every quarter hour or once a day; in manual mode, the measurements are run at the request of the operator. Path: Alarm Synthesis Application_Choice... Performance Monitoring (G784)
When you start up the application, the G784 window (Figure ) opens. Display defaults to the manual and day modes, and all the TPs are displayed. The selections made in the View and Mode menus are summarized in the status bar along the bottom of the applications window. All the error display boxes assigned to a TP and a counting period (24 hours or 15 minutes) appear blue. The application remains in manual mode until a display request is sent. The Above field: shows the number of TPs not shown in the top part of the window. The Under field: gives the number of TPs not shown in the bottom part of the window.
September 2000
143/270
Day mode/No TP started up
Quarter hour mode/TPs started up
Figure 59 G784 window
4.12.1 File menu
Save Saves the content of the error counters, in ASCII format, in the NEs directory. Enter the name of the file to be saved (with the extension .cnt) and confirm. This file can then be used only in a word processing or spreadsheet application, and not by the application itself.
Print Prints out the state of the counters.
4.12.2 View menu
Selects the terminal points (TP) being monitored for display on screen (all or just those affected by errors). The display is refreshed automatically at the end of each accumulation period.
144/270
September 2000
4.12.3 Mode menu

MODE Auto
MEANING Automatically transfers the content of the TP error counters at the start of each accumulation period. In this mode, the Clear and Read commands are inaccessible. Default mode when the application is started up. The error counters are transferred at the request of the operator using the Read command. For selecting accumulation periods: S Day: the error count begins each day at midnight. S Quarter: the error count begins at the 0, 15, 30 and 45 minute points of each hour. This option adjusts the time scale in the applications main screen (one column for each day or for each quarter hour). The content of the counters in the time periods leading up the opening of the application can be viewed (19 quarter hour counters and 9 day counters at most) by clicking Read. The list of TPs started up in quarter hour mode may differ from that of TPs started up in day mode.
Manual Day
Quarter
After a manual or automatic read, an error indication is displayed in a box representing the Terminal point Time pairs of values, for each terminal point monitored (TP) and for each accumulation period. Each individual box of the Terminal point - Time pair is assigned a colour representing the value of the error. The table below explains the colour code used. PRIORITY Low MEASUREMENT RESULT No measurement No error Loss of data Value below lower criterion threshold Value below higher criterion threshold High Value above higher criterion threshold COLOUR Sky blue Green White Magenta Yellow Red
For each TP displayed in the window, an error summary appears from left to right in the corresponding line. Vertical scrolling (choice of TPs) and horizontal scrolling (days or quarter hours) is possible by means of the scroll bars.
September 2000
145/270
The colour coding of the error counter summaries are the same as those in the table above. There is also a summary on the left and on the right of the area displayed.
D Rec 1 quality (1) D Rec X quality (1) Ch 1 D Reception (1) Ch X Link (1) Ch X Section (1) Ch X Reception (1) Ch X D Reception (1)
Start Starts display of the error counters for the terminal points. Select the TP or TPs to be started from the list (TPs not yet started) and confirm.
D Rec 1 quality (1) D Rec X quality (1) Ch 1 D Reception (1) Ch 1 Link (1) Ch 1 Section (1) Ch 1 Reception (1) Ch X D Reception (1)
Clear Accessible only in manual mode For the TPs selected, clears all the error counts stored since the application was started up from NE memory. A message prompting for confirmation is displayed.
D Rec 1 quality (1) D Rec X quality (1) Ch 1 D Reception (1) Ch 1 Link (1) Ch 1 Section (1) Ch 1 Reception (1) Ch X D Reception (1)
Stop Selects the TPs for which the operator wants to stop viewing the error counters. The list of TPs displayed contains only those currently started.
Read Accessible only in manual mode Collects the latest totals recorded by the NE, and updates the data displayed (in automatic mode, the data is uploaded at the end of each accumulation period).
146/270
September 2000
Notes For all the Terminal Points not displayed in the window, an error summary at the top and bottom of the area shown on screen appears on the corresponding line.
Details of TP counters When you click a TP title in the lefthand column, the screen zooms in on detail of the error counters for that TP. The readings of the counters appear in the boxes representing each date:
Column summarizing the most serious faults after the time period displayed
Column summarizing the most serious faults prior to the time period displayed
When you position the cursor on a date in the window, the magnifying glass appears so that you can zoom in on the counter readings for that date:
The counter readings appear as follows: values above 1 000 000 in the form of N 10m, colours according to the results of comparison with the thresholds.
The error counters displayed depend on the TP selected.
September 2000
147/270
Receive quality TP The six error counters for which readings are displayed are: ACRONYM RLTS1 RLTS2 RLTS3 RLTS4 RLTMMax RLTMMin MEANING Number of one-second periods during which received power has been more than 10 dB above nominal power. Number of one-second periods during which received power has exceeded the propagation threshold. Number of one-second periods during which received power has exceeded the early switching request threshold. Number of one-second periods during which received power has exceeded the received power threshold. Maximum estimated received power value during the observation period. Minimum estimated received power value during the observation period.
Switching performance TP The four error counters for which readings are displayed are: ACRONYM PSAC PSAD PSRC PSRSAD NORMAL CHANNEL Number of switchovers from active channel to standby channel STANDBY CHANNEL* Number of switchovers from any active channel to the standby channel
Number of one-second periods during which Number of one-second periods during which the active channel has been backed up any active channel has been backed up Number of automatic switching requests observed on the normal channel Number of automatic switching requests observed on the standby channel
Number of one-second periods during which Number of one-second periods during which it has been impossible to meet a channel the standby channel has received automatic switching request switching requests and has been unable to satisfy them because it is already backing up another channel.
Link, Section and Receive TP The three error counters for which readings are displayed are: ACRONYM BBE ES SES MEANING Number of errored blocks that are not part of an SES. Number of errored seconds. Number of severely errored seconds.
148/270
September 2000
4.12.4 Configure menu

11
This menu is for adjusting the high and low thresholds for representing levels of degradation for each counter of each type of TP.
G826/Radio spi sink Thresholds for Receive quality
G826/Radio protection Thresholds for Switching performance
G826/Plesio path Thresholds for: S Link S Section S Reception
September 2000
149/270
4.13 Measures application

Application available only with the extended 946LUX11 or 946LUX12 software. This application is used to take measurements on various measurement points of an NE and display them on screen. Path: Alarm Synthesis Application_Choice... Measures
When the application is opened, a window appears containing the readings of the last measurements performed. The date and time of the measurement appear at the top of the window. The polling interval for refreshing the measurements can be adjusted by setting the POLMEA variable in the 946LUX1x.ini file as indicated in Appendix 6.
MODE MENU
MODE Auto
FUNCTION All of the measurements defined for each network element are performed every 60 seconds (period can be configured in the WIN.INI file, as specified in appendix 6). The content of the measurement display window is refreshed automatically at the end of each period. The Receive menu is disabled in this mode. The network element performs its measurements without displaying the readings. The display is obtained at the request of the operator (by clicking Receive).
Manual
150/270
September 2000
4.14 Local supervision

The 9400 LX supervision system can be used to supervise the local station and any remote station of the network. You need to know the physical address of the remote equipment to change to local supervision mode. If there is a network supervision function, the supervision bus must be disconnected before setting the station to local supervision mode. There are two possibilities depending on whether you are located at station A or station B, relative to the network supervision point.
STATION A STATION B
Network
Supervision Network
Network
Figure 60 Relative positions of stations A and B
4.14.1 Station A of a network with supervision/station of a network without supervision

4.14.1.1 Change to local supervision ATTENTION : Before modifying the parameters, make a note of the current configuration (Physical address and SCC NMS connection matrix) p p Run the Operation parameters application. In the Equipment menu, make the configuration changes summarized in the table below.
SUBMENU Network Element SCC/NMS Connection matrix
CONFIGURATION Type of Device: Check the Mediation function button. Set a break in the supervision network to isolate the branch containing stations A and B (example of Figure 60). To do this: S in 946LUX11 leave only the MSU1SCC1 and SCC1MSU1 connections. S in 946LUX12 check only the Radio access button
NE Physical addresses
Click 001 in the SEC column and enter the physical address of the station B equipment.
p p p
Send the file. Wait about two minutes for the supervision system to be re-initialized and reconfigured. Check that the screen shows both NEs (M:0S:0 for station A and M:0S:1 for station B) using: View/All Element (M:xS:y = Mediation x/Secondary y).
September 2000
151/270
4.14.1.2 Exiting local supervision p S Go to station A (M:0S:0) and run the Operation parameters application. S In the Equipment menu, set up the configurations summarized by the table below: SUBMENU Network equipment SCC/NMS Connection matrix p p CONFIGURATION Type of Device: Check the Network Element button and restore the initial equipment address. Restore the previous configuration or the standard configuration.
In the File menu, click on Send to load the new configuration into the equipment. Wait for the equipment to be reset (about two minutes), then return to ALARMS SYNTHESIS SUMMARY and check that there are no alarms by opening the AS+C application.
4.14.2 Station B in a network with supervision

4.14.2.1 Change to local supervision mode p Contact the network supervisor using the telephone service channel, for example, and ask him to alter the SCC-NMS connection matrix to isolate the branch containing stations A and B (example in Figure 60). To do that: S in 946LUX11 leave only the MSU1SCC1 and SCC1MSU1 connections S in 946LUX12 check only the Radio access button. In the Equipment menu of the Operation Parameters application, set up the configurations summarized by the table below. SUBMENU Network element NE Physical address p p CONFIGURATION Type of device: Check the Mediation Function button Click 001 in the SEC column, and enter the physical address of the equipment of station A.
Send the file, and wait for the supervision system to be reset and reconfigured (about two minutes). Check that the screen actually shows the two elements (M:0S:0 for station B and M:0S:1 for station A) by Display/All elements.
4.14.2.2 Exit from local supervision p S Go to station A (M:0S:1) S Run the Operation parameters application. S In the Equipment/SCC/NMS connection matrix menu, restore the standard configuration. S Send the configuration. S Go to station B (M:0S:0): S Run the Operation parameters application. S In the Equipment/Network element menu, click the Network element button under the Type of device heading, and restore the initial physical address of the equipment. S Send the configuration. p Wait for the equipment to be reset (about two minutes), then return to ALARMS SYNTHESIS and check that there are no alarms by opening the AS+C application.
152/270
September 2000
5 Commissioning
STOP
A very precise knowledge of the link configuration is absolutely vital before you begin commissioning. For this, complete the sheets for stations A and B according to the model supplied in Appendix 1.
5.1 Order of commissioning for a link

The commissioning operations described below are for a link comprising a station A and a station B. If the network includes supervision, station A is the one located between the supervisory station and station B (Figure 61). Installation and commissioning commence with station A. If station B has to be commissioned first, apply the procedure in section 5.5.
STATION A STATION B
Network
Supervision Network
Network
Figure 61 Relative positions of stations A and B
The stages are: prepare the PC (see section 4.1), install station A and roughly point the antenna towards station B, commission station A, install station B and roughly point the antenna towards station A, commission station B and point the antenna, connect the tributaries and the service channels, return to station A to:
S S S S S
fine tune the pointing of the antenna, carry out all the commissioning checks (switching to local supervision mode), check out the link, cancel the local supervision function, connect the tributaries and engineering service channels.
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED The following equipment is required for commissioning: Multimeter.
September 2000
153/270
Laptop PC with Windows 95 (see section 4.1). PC-NE link cable, set of system diskettes. a dedicated cable for measuring the AGC voltage (see section 5.3.2), A 2, 8 or 34 Mbit/s BER analyzer, with an impedance of 120 or 75 , depending on the configuration of the link to be installed. A compass and a pair of binoculars. Tools as defined in section 3.2.3.
5.2 Installing and commissioning station A (phase 1)

5.2.1 Preliminary operations
p p p p p Install station A according to the instructions in chapter 3. Roughly point the antenna of station A towards station B using a compass and a pair of binoculars. Check that the correct power supply voltage is present (from 20 to 60 V), with the correct polarity, at the power supply input. Check that there are no cables connected to an NMS port; any that are connected must be disconnected. Check that a software key supporting the configuration is fitted to the SKU connector (J225) in the connection area of the main rack (refer to section 3.1.4.2, and the comments regarding information on the software key label). Power up the equipment via the switches on the front panels of the PSU boards (in a 1+0 configuration, only one board will be installed in the rack). S The green LED on the control panel should light.
AL STP
NURG ATT
OPER
URG
BUSY L 1 OFF H 2
9400LX
Wait for the ATT, URG and NURG LEDs to start flashing simultaneously on the control panel. After two minutes at most (for the configuration to be registered), the LEDs should stop flashing simultaneously. Connect the portable PC to the unit via the link cable supplied with the system diskettes (serial port A F connector on the panel ). Power up the PC and run NECTAS software. The Alarm synthesis application opens. To run an application, refer to section 4.2.4. Run the Alarms, Status and Controls application, S in the mimic diagram representation of the equipment, zoom in on the GSU board, S check that there is no software key alarm. If there is a software key alarm, carry out the same checks as you would after a change of key (see section 7.4).
p p p
154/270
September 2000
5.2.2 Setting up the installation parameters

Run the Installation parameters application. Open in turn each of the items in the Tables menu, modifying the values as required according to the stations configuration (refer to the stations sheet, see appendix 1). Upload the configuration by File/send (see section 4.4.2, File menu). Close the application.
5.2.3 Setting up the operation parameters

p Run the Operation Parameters application. In turn, open each of the items in each of the menus, modifying the values as required, according to the station configuration (refer to the station configuration form). S Check the transmit and receive frequencies. S for a 1+1 HSB configuration, check that the transmit and receive frequencies of channels 1 and X are the same. p Upload the configuration by File/Send (see section 4.5.6, File menu). Close the application.
5.2.4 Checking out operation

Checking operation entails setting up local and remote loopback configurations as defined in section 2.8. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Connect the 2, 8 or 34 Mbit/s BER analyzer (according to the configuration) to an active tributary. Open the Alarms, Status and Controls application and set up a loop at the multiplexer output (remote control: FRAME [Start] :local loop validated). Check the bit error ratio. If zero, continue checking; otherwise, check the wiring, the equipments TIU type (and its impedance) and the configuration of the equipment. Cancel the loop (remote control: FRAME [End] :local loop inhibited).
In a 1+1 configuration with multiplexer protection, carry out steps 6 to 8. Otherwise, go directly to step 9. Force operation to the standby multiplexer/demultiplexer using the remote control: S MUX/DEMUX [Start] : standby switching validated Repeat steps 2 to 4, above. Return to normal multiplexer/demultiplexer operation using the remote control: S MUX/DEMUX [Start] : normal lockout validated. Check that there are no remote controls still active (indicated by a yellow coloured non-urgent alarm and a green coloured state in the NECTAS status bar). Close the Alarms, Status and Controls application. Run the Radio transmission parameters application. Check that the Transmit alarm diagnostic is OK and close the application. If an alarm is detected or an incorrect value is found, refer to chapter 6 and correct as required. Disconnect the BER analyzer.
September 2000
155/270
5.3 Installing and commissioning station B

5.3.1 Preliminary operations

p Commission station B by carrying out the same operations as those described for station A in sections 5.2.1 to 5.2.4.
5.3.2 Pointing the antenna

p Use the dedicated cable for checking AGC (option: 9400LXT003). Link the end with the 9way male Sub-D connector to the MAINTENANCE AGC V (J170) connector on the 3 Tx/Rx backplane (or, if appropriate, to the AGC V J129 connector on the diversity backplane) and the other end to a voltmeter near to the antenna if possible.
The wiring of this cable is given below: 9way Sub-D male connector at one end, three cores of the cable, respectively linked to pins 1 (AGC of receiver N_ 1 or N_ 3 on the 3 Tx/Rx or diversity backplane), 5 (ground) and 9 (AGC of backup receiver N_ X or N_ 5 on the 3 Tx/Rx or diversity backplane) of the previous connector, free ends of the three conductors fitted with plugs compatible with the multimeter used. Adjust the pointing of the antenna to obtain maximum deflection on the voltmeter (voltage between 0 and 4 V). Check carefully, by angular sweeping, that the antenna is on the main lobe and not a side lobe. Lock the adjusting elements of the antenna firmly in this position.
RECEIVED POWER 4
3 theoretical curve V 2 typical curve AGC voltage
0 0 20 40 60 80 100 dBm
Figure 62 Typical curve of the AGC voltage as a function of received power
5.3.3 Checking out operation of station B

p p p Using the local loopback function, carry out the same checks as in station A (see section 5.2.4). Run the Radio transmission parameters application. Check that the Communication OK indicator is green and flashing.
156/270
September 2000
p
Check that the received power is greater than -70 dBm. This check should be carried out on the normal channel and, if appropriate, on the standby channel. A lower value is probably due to inaccurate pointing of the station A antenna. It may be necessary to return to station B, after station A has been set up, to fine tune the antenna setting. In the event of an alarm or an incorrect value, run the Alarms, Status and Controls application (see section 4.7) to locate the origin of the alarm and to rectify it if it relates to a localized failure or configuration defect in station B. Connect the tributary, supervision and service channel cables previously disconnected. If there is an operator at another station of the network, and if station B has a telephone, test the telephone service channel (general call using number 00). Test the ESC 3, ESC 4 and ESC 5 connections, if they exist, and if the corresponding equipment is installed in the station. If necessary, refer to section 7.8 on how to customize the service channels.
p p p
In a repeater, if the telephone service channel fails to operate properly (crackling or, on the CT, EF indicators active concerning the network elements connected after the repeater active), check the settings of switch modules S106 to S109 and S110 to S113 on the backplane mother board (see section 3.7.1.3). If the CT does not provide board and module level supervision, check the setting of switch S101 on the 3 Tx/Rx backplane mother board (see section 3.7.1.3).
5.4 Commissioning the link from station A (2nd phase)

5.4.1 Pointing the antenna
p Fine tune the pointing of the antenna in the same way as for station B (see section 5.3.2).
5.4.2 Checking the radio transmission parameters

p p p p Switch station A to local supervision mode (see section 4.14). Display the equipment and check that no EF (equipment failure) alarm is indicated. Select M:0S:1 (Station B) and run the Radio transmission parameters application. Select M:0S:0 (Station A) and run the Radio transmission parameters and Alarms, Status and Controls applications on the station. Check that the Communication OK indicator is flashing and that there are no transmit and receive alarms. In the event of an alarm, use the Alarms, Status and Controls application to analyze and, if appropriate, correct the cause of the alarm (if it is a configuration fault). Note the received power level. This must be measured on each channel in an N+1 configuration, by forcing a switchover in reception to one or other channel using the remote controls: S MAN. MODE [Start]: manual lockout validated to force switchover to channel N, S RX X [Start] : manual switch validated to force switchover to channel X. Disable the forcing remote controls. Select M:0S:1 (Station B). Run the Alarms, Status and Controls application on station B, keeping the Radio transmission parameters application displayed on both stations.
p p p
September 2000
157/270
Read the received power level. This must be measured on each channel in an N+1 configuration, by forcing a switchover in reception to one or other channel using the remote controls: S MAN. MODE [Start]: manual lockout validated to force switchover to channel N, S RX X [Start] : manual switch validated to force switchover to channel X. The received power values should lie within $ 6 dB of the nominal received power level indicated on the station configuration form. If the difference is greater: S Check that there are no abnormal propagation conditions (storm or heavy rain, for example). S Check the pointing of the antenna (possibly pointing to a side lobe). If the problem persists, contact the network authority or the Alcatel MUST service (see page 3). If the level is correct, check the value displayed on the BER bargraph (all the LEDs should be on and green). COUPE
5E8
1E7
2E7
5E7
1E6
2E6
5E6
1E5
2E5
5E5
1E4
2E4
5E4
If alarms are indicated by the RTP application, carry out the following operations in the station or stations showing an alarm: p p p Select station M:0S:0 or M:0S:1. Run the Alarms, Status and Controls application, carry out the diagnosis and make any corrections according to the instructions in section 6.3. In the event of a configuration error (for example, tributaries declared inactive or active by mistake), run the stations Installation parameters and Operation parameters applications and make the necessary changes. The installation and operation parameters of station B can be altered remotely. Take care not to cut off the link by incorrect settings! Close the Alarms, Status and Controls application.
5.4.3 Remote loopback on a tributary

Remote loopback must be set up on an active tributary for the checks to be carried out in sections 5.4.4 and 5.4.5. p p Run the Alarms, Status and Controls application on station B (M:0S:1). Set up the remote loopback as follows: S In the Remote controls menu, choose All. S Select the remote control [TRIB. x [Start] : distant loop validated. (x : N_ of the tributary on which the loopback will be set up). S Click OK. p In station A, connect the BER analyzer to the tributary x port and check that there are no errors.
158/270
September 2000
1E3
Check that the Communication OK indicator is flashing and that there are no transmit and receive alarms. In the event of an alarm, use the application Alarms, Status and Controls application to analyze and, if appropriate, correct the cause of the alarm (if it is a configuration fault).
5.4.4 Checking transmit/receive switching

These checks must be carried out only in N+1 or 1+1 HSB configurations.
p p p p
Set up the remote loopback on an active tributary. The BER analyzer should not detect any errors. Open the Alarms, Status and Controls application on M:0S:0 (Station A) and M:0S:1 (Station B). In both stations, switch over to the standby channel according to the information below.
5.4.4.1 1+1 configurations MENU Submenu 1+1 FRQ DIV. CONFIGURATION 1+1 HSB CONFIGURATION Click TX X [Start] : manual switch validated and click OK Click RX X [Start] : manual switch validated and click OK, Click RECEIVER X [Start ]: manual switch validated and click OK
Remote controls All Remote controls All
Check that the switch has actually taken place (see the graphic view of the MSUs in A and B in the Alarms, Status and Controls application).
NOTE: All receive mode switching is errorfree. S In N+1 mode, there is no transmit mode switching.
S
p
In 1+1 HSB mode, the transmit mode switching causes a dropout on the link, and a loss of information on reception indicated by the appearance of a burst of errors.
In both stations, switch over to the normal channel according to the information below: MENU Submenu 1+1 DIV. CONFIGURATION 1+1 HSB CONFIGURATION Click TX 1 [Start] : manual switch validated and click OK Click MAN. MODE [Start] : manual Click MAN. MODE [Start] : manual switch validated and click OK. switch validated and click OK.
Remote controls All Remote controls All p p
Check that the switch has actually taken place (see the graphic view of the MSUs in A and B in the Alarms, Status and Controls application). The remarks in the NOTE above still apply. Change back to automatic switching mode (deleting nonurgent yellow alarms and green status indications) and cancel the remote controls previously activated according to the information below: MENU Submenu 1+1 DIV. CONFIGURATION 1+1 HSB CONFIGURATION Click TRANSMITTER 1 [End] : manual lockout validated and click OK. Click MAN. MODE [End] : manual lockout inhibited and click OK. Click MAN. MODE [End] : manual lockout inhibited and click OK.
Remote controls All
Remote controls All
September 2000
159/270
5.4.4.2 1+1 configurations with multiplexer protection p In both stations, force operation to the normal multiplexer/demultiplexer according to the information below: MENU Submenu ACTION Click MUX/DEMUX [Start] : standby switching validated and click OK
Remote controls All p p p
Check that the switch has actually taken place (see the graphic view of the MSUs in A and B in the Alarms, Status and Controls application). Check that there are no errors. In both stations, switch over to the standby multiplexer according to the information below: MENU Submenu ACTION Click MUX/DEMUX [Start] : standby switching validated and click OK
Remote controls All p p p
Check that the switch has actually taken place (see the graphic view of the MSUs in A and B in the Alarms, Status and Controls application). Check that there are no errors. Change back to automatic switching mode (deleting yellow nonurgent alarms and of green status indications), by sending the remote control: MENU Submenu ACTION Click MUX/DEMUX [End] : standby switching inhibited and click OK.
Remote controls All
5.4.5 Checking performance

p Run the Performance monitoring (G.821) application, Display menu (see section 4.8). This application keeps a count of errored seconds, severely errored seconds, degraded minutes and unavailable seconds on the link (results are given by link, channel, hop, etc).
Duration and results: Application running time: two hours. Tolerance: the values displayed should be less than or equal to those indicated in the table below: AGGREGATE BIT RATE EVENT ES SES DM US NOTE: In the event of fading over a period of less than 15 minutes, the period of fading is not taken into account. In the event of fading over a period longer than 15 minutes, the test will be extended by the same amount. p After the check, close the Performance monitoring application. 0 0 4 Mbit/s 2 0 8 Mbit/s 3 0 Not significant 0 0 16 Mbit/s 4 0 34 Mbit/s 4 0
160/270
September 2000
5.4.6 End of commissioning

To finish commissioning:
Cancel the remote loopback as follows: S In the Remote control menu, choose All. S Select the remote control TRIB. x [End] : distant loop inhibited. (x : the number of the tributary with the loopback configuration). S Click OK. Reconnect the tributary, monitoring and service channel cables which were disconnected. Check carefully that there are no remaining active remote controls (signalled by a yellow nonurgent alarm). Exit local supervision mode as indicated in section 4.14.2. If the network is supervised, incorporate the link into the supervision network: S Call the supervision centre, and ask the operator to declare the link (provide the operator with the addresses of the two terminals), S Wait for the network to be commissioned. Never leave equipment configured in local supervision mode when commissioning is finished.
p p p p
September 2000
161/270
5.5 Reversing the order of installation and of link commissioning

If it were not possible to follow the order of installation, described in paragraph 5.1 for a link consisting of a station A and a station B, by starting with station A, the process would be as follows: install station B, and roughly point the antenna towards station A, commission station B, install station A and roughly point the antenna towards station B, commission station A and fine tune the pointing of the antenna then connect all the service channels provided, using the Operation parameters/Equipment/SCC/NMS connection matrix menu (see section 4.5.2), configure the matrix as indicated by one of the screens below (946LUX11 or 946LUX12) :
Configuring the SCC/NMS connection matrix with the 946LUX11 version
Configuring the SCC/NMS connection matrix with the 946LUX12 version
NANTERRE
return to station B and carry out the following operations:
S S S S S
fine tune the pointing of the antenna, carry out all the commissioning checks (switching to local supervision mode) as indicated in section 5.4, check out the link, from station B, restore the SCC/NMS connection matrix to its standard configuration in station A, by clicking the Standard configuration button, cancel the local supervision mode.
162/270
September 2000
6 Operation, servicing and maintenance

6.1 Network supervision

6.1.1 Network supervised with the Alcatel network management system
The network supervision station receives all alarms generated by the network elements. With the supervision applications, the operator analyzes the alarms and initiates appropriate corrective maintenance operations (see the procedures later in this document). If the results of the performance monitoring programs are unsatisfactory, analysis functions can be used to locate the hops involved, and perform the necessary maintenance operations to restore original performance levels on the link.
6.1.2 Network without the Alcatel network management system

On detecting a failure, the operator must go to one of the stations on the failed hop, equipped with a laptop PC (craft terminal, CT), connect it to the F interface of the main IDU and run the AS&C, RTP and G.821 (946LUX11 or LUX12) or G.826 (extended 946LUX11 or LUX12) applications to analyze the fault and determine which element has failed.
6.2 Preventive maintenance

This involves regular visits to inspect the units and their interconnections (connectors, cables, sockets, etc), as well as all the equipment involved in the operation of the station (power generation equipment, batteries, compressor if appropriate, solar panels if appropriate, earthing, etc) and, in case of doubt, checking the suspect parts, taking all the necessary precautions to avoid disrupting data transmission over the link (using the 1+1 switching capability if available, etc).
6.3 Corrective servicing

6.3.1 Methodology
Check the condition of the cables, connectors and connections, and of all the components that are involved in the operation at the station (power supply, battery, earthing, etc), Analyze IDU alarm indicators on the control panel and the boards, If alarms are indicated, locate them using the configuration and operation programs installed on a CT and analyze them and carry out the necessary corrective procedures (change of module, cable, etc).
6.3.2 Analyzing the indicators on the control panel
AL STP
NURG ATT
OPER
URG
BUSY L 1 OFF H 2
9400LX
Figure 63 Control panel MEANING OF LEDS ON THE CONTROL PANEL An analysis of the alarm indications on the control panel will identify the equipment originating an alarm. The URG, NURG and ATT LEDs can flash to provide information on the status of the equipment, as indicated below: The URG, NURG and ATT LEDs flashing in rotation (caterpillar fashion): change of a configuration or software being started up (duration: about 2 minutes),
September 2000
163/270
LABEL URG NURG ATT BUSY BUSY
INDICATION Red LED Red LED Yellow LED Green LED Green LED Green LED Urgent alarm Non urgent alarm Alarm attended
MEANING
Presence of the +5 V power supply voltage Line associated with telephone handset n_ 1 busy Line associated with telephone handset n_ 2 busy
The control panel has three switches and three connectors: a 9way Sub-D connector marked F for the RS232 interface with the CT; two RJ11 connectors for connecting the telephone handsets connected to telephone service channels ESC 2 and ESC 4 (when they exist); twoposition switch S101:
S S
OPER used in normal operation, AL STP (ALarms SToP) to disable the URG and NURG alarms to the supervision network; TEST LED for checking that the URG, NURG and ATT alarm indications operate correctly, normal operation in central position, AL CUT to acknowledge urgent and nonurgent alarms indicated until acknowledged, and which will remain indicated by the ATT LED, pending a further alarm;
a threeposition switch S102, with automatic return to the mid position:
S S S
a switch S103 with three stable positions for choosing the signal level applied to the speaker of the telephone service channel with selective calling:
S S S

L(ow) for a low level, OFF to cut off the signal, H(igh) for a high level.
6.3.3 Using the operating programs to trace alarms

Connect the CT to port F via a cable ref: 1AB054120027, Open the NECTAS application; If the following message appears on screen:
1) Check that the equipment is indeed powered up and that the initialization phase is finished, 2) Check that the GSU board is correctly inserted and that the cable from port F is connected to serial port A on the computer, 3) Check the cable (pintopin links: 1 $ 1, 2 2, ...9 9), 4) If the following message appears on screen (xx = 11 or 12):
164/270
September 2000
URG, NURG and ATT LEDs flashing simultaneously: The configuration of each of the three microcontrollers is different. The equipment then switches to its default configuration. Check the configuration using the CT, and alter it if necessary (refer to the station configuration form in Appendix 1).
NECTAS loader
946LUX1x: Equipment absent in the configuration
4) Click Ok and load the 946LUX1x operating software, 5) Otherwise, change the GSU. Open Applications... and enter the correct name and password (section 4.3.2), Open the Radio Transmission Parameters application, 1) Analyze the received power level or levels, 2) Analyze the transmit/receive alarm or alarms, 3) Analyze the BER readings. This will enable you to identify the most probable causes of the alarms in the equipment or in the far end equipment. Open the AS&C program. Refer to section 4.7 for general information concerning the AS&C application and how to use it. 1) Reminders: when the cursor changes to a hand, clicking the left mouse button cursor shapes: calls up the alarm message, and when it changes to a magnifying glass, the same action can be used to zoom in on the corresponding subsystem. alarm criteria: ,

Ok
Caution : the alarm criteria can be modified on configuration (section 4.5.4); the colouring of the LEDs encodes the criteria as follows: red: urgent alarm, yellow: non-urgent alarm, green: no alarm or alarm disabled, magenta: status. 2) Method: analyze the alarm synthesis line (see section 4.2.1), the TC square should be green; if the CD square is in reverse video, the configuration has been lost; enter all of the station configuration (see sections 5.2.1 to 5.2.4), zoom in on the subsystem(s) with the alarm conditions.
Each time the Alarm synthesis message appears on screen, use the Zoom function to obtain more details on the alarm type or types on the module affected. This alarm will not be documented in the rest of this document.
September 2000
165/270
6.4 Module and board positions in the equipment

6.4.1 N+1 configurations without space diversity

TX1 RX1 TXX RXX TX3 TX5 RX3 RX5
ESC23 TIU1 LSU MSU & backup MSU ESC45 GSU PSU2 16 TS/TC option PSU5
Figure 64 5+1 configuration with occasional or independent backup and Mux protection The modules and boards are identified by their simplified names.
6.4.2 N+1 configurations with space diversity

TX1 RX1 TXX RXX TX3 TX5 RX3 RX5 RX1 div. RXX div.
ESC23 TIU1 LSU MSU & backup MSU GSU PSU2 16 TS/TC option ESC45 PSU4
Protected PSU3-5 Protected PSU1-X RX5 div.
Figure 65 5+1 terminal configuration with space diversity and Mux protection
166/270
September 2000
6.5 Screens on opening the AS&C application

946LUX12 software
When the mouse pointer moves over the blue area of the screen, it changes to a magnifying glass; if you click in this area, the general configuration screen is displayed. Refer to the screens in Figures 64 and 65 and the screens below.
946LUX11 software The general configuration screen is accessed directly without the step described above.
Basic 1+0 terminal configuration without ESC 45 option or TS/TC extension
Basic 1+0 terminal configuration with ESC 45 option and TS/TC extension See section 6.6.1
1+1 configuration with space diversity and Mux protection with ESC 45 option and TS/TC extension, without space diversity power supply protection See section 6.10.5
September 2000
167/270
Look through the screens such as those reproduced below as a reference, to find your link configuration screen and refer to the specified section, zooming in on the CHANNEL N or CHANNEL X icon.
6.6 Zoom displays from the functional screens

The screns below are obtained via a Channel 1, N or X zoom in the opening screen (see section 6.5).
6.6.1 1+0 configuration

Main channel, 1+0 without ESC 45 option or TS/TC extension TIU module section 6.7, 6.8 or 6.9 MSU board section 6.10 TX module section 6.12 RX module section 6.13 ESC 2 3 board section 6.15 GSU board section 6.18 PSU module section 6.21 Main channel, 1+0 with ESC 45 option and TS/TC extension TIU module section 6.7, 6.8 or 6.9 MSU board section 6.10 TX module section 6.12 RX module section 6.13 ESC 2 3 board section 6.15 ESC 4 5 board section 6.16 GSU board section 6.18 TS/TC option board section 6.20 PSU module section 6.21
2 1
2 1
168/270
September 2000
6.6.2 1+1 configuration

Channel 1 in 1+1 HSB configuration

3 2 1
TIU module section 6.7, 6.8 or 6.9 MSU board section 6.10 TX module section 6.12 RX module section 6.13 ESC 2 3 board section 6.15 ESC 4 5 board section 6.16 GSU board section 6.18 TS/TC option board section 6.20 PSU module section 6.21 Channel 1 in 1+1 frequency diversity configuration TIU module section 6.7, 6.8 or 6.9 MSU board section 6.10 TX module section 6.12 RX module section 6.13 ESC 2 3 board section 6.15 ESC 4 5 board section 6.16 GSU board section 6.18 TS/TC option board section 6.20 PSU module section 6.21
2 1
2 1
Channel X in 1+1 HSB configuration TX module section 6.12 RX module section 6.13 GSU board section 6.18 PSU module section 6.21
September 2000
169/270
2 1
TX module section 6.12 RX module section 6.13 GSU board section 6.18 PSU module section 6.21
6.6.3 N+1 configurations

6.6.3.1 Simple N+1 configuration Zoom on normal channel 1 TIU module section 6.7, 6.8 or 6.9 MSU board section 6.10 TX module section 6.12 RX module section 6.13 ESC 2 3 board section 6.15 ESC 4 5 board section 6.16 GSU board section 6.18 TS/TC option board section 6.20 PSU module section 6.21 LSU module section 6.22 Zoom on occasional or independent backup channel X
2 1
2 1
TIU module section 6.7, 6.8 or 6.9 MSU board section 6.10 TX module section 6.12 RX module section 6.13 GSU board section 6.18 PSU module section 6.21 LSU module section 6.22
170/270
September 2000
Channel X in 1+1 frequency diversity configuration
6.6.3.2 N+1 configurations with space diversity Zoom on normal diversity channel 1 TIU module section 6.7, 6.8 or 6.9 MSU board section 6.10 TX module section 6.12 RX module section 6.13 Diversity RX module section 6.13 ESC 2 3 board section 6.15 ESC 4 5 board section 6.16 GSU board section 6.18 TS/TC option board section 6.20 PSU module section 6.21 LSU module section 6.22 Zoom occasional or independent backup diversity channel X
2 1
2 1
TIU module section 6.7, 6.8 or 6.9 MSU board section 6.10 TX module section 6.12 RX module section 6.13 Diversity RX module section 6.13 GSU board section 6.18 PSU module section 6.21 LSU module section 6.22 Zoom on normal diversity channel 2
2 2 1
TIU module section 6.7, 6.8 or 6.9 MSU board section 6.10 TX module section 6.12 RX module section 6.13 Diversity RX module section 6.13 GSU board section 6.18 PSU module section 6.21 LSU module section 6.22
N 1
MESSAGE UNDELAYED MAINTENANCE
TYPE URG alarm
MOST PROBABLE CAUSE AND CORRECTIVE ACTION Immediate maintenance alarm See definition in section 4.5.3; use the History log programs to detail the alarms. After locating and identifying the fault, repair as required.
September 2000
171/270
N 2
MESSAGE DELAYED MAINTENANCE
TYPE NURG alarm
MOST PROBABLE CAUSE AND CORRECTIVE ACTION

Differed maintenance alarm See definition in section 4.5.3; use the History log programs to detail the alarms. After locating and identifying the fault, repair as required.
3 MANUAL MODE
Forced switching mode Un defined Indicates forced switchover in transmission to normal channel 1 or standby channel X by remote control.
REMOTE CONTROLS Remote control activation/deactivation labels Tx 1 [Start]/[End] : manual lockout validated/inhibited Tx X [Start]/[End] : manual lockout validated/inhibited MAN. MODE [Start]/[End] : manual lockout validated/inhibited Rx X [Start]/[End] : manual switch. validated/inhibited Rx DIV. [Start]/[End] : manual switch. validated/inhibited Rx X DIV. [Start]/[End] : manual switch. validated/inhibited MAINTENANCE ALARMS: reset Effects of activation Manual forcing of the main transmitter. In the remote station: Automatic disabling after five minutes. Manual forcing of the standby transmitter. In the remote station: Automatic disabling after five minutes. Forces N+1 configuration switchover to main receiver N. In the remote station: Automatic disabling after five minutes. Forces N+1 configuration switchover to backup receiver X. In the remote station: Automatic disabling after five minutes. Forces N+1 configuration switchover to the channel N diversity receiver. In the remote station: Automatic disabling after five minutes. Forces N+1 configuration switchover to backup diversity receiver X In the remote station: Automatic disabling after five minutes. Reset of the maintenance alarm counters and cancellation of the urg(ent) and n(on) urg(ent) alarms.
172/270
September 2000
6.7 nx2 Mbit/s or nx8 Mbit/s tributary interface unit (TIU) boards
TYPE TIU-F1
ALLOWABLE BIT RATES 2x2 Mbit/s, 4x2 Mbit/s, 1x8 Mbit/s, 2x8 Mbit/s, 4x8 Mbit/s 2x2 Mbit/s, 4x2 Mbit/s, 8x2 Mbit/s, 1x8 Mbit/s, 2x8 Mbit/s, 4x8 Mbit/s + 2 Mbit/s auxiliary 2x2 Mbit/s, 4x2 Mbit/s, 8x2 Mbit/s, 16x2 Mbit/s + 2 Mbit/s auxiliary, 1x8 Mbit/s, 2x8 Mbit/s, 4x8 Mbit/s + 2 Mbit/s auxiliary, 3x8 Mbit/s + 4x2 Mbit/s
REFERENCE 3CC 05862 AAxx
TIU-F2
3CC 05868 AAxx
TIU-F3
3CC 05869 AAxx
6.7.1 Functions
The TIU-F1, TIU-F2 and TIU-F3 (Tributary Interface Unit) boards handle the following functions: choice of port impedance (75 coaxial or 120 balanced) for the 2 Mbit/s tributaries, HDB3 HCMOS conversion at the interfaces of the main tributaries and, if appropriate, of the auxiliary 2 Mbit/s tributary from/to outside the microwave link, recovery of timing from the input signal.
6.7.2 Hardware configuration

Tributary N_10 Tributary N_ 7 Tributary N_ 5 Tributary N_ 1 Tributary N_ 2 Tributary N_ 3
Tributary N_ 6 Tributary N_ 9 Tributary N_ 8 Tributary N_11 Tributary N_13 Tributary N_12 Tributary N_15
Tributary N_14
Tributary N_16
Tributary N_ 4 2 Mbit/s Aux.
Figure 66 Location of the tributary impedance selection straps on the TIUF3 board Choice of port impedance (75 coaxial or 120 balanced) by strap (see Figure 66) for each 2 Mbit/s tributary (the printed circuit has markings indicating the appropriate strap positions for the required impedance to be applied to the ports of each tributary). Note: The 8 Mbit/s tributaries only offer 75 unbalanced port impedances.
September 2000
173/270
6.7.3 Software configuration

Installation parameters: Station configured as a terminal: Choice of TIU board via the menu: Installation parameters/Tables/Tributary units/Normal channel: choose type of board according to the maximum number of 2 Mbit/s ports, Choice of port impedance for the 2 Mbit/s tributaries via the menu: Installation parameters/Tables/Tx/Rx Hardware configuration/Line impedance/Channel 1: choose 75 or 120 for all tributaries, or for each tributary (customized), Station configured as a repeater with tributary drop/insert: Choice of TIU board operating in drop/insert mode via the menu: Installation parameters/Tables/Tx/Rx Hardware configuration/Drop_Insert/Channel 1: choose the type of board according to the maximum number of 2 Mbit/s ports, Choice of port impedance for the 2 Mbit/s tributaries via the menu: Installation parameters/Tables/Tx/Rx Hardware configuration/Line impedance/Channel 1: choose 75 or 120 for all the tributaries, or for each tributary (customized).
6.7.4 Maintenance
If the TIU fails, replace it with an identical model, making sure that you first configure the straps to select the port impedances for the 2 Mbit/s tributaries (see Figure 66). Note: The TIU-F1 and TIU-F2 boards have the same printed circuit as the TIU-F3 but are underequipped: the TIU-F1 board supports only tributaries n_ 1 to n_ 4, and the TIU-F2 board can handle only tributaries n_ 1 to n_ 8 + the auxiliary 2 Mbit/s stream.
6.7.5 TIU board alarms
23
24
TIU board zoom
22
6.7.6 Alarms
N 22 MESSAGE GENERAL ALARM TYPE URG alarm MOST PROBABLE CAUSE AND CORRECTIVE ACTION General alarm. (TIU module) Replace the TIU module
23
CONFIGURATION ERROR
Configuration error. (TIU module) NURG Inconsistency between the tributaries described in the operational alarm configuration and those allowed by the TIU board. Check the installation and operational configurations of the boards and the hardware configuration of the impedances. URG alarm Module (TIU) missing or dialogue problem. TIU module absent or no dialogue with the GSU board. If the TIU module is present, replace it (*)
24 UNIT MISSING
(*) Note: If this alarm is indicated on all the modules, reset or change the GSU board.
174/270
September 2000
6.8 34 Mbit/s + auxiliary 2 Mbit/s tributary interface unit (TIU) board

TYPE TIU-F5
ALLOWABLE BIT RATES 34 Mbit/s + auxiliary 2 Mbit/s
6.8.1 Functions
The TIU-F5 (Tributary Interface Unit) board handles the following functions: choice of port impedance (75 coaxial or 120 balanced) for the auxiliary 2 Mbit/s tributary, HDB3 HCMOS conversion at the interfaces of the main tributary and the auxiliary 2 Mbit/s tributary from/to outside the microwave link, equalization to compensate for the loss introduced by the length of cable connecting the 34 Mbit/s tributary, timing signal recovery from the input signal.

Choice of port impedance (75 coaxial or 120 balanced) by strap (see Figure 66) for the auxiliary 2 Mbit/s tributary (the printed circuit has markings indicating the appropriate strap positions for the required impedance to be applied to the ports of this tributary).
Auxiliary 2 Mbit/s stream
DS101
Figure 67 Straps for choosing the impedance of the auxiliary and signalling bit stream for the TIUF5 board
September 2000
175/270

Installation parameters:
Station configured as a terminal: Choice of TIU board via the menu: Installation parameters/Table/Tributary units/Normal channel: choose from the pulldown list for the 34 Mbit/s + auxiliary 2 Mbit/s board, Choice of port impedance for the auxiliary 2 Mbit/s stream via the menu: Installation parameters/Table/Tx/Rx Hardware configuration/Line impedance/Channel 1: choose 75 or 120 for the auxiliary 2 Mbit/s stream,
6.8.4 Maintenance
If the TIU fails, replace it with an identical model, making sure that you first configure the straps to select the port impedance for the auxiliary 2 Mbit/s stream (see Figure 67).
6.8.5 Indications
The TIU-F5 board has a red LED (DS101) which lights if the equalizer generates an alarm (see Figure 67) in the event of loss of frame alignment or of the incoming signal.
23
24
TIU board zoom
22
6.8.7 Alarms
23
CONFIGURATION ERROR
24 UNIT MISSING
176/270
September 2000
6.9 2 or 8 Mbit/s + auxiliary 2 Mbit/s tributary interface unit (TIU) board

TYPE TIU-F6
ALLOWABLE BIT RATES 2 Mbit/s or 8 Mbit/s + auxiliary 2 Mbit/s
6.9.1 Functions
The TIU-F6 (Tributary Interface Unit) board is used in a relay (repeater) station, to drop and insert the first 2 Mbit/s or 8 Mbit/s tributary and/or the auxiliary 2 Mbit/s stream ( if there is one). The tributary cross connect function must be used to place the tributary subject to dropping and insertion in the first position so that it will be processed by the TIU-F6 board. The board handles the following functions: choice of port impedance (75 coaxial or 120 balanced) in the case of a 2 Mbit/s tributary or the auxiliary 2 Mbit/s stream (75 coaxial in the case of the 8 Mbit/s tributary), HDB3 HCMOS conversion at the 2 Mbit/s or 8 Mbit/s tributary and/or auxiliary 2 Mbit/s interfaces from/to outside the microwave link, timing signal recovery from the input signal.

Choice of port impedance (75 coaxial or 120 balanced) by strap (see Figure 68) for the 2 Mbit/s tributary and the auxiliary 2 Mbit/s stream (the printed circuit has markings indicating the appropriate strap positions for the required port impedances).
2 Mbit/s tributary, configurable 75 / 120 8 Mbit/s tributary 75 , port impedance only
Auxiliary 2 Mbit/s tributary 75 / 120
Figure 68 Location of the tributary impedance selection straps on the TIUF6 board

Installation parameters: Choice of TIU board operating in drop/insert mode via the menu: Installation parameters/Table/Tx/Rx Hardware configuration/Drop_Insert/Channel 1: choose from the pulldown list for the 2/8 Mbit/s + auxiliary 2 Mbit/s TIU board, Choice of port impedance for the main 2 Mbit/s and auxiliary 2 Mbit/s tributaries via the menu: Installation parameters/Table/Tx/Rx Hardware configuration/Line impedance/Channel 1: choose 75
September 2000
177/270
for the two tributaries,120 for the main 2 Mbit/s tributary and the auxiliary 2 Mbit/s stream, or 75 for the main 8 Mbit/s tributary and 120 for the auxiliary 2 Mbit/s stream (customized). Note: The 8 Mbit/s tributaries only offer port impedances of 75 unbalanced.
6.9.4 Maintenance
If the TIU fails, replace it with an identical model, making sure that you first configure the straps to select the port impedances for the 2 Mbit/s tributaries (see Figure 68).
23
24
TIU board zoom
22
6.9.6 Alarms
23
CONFIGURATION ERROR
24 UNIT MISSING
178/270
September 2000
6.10 Multiplexing/Demultiplexing and switching unit (MSU) board 3CC05691AAxx

6.10.1 Functions
The MSU (Multiplex & Switching Unit) board handles the following functions: in a terminal station: S multiplexingdemultiplexing of the main streams, service channel signals and any auxiliary 2 Mbit/s stream, measurement of the service quality (link BER on bits and blocks) according to the G.821 or G.826 standards, in a relay (repeater) station: S dropping and insertion of main tributaries and/or of the auxiliary tributary (if there is one), and/or of the service channel signals, errorfree (hitless) switching on reception between the different received channels (normal, standby), crossconnection of tributaries so that the order of the tributaries transmitted in the slots of the aggregate signal can be altered, monitoring of the incoming tributaries and generation of an alarm indication signal (AIS) in the event of a defect, generation of test pseudorandom bit patterns in place of a tributary, and counting of errors in the test pattern received, insertion into the aggregate signal of the link identification code so that, on reception, the origin of each aggregate signal can be located, scrambling of the aggregate signal to be transmitted, and unscrambling of the aggregate signal received, measurement of the service quality (hop BER on each received aggregate signals) according to the G.821 standards (or G.826 with the extended 946LUX12 or 946LUX11 version), local loopback of the aggregate signal and remote loopback of any tributary, control of switching for a hot standby system, optional protection of the ASIC circuits by means of the standby MSU board.
The MSU board has a microcontroller backing up the configuration of the link.

Installation parameters: Enable or do not enable protection by standby MSU: Installation parameters\MUX protection\with or without. Station configured as a terminal: Operational parameters: Choose the real data rate of the link using the menu: Operation parameters/Terminal/Bit rates/Normal channel bit rate: choice of the channel TIU bit rate (Important! The options are limited by the software key and by the type of TIU. Refer to section 2.1). Indicate the presence or absence of tributaries: Enable the tributaries that are active (actually used) in transmission and reception using the menu: Operation parameters\Terminal\Tributary connections\Transmit ports\Channel N and Operation parameters\Terminal\Tributary connections\Receive ports\Channel N : Choose active or inactive for all the tributaries, or use the customized option for a mix of active and inactive selections for each tributary on transmission and on reception. S Declare the tributaries not used, inactive in transmission and/or reception. Do not use a hardwired loopback between the inputs and the outputs, which can cause signal fault alarms to appear!
September 2000
179/270
Station configured as a repeater with tributary drop/insert: Operational parameters: Choose the real data rate of the link using the menu: Operation parameters/Repeater/Bit rates/Normal channel bit rate: choice of the channel TIU bit rate (Important! The options are limited by the software key and by the type of TIU. Refer to section 2.1). Indicate the presence or absence of tributaries: Enable the tributaries and/or the auxiliary 2 Mbit/s bit stream subject to drop/insert using the menus: Operation parameters\Repeater\Tributary connection\Transmit ports\Channel N and Operation parameters\Repeater\Tributary connection\Receive ports\Channel N. From the pulldown list, either choose the customized option or check the active box for the tributary or tributaries or the auxiliary bit stream inserted in transmission or dropped in reception. S The active tributaries are drawn in black and their numbers appear on a white background. The inactive tributaries are drawn in white and their numbers appear on a grey background. Tributary crossconnect: Operation parameters/Tributary crossconnect/Tributary crossconnect table. As required, select the standard configuration or set up the desired configuration by clicking on the intersections of the tributaries and slots in the MUX frame, then click OK; Choose alarm indication signal generation (AIS) in the absence of the tributary signal in transmit and then receive modes, using in the menus: Operation parameters\Terminal or Repeater\AIS configuration\Transmit ports\Channel N or Receive ports\Channel N: choose All insertions active or inactive for the tributary and the transmit or receive mode auxiliary bit stream in the events of problems affecting transmission of the signal on transmission or reception.
6.10.3 Indications and reset control

The indications on the MSU board comprise: four yellow LEDs mounted on the PCB indicating the receive channel used from backward to forward direction:
S S S S
LED n_1 : LED n_2 : LED n_3 : LED n_4 :
normal channel, standby channel, normal diversity channel, standby diversity channel;
a red LED on the front panel:
S S
which flashes on startup, which lights in the event of loss of synchronization, failure or absence of the MSU-standby MSU connecting ribbon cable.
The pushbutton next to the red LED on the edge of the PCB can be used to reset the board.
6.10.4 Maintenance and operation of a configuration with standby MSU

To avoid disrupting service in the case of a 1+1 configuration with MUX protection: switch the traffic from the normal channel to its standby MSU board by remote control, first disconnect the ribbon cable linking the MSU and standby MSU boards on the front panel, change the MSU board, wait for the red LED to light on the front of the new MSU board before reconnecting the ribbon cable linking the MSU and the standby MSU boards (it may take a minute and a half to reload the configuration), cancel the forced switching by remote control on the standby MSU board.
180/270
September 2000
6.10.5 Examples of zoom on the MSU board via the supervision function
34 36 30 31 32 33 35
38 37 40 39
MSU board zoom, 1+0 terminal 34 + 2 Mbit/s The 34 Mbit/s tributary is active, The auxiliary 2 Mbit/s is inactive
44 30 44 31 32 33 43
43
42
41
42
MSU board zoom, 1+0 repeater

30 31 32 33 34 36 35 40 41 39 37 38
8 x 2 Mbit/s + 2 Mbit/s Four 2 Mbit/s tributaries are active Four 2 Mbit/s tributaries are inactive The auxiliary 2 Mbit/s cannot be used in the configuration and is therefore inactive
44
43
42
45
30
32
31
33 34 36 37
Unprotected MSU board zoom, 1+1 terminal

38
16 x 2 Mbit/s + 2 Mbit/s
39
35 41 47 44 43 42
40 49 50
Twelve 2 Mbit/s tributaries are active Four 2 Mbit/s tributaries are inactive The auxiliary 2 Mbit/s is active
30 32
31
33 34 48 36 46 35 38 37 40 67 41 47 50 69 39 66 49 68
Protected MSU board zoom N+1 repeater with drop/insert capability 946LUX12 2/8 Mbit/s + 2 Mbit/s The 2 Mbit/s Tx and Rx tributaries of stream n_ 1 and the auxiliary 2 Mbit/s Tx and Rx streams are dropped/inserted from/on normal channel n_ 1
44
43
42
45
September 2000
181/270
6.10.6 Alarms
MESSAGE
TYPE URG alarm
MOST PROBABLE CAUSE AND CORRECTIVE ACTION Loss of signal detected at tributary level. Loss of input signal from tributary n_i or the auxiliary 2 Mbit/s. Check for presence of the signal and the tributary or 2 Mbit/s wiring. Incoming signal fault on tributary. Incompatibility between bit rate or encoding system at the tributary or the auxiliary 2 Mbit/s stream input and that allowed by the TIU board. Check the installation and operation configurations of the TIU board Insertion of an AIS on sending. Insertion of an AIS on transmission on tributary n_i or on the auxiliary 2 Mbit/s stream in the event of loss of input signal. Check for presence of the signal and the tributary or auxiliary stream wiring
TRIB.i or AUX 30 2MB: SIGNAL LOSS TRIB.i or AUX 31 2MB: UNEXPECTED
URG alarm
TRIB.i or AUX 32 2MB: TX AIS
URG alarm
TRIB.i RC or AUX 33 2MB RC: INSERTION MUX_DEMUX NORMAL ALARM
Insertion of a pseudorandom bit pattern. NURG Insertion of a pseudorandom bit pattern by remote control on tributary R_C n_i or on the auxiliary 2 Mbit/s stream (caution! the PF4 test meter from Wandel & Goltermann cannot be used to measure BER on the pattern) URG alarm Normal MUX/DEMUX alarm. The MSU module has failed. If the failure persists after resetting the module, replace it.
34
35 LOCAL LOOP
Local loopback. NURG Local baseband loopback by remote control from the aggregate to be R_C sent to the aggregate received at the input of transmitter N or X (see section 2.8) Configuration error (MSU module) Inconsistency between the installation parameters and the operation parameters. Check the configuration of the TIU board, connection of the tributaries and MUX protection. Otherwise replace the MSU module. General alarm (MSU module) If the alarm persists after resetting, replace the MSU module Module (MSU) absent or dialogue problem MSU module absent or no dialogue with the GSU board. If the MSU module is present, replace it (*) Priority switching request on high bit error ratio or loss of frame synchronization. The BER is greater than that producing a PSR or the frame received from normal channel N or standby channel X is out of sync. Loss of frame synchronization alarm. Loss of synchronization of the receive frame on normal channel N or standby channel X caused by a reception problem resulting in transmission of an AIS in receive mode. Check the frequency configuration of the RF channel and the received field level. Loss of channel identification code alarm. Receipt of an incorrect frame identification code on normal channel N, backup channel X, diversity channel N or diversity channel X. Check the configuration consistency of the codes transmitted and received. If OK, check the received field level (receipt of an interference signal).
36
CONFIGUR ATION ERROR
URG alarm
37
GENERAL ALARM
URG alarm URG alarm
38 UNIT MISSING
39 RX HIGH BER 49 RX X HIGH BER 40 RX LOSS OF FRAME 50 RX X LOSS OF FRAME
URG alarm
URG alarm
41 CHANNEL IDENTITY CODE
URG alarm
182/270
September 2000
N
MESSAGE
TYPE
TRIB.i RC or AUX 42 2MB RC: DIST. LOOP TRIB.i RC or AUX 43 2MB RC: BER MEAS.
Remote looping. NURG R_C Baseband mode loopback on tributary n_i or on the auxiliary 2 Mbit/s stream by remote control (see section 2.8) BER measurement. NURG Measurement of the bit error ratio on tributary n_i or the auxiliary R_C 2 Mbit/s stream by remote control (using the Analogue measurements application of the extended 946LUX11/12 programs) URG alarm Generation on an AIS on reception. Generation of an AIS on reception on channel n_i or the auxiliary 2 Mbit/s stream. Check the configuration and for presence of the transmit stream in the remote station. Relay AIS. An AIS has been generated in the relay. Problem on the tributaries transmitted directly between the two elements in the repeater station. Check the cable (ref : 3CC06688AAAA) and the configuration of the active and inactive tributaries in each of the two elements, and presence of the remote transmit mode stream.
TRIB.i or AUX 44 2MB: RX AIS.
45
REPEATER ACCESS
URG alarm
46
MUX_DEMUX MODE
Forced switching mode. NURG Selection by remote control of the transmit channel via the GSU board R_C (if the MUX protection option is implemented): forced manual switchover from the MSU board to the normal MUX or standby MUX. Forced switching mode. NURG Selection by remote control of the receive channel via the GSU board in R_C an N+1 configuration; indicates forced manual switchover of the MSU board to normal channel N, backup channel X, diversity channel N or backup diversity channel X. URG alarm URG alarm Protection MUX/DEMUX alarm. Failure of the standby MSU. Replace the board Priority switching request on high bit error ratio or loss of frame synchronization. The BER is greater than that producing a PSR or the frame received from diversity channel N or diversity channel X is out of sync. Loss of frame synchronization alarm. Loss of synchronization on the receive frame from diversity channel N or diversity channel X, caused by a receive mode problem resulting in transmission of an AIS on reception. Check the frequency configuration of the RF channel and the received field level.
47 SWITCHING MODE
48
MUX_DEMUX SPARE ALARM
66 HIGH BER DIV RX 68 HIGH BER DIV BACKUP RX 67 DIV RX LOSS OF FRAME 69 BACKUP DIV RX LOSS OF FRAME
URG alarm
6.10.7 Remote controls

The remote controls (see table below) can be used: for each active tributary bit rate and individually:
S S
to insert a pseudorandom bit pattern, to measure the BER on the pseudorandom bit pattern previously inserted using the Analogue measurements application of the extended 946LUX11/12 software,
September 2000
183/270
to set a up remote loopback on a tributary from the output of the MSU board to the TIU board to check out the radio link with the remote station;
to set up a local loopback of the aggregate signal at the MSU output to test the digital functions (I/O) in local mode and the link with the customer s equipment, S A local loopback disconnects the link and disrupts the supervision network by isolating the station. S If the link identification codes sent and received do not match, the CHANNEL IDENTIFICATION alarm is generated.
to force 1+1 or N+1 switchover in reception to the main channel or to the standby channel, to apply forced switching to the normal MUX or to the standby MUX (if multiplexer protection by a standby MSU board is provided). Effects of activation Insertion of a pseudorandom bit pattern on tributary N_ x (for tests) Measurement of the BER on tributary N_ x (using the above pseudorandom bit pattern, with extended 946LUX11/12 software) Remote loopback on tributary N_ x Insertion of a pseudorandom bit pattern on the auxiliary 2 Mbit/s stream Measurement of the BER on the auxiliary 2 Mbit/s stream (using the above pseudorandom bit pattern) Remote loopback on the auxiliary 2 Mbit/s stream Local loopback of the aggregate signal at the MSU output (test of the digital functions (I/O) in local mode and of the link with the customer s equipment). In the remote station: Remote control rejected Forces N+1 configuration switchover to main receiver N. In the remote station: Automatic disabling after five minutes. Forces N+1 configuration switchover to backup receiver X. In the remote station: Automatic disabling after five minutes. Forces N+1 configuration switchover to the channel N diversity receiver. In the remote station: Automatic disabling after five minutes. Forces N+1 configuration switchover to backup diversity receiver X In the remote station: Automatic disabling after five minutes. Forces switchover to normal MUX (if MUX protection implemented). In the remote station: Automatic disabling after five minutes Forces switchover to standby MUX (if MUX protection implemented). In the remote station: Automatic disabling after five minutes.
Remote control activation/deactivation labels TRIB. x [Start]/[End] : pseudo rand. seq. ins.valid./inhib. TRIB. x [Start]/[End] : BER measure validated/inhibited TRIB. x [Start]/[End] : distant loop validated/inhibited AUX. 2Mbit/s [Start]/[End] : pseudo rand. seq. ins.valid./inhib. AUX. 2Mbit/s [Start]/[End] : BER measure validated/inhibited AUX. 2Mbit/s [Start]/[End] : distant loop validated/inhibited FRAME [Start]/[End] : local loop validated/inhibited
MAN. MODE [Start]/[End] : manual lockout validated/inhibited Rx X [Start]/[End] : manual switching validated/inhibited Rx DIV. [Start]/[End] : manual switching validated/inhibited Rx X DIV. [Start]/[End] : manual switching validated/inhibited MUX/DEMUX [Start]/[End] : normal lockout validated/inhibited MUX/DEMUX [Start]/[End] : stand by switching validated/inhibited
184/270
September 2000
6.11 Standby MSU board 3CC06201AAxx

6.11.1 Functions
The standby MSU board provides backup for the main MSU boards multiplexing/demultiplexing function: it receives its configuration from the main MSU via the front panel ribbon cable, it replaces the main MSU if it fails, to route the multiplexed streams in both transmission directions (failure of interface circuits, of ASIC, etc), if it is no longer linked to the main MSU board, its operation is limited:
S S S
if the hop is disconnected, the link remains permanently cut, if the 48 V power supply is cut off, the link cannot be restarted, no further communication with the GSU and the supervision function. S It is vital never to leave a station operating with just a standby MSU board. This is because the standby MSU board has no microcontroller. Do not remove the failed main MSU board until it is replaced by a spare MSU board.

The standby MSU boards installation parameters\Tables\MUX protection\with. configuration is set up using the menu Installation
6.11.3 Indications
The indications on the MSU board comprise just one red LED on the front panel. This LED: flashes on startup, lights in the event of loss of synchronization, failure or absence of the MSUstandby MSU connecting ribbon cable.
6.11.4 Maintenance
To avoid a service shutdown: switch traffic to the normal MSU board by remote control, first disconnect the MSUstandby MSU ribbon cable at the front panel, change the standby MSU board, reconnect the MSUstandby MSU ribbon cable, disable forced switching by remote control on the normal MSU board.
September 2000
185/270
6.12 Transmitter module TX

TYPE TX 1.35 - 1.53 GHz TX 1.35 - 1.53 GHz TX 1.7 - 2.1 GHz TX 1.9 - 2.3 GHz TX 2.3 - 2.7 GHz TX 7.1 - 8.5 GHz TX 7.1 - 8.5 GHz MODULATION 4 QAM 16 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 16 QAM REFERENCE 3CC 08715 AAxx 3CC 08776 AAxx 3CC 05696 AAxx 3CC 05697 AAxx 3CC 05698 AAxx 3CC 05702 AAxx 3CC 08440 AAxx
TYPICAL RF POWER AT TRANSMITTER OUTPUT 33.5 dBm 30.5 dBm 30.5 dBm 30.5 dBm 30.5 dBm 27.5 dBm 24.5 dBm
6.12.1 Functions
The transmitters differ only by the RF block for a particular type of modulation. They handle: the following digital functions in baseband mode: differential encoding, insertion of the error correcting code, symbol encoding, digital filtering to comply with the transmitted spectrum mask requirements; digitalto analogue conversion, the following analogue baseband functions: harmonic elimination filtering, switchable by relay according to bit rate, quadrature adjustment, balance adjustment and residual unmodulated carrier cancellation, the following RF functions: modulator, power amplifier, synthesized local oscillator in 10 kHz steps providing frequency agility of replacements. The transmitter receives its configuration from the associated receiver. If the receiver fails, it continues to operate. When a replacement receiver is inserted, operation of the transmitter is interrupted for the time it takes to load the receiver s configuration.

Software configuration of the transmit module, TX, lets you: enable the frequency band via the menu: Installation parameters\Tables\Frequency band, choose the frequency via the menu: Operational parameters\Terminal\Radio configuration\Transmit frequency\Channel 1 or Channel X.
Caution! Configuration is possible only if the associated receive module (Rx) is present.
6.12.3 Indications
The Tx module front panel has a red LED which flashes during initialization and lights to indicate a failure or an alarm condition.
6.12.4 Maintenance
In the event of a failure affecting a transmitter function, replace it with a spare module operating in the same subband.
186/270
September 2000
6.12.5 TX transmitter alarms

Channel 1 transmitter zoom

5 4 9 6
6.12.6 Alarms
N MESSAGE TYPE MOST PROBABLE CAUSE AND CORRECTIVE ACTION Transmit synthesizer alarm. Incompatibility between the transmit frequency value requested and the frequency that can be provided by the RF TX synthesized LO of channel 1 or X; check the transmit frequency, the subband of the LO and the duplex separation. Otherwise change the transmitter
TX SYNTHESIZER
URG alarm
5 POWER MODE
Amplifier mode. NURG R_C Cutting of the power transmitted by the channel 1 or X amplifier by remote control URG alarm Transmit power level alarm. Drop in the output power of the channel 1 or X transmit amplifier; check that there is no remote control for cutting off the transmitted power; otherwise replace the transmitter Configuration error (TX module) Inconsistency between the choice of frequency requested on installation and the frequency band of the channel 1 or X transmitter module. Check the transmitter s installation and operational configurations. Otherwise change the channel 1 or channel X TX module (the transmitter receives its configuration from the receiver) General alarm. (TX module) Replace the transmitter 1 or transmitter X module Module (TX) absent or dialogue problem.. Transmitter 1 or X absent, or no dialogue with the GSU board. If the TX module is present, replace it (*)
6 OUTPUT POWER
CONFIGURATION ERROR
URG alarm
GENERAL ALARM
URG alarm URG alarm
9 UNIT MISSING
(*) Note: if this alarm is indicated on all the modules, reset or change the GSU board.
6.12.7 Remote control

Remote control activation/deactivation labels AMPLIFIER [Start]/[End] : Power Off/ On Effects of activation Cuts off the power transmitted by channel 1 or channel X. In remote station mode: Automatic disabling after five minutes
September 2000
187/270
6.13 Receiver module RX

TYPE RX 1.35 - 1.53 GHz RX 1.35 - 1.53 GHz RX 1.7 - 2.1 GHz RX 1.9 - 2.3 GHz RX 2.3 - 2.7 GHz RX 7.1 - 8.5 GHz RX 7.1 - 8.5 GHz
MODULATION 4 QAM 16 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 4 QAM 16 QAM
REFERENCE 3CC 08962 AAxx 3CC 08714 AAxx 3CC 05699 AAxx 3CC 05700 AAxx 3CC 05701 AAxx 3CC 08439 AAxx 3CC 08941 AAxx
6.13.1 Functions
The receivers differ only by the RF block for a particular type of modulation. They handle: the radio frequency functions: lownoise amplification, demodulation and generation of transposition frequency by a synthesized local oscillator in frequency steps of 10 kHz providing frequency agility within the passband of the receive filter if the width of the received spectrum is sufficiently narrow, direct demodulation of the RF carrier to output two signal streams P and Q to the baseband processing section after filtering, the baseband part which combines:
S S
analogue functions (automatic gain control, analoguedigital conversion after filtering matched to the bit rate and amplification), digital functions: digital filtering after compensation for transmission defects, equalization regeneration of the signal with or without error correcting decoder, generation of the switching request and quality measurement signals (bit error ratio, received signal strength).
The Rx receivers have a microcontroller backing up the configuration of the link.

Software configuration of the receiver module RX lets you: enable the frequency band via the menu: Installation parameters\Tables\Frequency band (the frequency band is enabled by the software key SKU), choose the frequency using the menu: Operation parameters\Terminal\Radio configuration\Receive frequency\Channel N or channel X.
6.13.3 Indications
The receiver module (RX) front panel has a red LED which flashes during a reset and lights to indicate a failure or alarm condition, and the printed circuit has three red LEDs indicating: a carrier alarm, a receive power alarm, a synthesizer alarm.
6.13.4 Maintenance
Use remote control to switch over to the other channel (if possible) to avoid unwanted switching attempts when replacing a failed RX module.
188/270
September 2000
When a replacement RX receiver module is inserted while the associated TX module is operating, transmission will be interrupted while the RX module reloads the configurations (takes about 90 seconds).
6.13.5 RX receiver alarms
21
19 20 15 14
Channel 1 receiver zoom
10 18 17 16 13 12 11
6.13.6 Alarms
N MESSAGE TYPE MOST PROBABLE CAUSE AND CORRECTIVE ACTION Received field alarm. Received field alarm on normal channel N, standby channel X, diversity channel N or standby diversity channel X: check the receive frequency of the equipment, the continuity of the receive subsystem and then of the remote transmit subsystem. If OK, change the failed module or modules. Propagation alarm. The field received by normal channel N, standby channel X, diversity channel N or standby diversity channel X is below the threshold defined in the menu Operation parameters\Thresholds\Propagation (see section 6.13.6.1) Early switching request on received field or bit error ratio. The BER on normal channel N or diversity channel N is greater than the value defined in the menu Operation parameters\Thresholds\ Switching for the ESR threshold (see section 6.13.6.2) Early switching request on received field or bit error ratio. The BER on standby channel X or standby diversity channel X is greater than the value defined in the menu Operation parameters\ Thresholds\Switching for the ESR threshold (see section 6.13.6.2) Quality switching request on low bit error ratio.. The BER on normal channel N or diversity channel N is greater than the value defined in the menu Operation parameters\Thresholds\ Switching for the SR threshold (see section 6.13.6.3) Quality switching request on low bit error ratio The BER on standby channel X or standby diversity channel X is greater than the value defined in the menu Operation parameters\ Thresholds\Switching for the SR threshold (see section 6.13.6.3) Alarm on frequency difference between transmission and reception. Check the frequency of the channel N or standby channel X transmitter and that of the normal channel N, standby channel X, diversity channel N or standby diversity channel X receiver.
10 RECEIVE POWER
URG alarm
11 PROPAGATION
URG alarm
12 ESR
URG alarm
12 Rx X ESR
URG alarm
13 SR
URG alarm
13 Rx X SR
URG alarm
14
FREQUENCY SHIFT
URG alarm
September 2000
189/270
MESSAGE
TYPE

15
RX SYNTHESIZER
URG alarm
Receive synthesizer alarm. Incompatibility between the receive frequency value requested and the value that can be supported by the RF RX synthesized LO of normal channel N, standby channel X, diversity channel N or standby diversity channel X; check the receive frequency and subband of the LO. Otherwise change the receiver. Carrier unlocked or loss of signal on demodulator. No signal at the input of normal channel N, standby channel X, diversity channel N or standby diversity channel X. Check the frequency of the normal channel N or standby channel X transmitter and the bit rates of the equipment in both stations.
16
CARRIER UNLOCKED
URG alarm
17 FEC INHIBITION
Forward error correction disabled. NURG Forward error correction disabled by remote control for normal channel R_C N, standby channel X, diversity channel N or standby diversity channel X. Receive equalizer disabled. NURG R_C Receive equalizer disabled by remote control for normal channel N, standby channel X, diversity channel N or standby diversity channel X. URG alarm General alarm (RX module) Replace the receiver on normal channel N, standby channel X, diversity channel N or standby channel diversity channel X. Configuration error (RX module) Inconsistency between the choice of frequency requested on installation and the frequency band of the receiver module on normal channel N, standby channel X, diversity channel N or standby diversity channel X. Check the receiver s installation and operational configurations. If correct, change the RX module on normal channel N, standby channel X, diversity channel N or standby diversity channel X (switch over by remote control to the other channel to avoid unwanted switching attempts when replacing the receiver module). Transmission is cut off while the receiver s configuration is being reloaded. Module (RX) absent or dialogue problem. The receiver of normal channel N, standby channel X, diversity channel N or standby diversity channel X is absent, or there is no dialogue with the GSU board. If the RX module is present, replace it (*)
EQUALIZER 18 INHIBITED
19 GENERAL ALARM
20
CONFIGURATION ERROR
URG alarm
21
MODULE MISSING
URG alarm
(*) Note: If this alarm is indicated on all the modules, reset or change the GSU board. 6.13.6.1 Propagation alarm This alarm appears when the received power is below the threshold defined in Operation parameters\Thresholds\Propagation. 1) Open the radio transmission parameters application and read the received power value. 2) If the power is compatible with the link budget, check that the nominal power and threshold declared in the menu Thresholds\Propagation of the Operation parameters application are correct (see section 4.5.3), make the necessary corrections and check that the alarm disappears. 3) Otherwise change to local supervision mode to check remote station B, if this is possible:
check the received power at B,
190/270
September 2000
S
if this differs significantly from that obtained at A, check that the power at B has not been cut off by a remote control (duration five minutes), otherwise the remote transmitter has probably failed, if the powers differ only slightly, it may be that there is: a pointing error in one of the antennas (check the AGC voltages): repoint the antenna and check that the alarm disappears, or abnormal conditions are impairing propagation: presence of a sheet of water or of waterlogged ground on the path of the link, reflections from one or more layers of the atmosphere arising from abnormal stratification of the atmosphere, which is very common in the tropical climates, a natural screen or construction heavily obstructing the first Fresnel ellipsod, rainstorm, etc.
4) Remember to turn off local supervision. 6.13.6.2 ESR alarm If only the ESR alarm indicator is lit, check the level in dBm of the alarms threshold: its level should be below the propagation threshold compatible with the bit rate and modulation scheme used in the equipment; make any necessary adjustments via the menu Operation parameters\Thresholds\Switching thresholds. 6.13.6.3 ESR, SR, PSR, carrier misaligned and propagation alarms When propagation and performance alarms appear at the same time, there may be: a receive frequency problem in station A, or a transmit frequency problem in the remote station B, or a problem with transmission bandwidth (bit rate not the same in the two stations). Run the checks and make the necessary corrections in station A. Check the equivalent elements of the remote equipment, changing to local supervision mode when possible (there may be an EF: Equipment failure in the remote equipment which prevents the remote station being displayed). or abnormally poor propagation conditions, or an antenna pointing error, or, a failure of the remote transmitter.
It will be probably be necessary to visit the remote equipment to continue with the diagnostic procedure.

Remote control activation/deactivation labels FEC [Start]/[End] : inhibition/validation Effects of activation Forward error correction disabled or reenabled on normal channel N, standby channel X, diversity channel N or standby diversity channel X Receive equalizer disabled or reenabled on normal channel N, standby channel X, diversity channel N or standby diversity channel X.
EQUALIZER [Start]/[End] : inhibition/validation
These remote controls in the current screen are used in installation and maintenance operations.
September 2000
191/270
6.14 Branching filters

TYPE Branching filters Branching filters Branching filters Branching filters Branching filters
FREQUENCY BAND 1.35 1.53 GHz 1.7 2.3 GHz 2.1 2.7 GHz 7.1 7.7 GHz 7.7 8.5 GHz
REFERENCE 3CC 05770 AAAA 3CC 05771 AAAA 3CC 05764 AAAA 3CC 05772 AAAA 3CC 05773 AAAA
A branching connection comprises duplexed filters and circulators, in quantities dependent on the configuration. It separates the RF signal sent to the antenna from the received signal. It also includes RF switching and the receive coupler required by the Hot Standby function when this configuration is selected. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS FREQUENCY BAND 1.35 1.53 GHz 1.7 2.3 GHz 2.1 2.7 GHz 7.1 7.7 GHz 7.7 8.5 GHz OPERATION 6 resonators 6 resonators 6 resonators 6 resonant cavities 6 resonant cavities 25 MHz 30 MHz TRANSMIT BAND 15 MHz RECEIVE BAND 15 MHz
The ports are of the following types: UBR 84 in the 7 and 8 GHz bands, female SMA in the 1.5 and 2 GHz bands.
192/270
September 2000
6.15 ESC 2_3 service channel board 3CC05708ABxx

6.15.1 Functions
The ESC 2_3 (Engineering Service Channel) board provides drop and insert capability for two service channels in the aggregate. The first of these channels is a telephone channel with selective calling and the second must be customized by the use of one of the five daughter boards designated ESC_1 to ESC_5. The board can be inserted in the ESC23 position, ESC2 being the first telephone channel (see Figures 64 and 65) available at the top of the ETSI rack on the equipment control panel (Figure 63). The board can also be installed in the ESC45 position if the ESC23 position is already occupied by another ESC 2_3 board, in which case ESC4 will be a second telephone channel (if ESC4 and ESC5 exist, that is, with configurations having a total bit rate greater than 2x2 Mbit/s). Note : In a station, an ESC 2_3 board should be present in each of the cabinets which are linked by an analogue link or connected to a telephone handset..

This is possible only if the station is configured as a terminal or repeater with an ESC board. 6.15.2.1 ESC 2_3 board in the ESC23 position. Installation parameters: If necessary, define ESC3 via the menu: Installation parameters\Tables\ESC definition\ESC 3, to specify the daughter board used. Operation parameters: Assign a threedigit telephone number to the station via the menu Operation parameters\Terminal or Repeater\Station number (for each ESC with selective calling). Warning! Do not use numbers 001 to 010 and x00 (1 p x p 9). 00 is for a general call to all stations. In the case of a relay station with multiple network elements equipped with ESC 2_3 boards, just one telephone handset is enough. The other telephones can be eliminated by checking the Inhibition box in the menu Operation parameters\Terminal or Repeater with ESC\Station number. 6.15.2.2 ESC 2_3 board in ESC45 position Installation parameters: Declare the ESC extension board via the menu: Installation parameters\Tables\Additional boards\ESC extension\present. Define the board via the menu: Installation parameters\Tables\ESC definition\2wire audio. If necessary, define ESC5 via the menu: Installation parameters\Tables\ESC definition\ESC 5 to specify the daughter board used. Operation parameters: Assign a threedigit telephone number to the station via the menu: Operation parameters\Terminal or Repeater\Station number (for each ESC with selective calling). Warning! Do not use numbers 001 to 010 and x00 (1 p x p 9). 00 is for a general call to all stations.

Pushbutton S103: Resets the software on the ESC 2_3 board.
September 2000
193/270
Switches on the ESC 2_3 board: SWITCH POSITION SWITCH FUNCTION

S101, S102 S105, S106 S104 *
Audio input level of ESC2 (or ESC4 *) Audio output level of ESC2 (or ESC4 *) E+M signalling on ESC2 (or ESC4 *)
-13 dBm 0 dBm Active
0 dBm +4 dBm Inactive
In the case of an ESC 2_3 board installed in the ESC45 position.
S105 S106
S101 S102
S104
Figure 69 Locations of switches on the ESC 2_3 board (3CC05708AAAA)
Switches on the 3 Tx/Rx backplane mother board, near connectors J113 and J129 of the ESC23 and ESC45 positions (see Figure 35) : BOARD POSITION ESC23 SWITCH S106, S107, S108, S109 S110, S111, S112, S113 Switch setting Meaning Board absent Switch setting Meaning Board present
ESC45
Board absent
Board present
If a hardware configuration error is committed with the ESC 2_3 or ESC 4_5 board presence switches on the 3 Tx/Rx backplane mother board, the corresponding ESCs will be scrambled by noise.
194/270
September 2000
6.15.4 Maintenance
If the ESC 2_3 board fails, replace it with a spare board after first configuring it the same.
6.15.5 Zoom onto the ESC 2_3 board using the supervision function
ESC 2_3 ESC board zoom

25 26 27
6.15.6 Alarms
N MESSAGE TYPE MOST PROBABLE CAUSE AND CORRECTIVE ACTION Configuration error. (ESC 2_3 or ESC 4_5 module) Inconsistency between the daughter board installed and the configuration declared on installing and defining service channels 2 & 3 or 4 & 5. Check the physical existence and the installation and operation configurations of the ESC daughter board (see sections 4.4.1 & 4.5.1). Otherwise change the daughter board General alarm. Replace the ESC 2_3 board Module missing or dialogue problem. ESC 2_3 module missing or no dialogue with the GSU board. If the ESC 2_3 module is present, replace it (*)
25
CONFIGURATION ERROR
URG alarm
26 GENERAL ALARM
URG alarm URG alarm
27 UNIT MISSING
September 2000
195/270
6.16 ESC 4_5 service channel board 3CC05709AAxx

6.16.1 Functions
This optional ESC 4_5 (Engineering Service Channel) board comprises a mother board with two daughter boards chosen from five different types (ESC_1 to ESC_5). It provides drop and insert capability for two ESCs in the aggregate, and can be installed only in the ESC45 position in the racks 3 Tx/Rx backplane. It is used only with configurations having a data rate higher than 2x2 Mbit/s (ESC4 and ESC5 in existence).

This is possible only if the station is configured as a terminal or repeater with ESC. Installation parameters: Declare the board via the menu: Installation parameters\Tables\Additional boards\ESC extension\ present. Define ESC4 and ESC5 via the menus: Installation parameters\Tables\ESC definition\ESC 4 and Installation parameters\Tables\ESC definition\ESC 5, to specify the daughter board used in each position.

Set the switches on the daughter boards according to the required configuration. Four switches mounted on the 3 Tx/Rx backplane mother board, near connector J129 of the ESC45 position: BOARD POSITION SWITCH Switch position Meaning Switch position Meaning
ESC 4_5
S110, S111, S112, S113
Board absent
Board present
If a hardware configuration error is committed with the switches (ESC 4_5 board presence) on the 3 Tx/Rx backplane mother board, the corresponding service channels will be scrambled by noise.
6.16.4 Maintenance
In the event of a failure of the ESC 4_5 board, replace it with a spare board, after first configuring it the same.
6.16.5 ESC 4_5 board alarms
25
26
27
ESC 4_5 ESC board zoom
196/270
September 2000
6.16.6 Alarms
MESSAGE
TYPE
MOST PROBABLE CAUSE AND CORRECTIVE ACTION Configuration error. (on the ESC 4_5 module) Inconsistency between the (or both) daughter board(s) installed and the configuration declared on installation, and the definition of engineering service channels 4 & 5. Check the hardware existence and installation configuration of the (or both) ESC daughter board(s) (see sections 4.4.1 & 4.5.1). Otherwise change the (or both) daughter board(s). General alarm. (on the ESC 4_5 module) Replace the ESC 4_5 module. Module (ESC 4_5) absent or dialogue problem. ESC 4_5 module absent or no dialogue with the GSU board. If the ESC 4_5 module is present, replace it (*)
25
CONFIGURATION ERROR
URG alarm
26 GENERAL ALARM
URG alarm URG alarm
27 UNIT MISSING
September 2000
197/270
6.17 ESC_1 to ESC_5 service channel daughter boards

6.17.1 Functions
These boards are mounted on the ESC 2_3 engineering service channel board (like ESC N_3) or on the ESC 4_5 service channel board (like ESC N_4 and/or N_5). The table below summarizes the options provided by the service channels according to the type of daughter board used by ESC N_ 3 to N_ 5. TYPE ESC_1 ESC_2 ESC_3 ESC_4 ESC_5 TYPE OF CHANNEL 64 kbit/s service channel, pointtopoint, G.703 codirectional interface Fourwire, 600 analogue service channel, A law, pointtopoint or pointtomultipoint (threeway coupling) 64 kbit/s pointtopoint service channel, V11 or V28 Asynchronous digital service channel (9.6 kbit/s or 2 x 4.8 kbit/s max.) V.11, pointtopoint or pointtomultipoint (threeway coupler) Asynchronous digital service channel (9.6 kbit/s or 2 x 4,8 kbit/s max.) V.28, pointtopoint or pointtomultipoint (threeway coupler) REFERENCE 3CC 05710 AAxx 3CC 05711 AAxx 3CC 05712 AAxx 3CC 05713 AAxx 3CC 06482 AAxx
6.17.2 Software configuration of the ESC_1 to 5 service channel daughter boards

Define each service channel via the menu: Installation parameters\Tables\ESC definition\ESC N.
6.17.3 Service channel daughter board: ESC_1

This engineering service channel board is optional, and supports a pointtopoint codirectional G.703 64 kbit/s service channel. HARDWARE CONFIGURATION Switch positions and settings:
S201
S202
Locations of switches on the ESC_1 board (3CC05710AAxx) (seen from below)
198/270
September 2000
ESC_1 3CC 05710 AAAA

SWITCH POSITION
SWITCH FUNCTION Channel 2 byte (Normal use) Channel 1 byte (Normal use) Channel 2 bit (Special use) Channel 1 bit (Special use)
S201 S202
Synchronization Synchronization
Note: The soldered links (swaps) are set up in the factory and must not be modified.

This service channel board is optional, and supports a pointtopoint or pointtomultipoint analogue service channel with selective calling. HARDWARE CONFIGURATION Switch positions and settings:
S501
S502
S503
S504
Locations of switches on the ESC_2 board (3CC05711AAxx) (seen from below) The underside of the ESC_2 board, with the setting components, can be accessed even when the board is installed. ESC_2 3CC 05711 AAAA SWITCH FUNCTION S501 S502 S503 S504 Audio output level of the service channel E+M signalling Audio input level of the service channel Service channel type 0 dBm Active -13 dBm Pointtopoint +4 dBm Inactive 0 dBm Pointtomultipoint SWITCH POSITION
September 2000
199/270

The ESC_3 engineering service channel board is optional, and supports a pointtopoint V.11 or V.28 64 kbit/s service channel. HARDWARE CONFIGURATION Switch positions and settings:
Locations of switches on the ESC_3 board (3CC05712AAxx) (seen from below) The underside of the ESC_3 board, with the setting components, can be accessed even when the board is installed. ESC_3 3CC 05712 AAAA SWITCH FUNCTION S201, S203, S205, S208, S210, S212, S214, S215, S216, S220, S222 S202, S204, S209, S211, S213, S217, S218, S219, S221, S223 S206 S207 SWITCH POSITION
Type of operator interface at the ports of terminal 1 Type of operator interface at the ports of terminal 2 Changeover of the transmitted clock Changeover of the received clock
V28
V11
V28
V11
Changeover Changeover
No changeover No changeover
200/270
September 2000

The ESC_4 service channel board is optional and supports V.11 asynchronous digital service channels: either one service channel at up to 9.6 kbit/s, designated PP (pointtopoint) (PP1) or PM (pointtomultipoint) (PM1), or two service channels at up to 4.8 kbit/s:
S S
the first channel can be PP (pointtopoint) (PP1), or PM (pointtomultipoint) (PM1), the second channel must be PP (pointtopoint) (PP2).
HARDWARE CONFIGURATION Switch positions and settings:
S101
S102
Locations of switches on the ESC_4 board (3CC05713AAxx) (seen from below) The underside of the ESC_4 board, with the setting components, can be accessed even when the board is installed. ESC_4 3CC 05713 AAAA SWITCH FUNCTION S101 S102 Type of link Bit rate at the V11 interface Pointtopoint Pointtomultipoint SWITCH POSITION
2 x 4.8 kbit/s max. 1 x 9.6 kbit/s max.
September 2000
201/270

The ESC_5 engineering service channel board is optional, and supports V.28 asynchronous digital service channels: either one service channel at up to 9.6 kbit/s, designated PP (pointtopoint) (PP1) or PM (pointtomultipoint) (PM1), or two service channels at up to 4.8 kbit/s:
S S
the first channel can be PP (pointtopoint) (PP1), or PM (pointtomultipoint) (PM1), the second channel is PP (pointtopoint) (PP2).
HARDWARE CONFIGURATION Switch positions and settings:
S101
S102
Locations of switches on the ESC_5 board (3CC06482AAxx) (seen from below) The underside of the ESC_5 board, with the setting components, can be accessed even when the board is installed. SWITCH SWITCH S101 S102 ESC_5 3CC 06482 AAAA FUNCTION Type of link Bit rate at the V28 interface Pointtopoint Pointtomultipoint POSITION OF THE SWITCH
2 x 4.8 kbit/s max. 1 x 9.6 kbit/s max.
Comment: The soldered links (swaps) are set in the factory and cannot be modified.
202/270
September 2000
6.18 General supervision unit GSU board 3CC05690ABxx

6.18.1 Functions
The general supervision unit (GSU) board handles the following functions: configuration, monitoring and storage of information from or for the boards of the equipment forming the network element, including the events occurring and stored in the performance monitoring counter memory, operator interface via the port F and the craft terminal (CT), network management interface (manages ESC 1 serving as the supervision channel), network management, compatible with the Alcatel 1300 system, management of the environment via insulated loops (transmission of remote indication (TS), housekeeping alarm and of remote control (TC) loops out, TS signals in via equipment internal alarm loops (URG, NURG, ATT)), port management via rQ2 interface bus (NMS1, NMS2) locally linking the network elements to the supervision system, management of the software key SKU (absence of a key causes an alarm to be generated and the terminal to be shut down after 24 hours).
On the GSU board, a 68360 microcontroller manages the equipment. The programs are stored in flash memory mounted on a SIMM card. This also includes DRAM memory for downloading new versions of the software. The GSU board has a second connector providing a memory expansion capability (for future applications). The GSU board includes an event memory storing supervisory passwords, the last 300 events detected, and so on. This information can be viewed using the event memory application of the extended 946LUX11 and 946LUX12 programs. The GSU board has a microcontroller backing up the configuration of the link. A failure of the GSU board will disable network management dialogue. After replacing the GSU board, the new GSU board recovers the configuration from the microcontrollers on the RX 1 and MSU 1 modules. The 16 TS/TC extension board (optional) can be used to increase the supervisory capabilities by increasing the number of equipment alarms, the number of housekeeping alarms and the number of remote controls.

6.18.2.1 Remote control labels Use the menu Operation parameters\Alarms\Remote control labels, then select the name of the remote control, modify it and confirm it for the change of name to be taken into account. 6.18.2.2 Enabling the remote control Enable the remote control via the path: Operation parameters\Alarms\Housekeeping alarms validation: choose criteria (inhibited, urgent, not urgent or status). 6.18.2.3 Housekeeping alarm labels From the menu: Operation configuration\Alarms\Housekeeping alarms labels, select the name of the equipment loop, modify it and confirm it to have it registered. 6.18.2.4 Enabling housekeeping alarms Enable the housekeeping alarms via the menu: Operation parameters\Alarms\Housekeeping alarms validation. Choose the criterion (inhibited, urgent, not urgent or status) for each. Warning! Housekeeping loop N_ 1 is dedicated to the internal fan alarm, and is not available.
September 2000
203/270

The distribution of these alarm loops on the pins of the TS/TC (GSU) user port is given in the table in section A.8.4., Appendix 8. Optionally, a daughter board with two WAGO connectors can be inserted into this connector to facilitate the wiring. You can modify the input configuration of the housekeeping loops (loop configured as normally open from the outset), by reversing the positions of the soldered links. The external alarms comprise dry loops that are normally open. Seven twoposition soldered links (swaps), located near to connector P103 on the GSU board (SW113, SW112, SW111, SW110, SW109, SW105 and SW103), each corresponding to one of the housekeeping alarms 2 to 8, can be used to convert each alarm loop into a normally closed loop by reversing the position of its swap (like the adjacent swap SW114 for fan alarm N_ 1) (see Figure 70). Loop type Normally open
RS input
Unenergized
RS input
Alarm condition
RS input Prewired swap
Swap position
RS input
Normally closed
Change swap position : 1) cut strap 2) insert new strap

SW113 TS2 SW112 TS3 SW111 TS4
DO NOT CHANGE SW114 TS1
SW103 TS8 SW105 TS7 SW109 TS6 SW110 TS5
Figure 70 Installation of the swaps on the GSU board (3CC05690ABxx)
6.18.4 Indications, reset command

The GSU board has: a red LED on the front panel which flashes during a reset or selftest and remains on steady when the board has failed; a pushbutton S101 on the front panel for resetting the board software.
6.18.5 Maintenance
When the GSU board fails (alarm 51 active in the screen below), replace it with a spare GSU board on which the input configuration of the remote indication has already been set up the same.
204/270
September 2000
6.18.6 Environmental screen of the GSU board obtained using the supervision
51
52 53
GSU board
54
946LUX11
56 55 53 58 57 58
51
52 53
GSU board
54
946LUX12
55 53 58 56 58
6.18.7 Alarms
N MESSAGE TYPE URG alarm MOST PROBABLE CAUSE AND CORRECTIVE ACTION General alarm (GSU board). Replace the GSU module
51 GENERAL ALARM
52
HOUSEKEEPING 1
Active (fan) alarm. NURG Housekeeping alarm n_ 1: at least one of the two fans on the 3 Tx/Rx alarm backplane has failed. Change the fan or fans fixed above the backplane after first removing the power supply cable from P202 located at the top of the mother board. Active alarm. NURG alarm Alarms of the housekeeping dry loops 2 to 8 of the link: according to assignment of each loop NURG Remote control activated R_C Housekeeping TC n_1 in the active state. URG alarm Key not fitted. This alarm prevents any change of configuration or reconfiguration of the equipment. Check to see whether the software key is correctly fitted on the 9way Sub-D port J225 marked SKU on the backplane board). Key alarm or key modified. Alarm appearing when a key is changed, when the new key does not have the same characteristics as the previous one. Enable the new key by opening the Operation parameters application and by sending the configuration (File/Send). The key alarm should disappear.
53
ENVIRONMENT 2 to 8 ENVIRONMENT CTRL 1
54
55
SOFTWARE KEY MISSING
56
SOFTWARE KEY ALARM
URG alarm
September 2000
205/270
MESSAGE
TYPE

57
PROVISIONING REFUSED
URG alarm
Configuration rejected (in 946LUX11 software version; in 946LUX12 software version, a PR alarm to the right in the alarm summary line replaces it). The new key is incompatible with the equipment. Change the key, or reset the equipment Time before link disconnection. Period of time remaining to run in threehour multiples before the link is cut off in the event of a key alarm. Reinsert a compatible key and enable it (see above)
TERM. SHUT58 DOWN IN 24, 21, ..., 3 H
URG alarm

Remote control activation/deactivation labels RESTART EQT :Restart equipment Effects of the activation Remote reinitialization and restarting of the equipment Validation/inhibition of the environmental remote control command N_ 1
CONTROL 1 [Start]/[End] : Environment ctrl 1 validated/inhibited
6.18.9 Exchanging the battery

The GSU board has an event memory. A battery, inserted and clipped into an integrated circuit socket provides backup. This battery must be replaced every seven to ten years, when, after powering down, the event memory data is lost when power is restored. WARNING There is a danger of explosion if the battery is replaced incorrectly. Replace only with a battery of the same type: M4T28BR12SH1 Supplier: SGS Thomson Microelectronique. Observe all applicable national standards for scrapping used batteries. Do not throw them on the fire, do not recharge.
BATTERY
Figure 71 Location of the battery on the GSU board
206/270
September 2000
6.19 SIMM daughter board (2 Mb Flash memory / 2 Mb DRAM) 3CC06353Axxx

This memory board is installed in a connector on the GSU supervision board, and includes a 2 Mbyte Flash memory containing the application programs for the equipment used by the 68360 microcontroller on the GSU supervision board, and a DRAM memory into which new management programs are downloaded using the supervision functions Downloading option. The GSU board has another expansion slot for an additional SIMM daughter card if necessary. Note: The soldered links (swaps) on the SIMM card are factory set, and must not be modified.
September 2000
207/270
6.20 16 TS/TC board (optional) 3CC05705AAxx

6.20.1 Functions
The 16 TS/TC extension board (optional) can be used to increase the capabilities of the GSU board, by adding 16 equipment alarm indication outputs (TS), twelve housekeeping alarm TS inputs and four remote control (TC) outputs. It is installed in the top right part of the main ETSI racks bottom backplane supporting the power supplies of the first three channels, and is interconnected with port J209, marked TS/TC Optional board located in the bottom right corner of the 3 Tx/Rx backplane mother boards connection area. Each housekeeping alarm remote indication input can be configured as a normally open loop or normally closed loop at 0 V in the presence of an alarm condition. The alarms are wired via WAGO connectors: see section 6.20.9.

The presence of this board is declared using the menu: Installation parameters\Tables\Additional boards\TS/TC\ Present.

You can configure each housekeeping alarm remote indication as a normally open loop or normally closed loop (see section 6.20.8 and Figure 80).
6.20.4 Example of a zoom on the 16 TS/TC board via the supervision system
53 53
60
53
59
59
16 TS/TC board zoom
53 54 54
53
59
59
6.20.5 Alarms
N 53 MESSAGE HOUSEKEEPING 9 to 20 ENVIRONMENT CTRL 2 to 5 TYPE MOST PROBABLE CAUSE AND CORRECTIVE ACTION
Active alarm. NURG alarm Housekeeping alarms dry loops 9 to 20 of the link: according to assignment of each loop (see section 7.9) NURG Remote control activated. R_C Housekeeping remote control extension n_ 2 to 5 activated URG alarm URG alarm Activation of the corresponding alarm dry loop. Depending on the assignment of each alarm loop of the link (see section 7.9) Module (16 TS/TC) absent or dialogue problem. Module missing or no dialogue with the GSU board. If the 16 TS/TC module is present, replace it (*)
54
EQUIPMENT 59 ALARM 1 to 16
60 UNIT MISSING
208/270
September 2000
6.20.6 Configuring the remote controls

6.20.6.1 Remote control labels Use the menu Operation parameters\Alarms\Remote controls labels, then select the name of the remote control, modify it and confirm it for the change of name to be registered. 6.20.6.2 Enabling the remote controls Enable the remote controls using the path: Operation parameters\Alarms\Housekeeping alarms validation, then choose the criterion (inhibited, urgent, non urgent or status) for each. 6.20.6.3 Remote control You disable and enable housekeeping remote controls 1 to 4 via the menu AS&C remote controls.
6.20.7 Configuring the equipment alarm loops

These loops are available in the form of common, normally closed, normally open relay contacts (100 V, 0.5 A). 6.20.7.1 Definition Each of the 16 loops can be controlled by a synthesis of multiple alarms, defined in the screen below (the alarms are divided into five groups). Choose the equipment alarms which will activate each of the selected loops (up to 16), using the table shown below (Figure 72), via the menu: Operation parameters\Alarms\Equipment loops configuration\Loop 01 to Loop 16.
Figure 72 Example of equipment loop configuration screen 6.20.7.2 Enabling the equipment loops Choose the criterion (inhibited, urgent, non urgent or status by default) for each of the equipment loops, using the menu: Operation parameters\Alarms\Equipment loops configuration (see section 4.5.4).
September 2000
209/270
6.20.8 Configuring the environment (housekeeping) alarm loops

6.20.8.1 Definition From the menu: Operation parameters\Alarms\Housekeeping loops labels, select the name of the housekeeping loop, modify it and confirm it to have it registered. 6.20.8.2 Housekeeping alarms labels Confirm the housekeeping alarms via the menu: Operation parameters\Alarms\Housekeeping alarms validation. Choose the criterion (inhibited, urgent, non urgent or, by default, status) for each.
6.20.9 WAGO connector ports

See layout of terminal blocks and markings in Section A.8.4.3.
210/270
September 2000
6.21 Power supply module PSU 77096496

6.21.1 Functions
The PSU (Power Supply Unit) module supplies the various voltages needed by the hardware, from a primary DC voltage (from 20 V to 60 V) applied to connector J1 (or J2) at the top of the front panel. No test point is available on the input and output voltages. A PSU module in a main or extension rack backplane feeds one transmit/receive channel, while the fans, control panel and common boards are powered by all the PSUs (connected in parallel). One PSU module, placed in a diversity rack backplane, can power up to three diversity receivers, and a second module can be added for backup as an option. The power supplies are connected via a backplane connector in the ETSI racks.
6.21.2 Indications, ON/OFF switch and fuses

A green LED on the front panel comes on when the ON/OFF switch of the module is operated. An ON/OFF switch is mounted on the front panel. Two 10 A fuses (ref. F10H 250V) are located under the cover of the PSU to protect it against overloads.
6.21.3 Maintenance
The general alarm indication appears on the supervision screen to indicate a short circuit or the disappearance of an output voltage. Remove the PSU and check the state of the fuses. If a fuse is blown, replace it on a likeforlike basis, reinsert the PSU and operate the on/off switch. If this fails, replace the PSU module. Otherwise, trace the cause of the overload by removing the various modules and boards from the backplane, and returning them one after the other to isolate the failed unit.
6.21.4 Example of zoom on the PSU via the supervision system
29
Channel 1 PSU zoom

28
6.21.5 Alarms
N MESSAGE TYPE MOST PROBABLE CAUSE AND CORRECTIVE ACTION General alarm (PSU module) Use the Analogue measurements program to check the state of the PSU modules voltages. A short circuit can occur in a board or module receiving power. If at least one of the voltages is absent, replace the PSU for normal channel N, backup channel X, normal diversity channel N or backup diversity channel X. Module (PSU) absent or dialogue problem.. The PSU module for normal channel N, backup channel X, normal diversity channel N or backup diversity channel X is absent or there is no dialogue with the GSU board (*)
28
GENERAL ALARM
URG alarm
29 UNIT MISSING
URG alarm
September 2000
211/270
6.21.6 Replacing a power supply fuse

The power supply boards are protected by two glass cartridge fuses which snap into fuse holders. Access to these fuses is obtained by removing the screws from the boards cover (15 mm Torx wrench). The procedure below describes how to replace these fuses. It does not require the link to be disconnected, except in a 1+0 configuration. p p p p p p p p p p p p Open the door of the rack. Power down the PSU by its front panel switch. Disconnect the two cables linked to the front panel connectors of the PSU board. Remove the PSU board. Remove the fuses and check them with an ohmmeter. Remove the blown fuse or fuses. Replace the board. Reconnect the two front panel cables of the PSU board. Power up the PSU module. Check that there are no alarms. Otherwise, change the PSU. Close the door of the rack. The fuses MUST be replaced by fuses of the same type: F10H 250V
212/270
September 2000
6.22 N+1 logic and switching unit LSU board 3CC05706AAxx

6.22.1 Functions
The LSU (Logic & Switching Unit) board manages all the switching logic for the 1+1 configuration with occasional backup and for all configurations of type N+1 (1< N< 6). It is installed in the ETSI rack, in the last position on the right of the backplane for normal channels 1, 2 and backup channel X accommodating the MSU boards and the ESC 2_3 board. This board manages a secured order wire channel for dialogue with the remote logic system. Its two microcontrollers (master and slave) handle: management of the equipment, in conjunction with the GSU board:
S S S
applying and storing the configuration, accepting remote controls from the GSU board, notifying inventory, alarm or status information to the GSU board; accepting switching requests from the various transmitters/receivers, choosing the channel to be backed up according to a priority hierarchy established in configuration, sending the transfer command, in transmission and in reception;
management of the dialogue bus with the MSU board for controlling the switching system:
S S S
management of two order wire channels (for protection) for dialogue with the remote logic system, in each direction in the case of a relay station.
The initiative for declaring a change of state on the alarms rests with the LSU board, and the GSU board simply periodically tests for presence of the LSU board. When the operational configuration was set up, each channel was assigned a switching priority level (see section 4.5.1 Terminal and Repeater menus), the effect of which was, in the event of switching requests of equal gravity affecting two channels, to protect the one with the higher priority level. When a change of state is detected, the LSU board sends the GSU board all the alarms as organized in a table. In the event of a fault on the normal channel, backup channel X takes over. This channel may, if necessary, be made independent, by adding the subsystems described in section 2.3.5, apart from the LSU board which is part of the basic configuration.
6.22.2 Signalling, alarms and reset command

A red LED (DS101) on the top edge of the board flashes when the board is being reset (for example, on power up) and remains on steady to indicate a general LSU alarm (failure). Pushbutton S101 on the bottom edge of the board can be used to initiate a software reset of the board.
6.22.3 Maintenance
In the event of a board failure indicated by LED DS1 being on steady, replace the LSU board.
6.22.4 LSU board alarm
LSU board zoom

61 63
946LUX12
64 65
62
September 2000
213/270
N 61
MESSAGE CONFIGURATION ERROR
TYPE URG alarm URG alarm URG alarm URG alarm URG alarm

Configuration error. Check the configuration of the installation and operational parameters, and correct any faults General alarm (LSU board) Replace the failed LSU board. Module (LSU) absent or dialogue problem. LSU board absent or no dialogue with the GSU board (*) Alarm active. No dialogue with the MSU board for normal channel n_ 1 Alarm active. No dialogue with the MSU board for normal channel n_ 2
62 GENERAL ALARM 63 UNIT MISSING 64 ORDER WIRE 65 BACKUP ORDER WIRE
(*) Note :
If this alarm is present on all the modules, reset or change the GSU board.
214/270
September 2000
6.23 Software key SKU 3CC07619Axxx

6.23.1 Functions
Each key has two labels; one is the identification label, the other indicates the operational capabilities of the equipment: builtin mediation function (supervision): master or slave equipment, use or otherwise of a remote craft terminal (RCT) in a slave station (copy of the master station), maximum configuration of the number of channels (1+0 max. or n+1 max.), maximum operational bit rate supported by the terminal, in nx2 Mbit/s types (depending on the type of TIU board chosen see the table below), RF frequency band (possibly limited to a restricted part of the bandwidth). BIT RATES SUPPORTED 2x2 Mbit/s 4x2 Mbit/s 1x8 Mbit/s 2x8 Mbit/s 4x8 Mbit/s TIU-F1 rates + 8x2 Mbit/s 4x8 Mbit/s + 2 Mbit/s auxiliary BIT RATES ENABLED BY THE SOFTWARE KEY KEY 2 x 2 2x2 Mbit/s KEY 4 x 2 2x2 Mbit/s 4x2 Mbit/s 1x8 Mbit/s KEY 8 x 2 2x2 Mbit/s 4x2 Mbit/s 1x8 Mbit/s 2x8 Mbit/s 2x2 Mbit/s 4x2 Mbit/s 8x2 Mbit/s 1x8 Mbit/s 2x8 Mbit/s KEY 16 x 2 2x2 Mbit/s 4x2 Mbit/s 1x8 Mbit/s 2x8 Mbit/s 4x8 Mbit/s 2x2 Mbit/s 4x2 Mbit/s 8x2 Mbit/s 1x8 Mbit/s 2x8 Mbit/s 4x8 Mbit/s +2 Mbit/s auxil. 2x2 Mbit/s 4x2 Mbit/s 16x2 Mbit/s + 2 Mbit/s auxil. 1x8 Mbit/s 2x8 Mbit/s 4x8 Mbit/s + 2 Mbit/s auxil. 3x8 Mbit/s + 4x2 Mbit/s 34Mbit/s + 2Mbit/s auxil. 2 or 8 Mbit/s and/or 2 Mbit/s auxiliary in repeater mode
TYPE OF BOARD
TIU-F1
2x2 Mbit/s
2x2 Mbit/s 4x2 Mbit/s 1x8 Mbit/s
TIU-F2
TIU-F2 rates + 2x2 Mbit/s 3x8Mbit/s + 4x2Mbit/s 16x2 Mbit/s + 2 Mbit/s auxiliary TIU-F3
2x2 Mbit/s 4x2 Mbit/s 1x8 Mbit/s
2x2 Mbit/s 4x2 Mbit/s 8x2 Mbit/s 1x8 Mbit/s 2x8 Mbit/s
TIU-F5
34 Mbit/s + 2 Mbit/s auxiliary 2 Mbit/s or 8 Mbit/s and/or 2 Mbit/s auxiliary in repeater mode
2 or 8 Mbit/s and/or 2 Mbit/s auxiliary in repeater mode
2 or 8 Mbit/s and/or 2 Mbit/s auxiliary in repeater mode
TIU-F6
6.23.2 Configuration
The software key (SKU) is inserted into SKU connector J225 located to the right of the GSU board and at the top of the connection area of the 3 Tx/Rx backplane mother board in the main ETSI rack, and is secured by two thumbscrews. When a key is changed, the new key does not take effect until the operation parameters application has been opened and the key has been sent (see section 7.4 Changing the software key).
September 2000
215/270
6.24 3 Tx/Rx backplane fans

6.24.1 Fan power supply

The primary voltage (20 to 60 V) applied to input J1 of the PSU module is also diverted via adjacent connector J2 to power the fans mounted over the top part of the 3 Tx/Rx backplane. In configurations greater than 1+0, they are powered in parallel via the wiring from the PSU modules of two channels. Four cartridge fuses, F101 to F104 (F2H 250V) on the power supply board can be accessed at the top of the 3 Tx/Rx backplane (see Figure 73).
6.24.2 Changing a fan

The checking operations below are required when a fan alarm is indicated by the craft terminal (housekeeping alarm N_ 1). A view of the fan PSU board is given in Figure 73, in order to identify the items involved in these operations. This board is located over the top of 3 Tx/Rx backplane and it is protected by a metal cover which also protects the fans. p p p Check that all the cables are correctly connected to the fan power supply board and to the power supplies. Check that the cable linking P101 on the fan power supply board to the VENT connector (J208) on the 3 Tx/Rx backplane mother board is correctly connected. Check the four fuses (F101 to F104) on the fan power supply board, accessed via the protective cover. Change any fuses that have blown (ref F2H 250V).
If the alarm persists, change the failed fan as described below. p p p p p p p p p p Open the door of the rack. Do not disconnect the rack power supply. Identify the failed fan by checking the flows of air expelled from the top of the backplane. Disconnect the cable to P103 on the fan power supply board. Remove the protective cover from the fans using a 3 mm Allen key. Change the defective fans. Replace the protective cover. Reconnect the cable to P103 on the power supply board. Check that the fans are working. Check that the alarm has disappeared on the craft terminal.
216/270
September 2000
F101 F102 F103 F104
Figure 73 Fan power supply board
September 2000
P103
P101
217/270

September 2000
7 Changes of configuration
Changes to the transmission network may make it necessary to change equipment configurations in order to meet new requirements. The 9400 LX equipment will accommodate these changes either by altering only the software configuration of the equipment, or by physically modifying the equipment and its configuration. These changes may concern: the tributaries:
S S S S S
commissioning inactive tributaries (section 7.1), changing the impedance of a tributary (section 7.2) : changing from 75 { 120 , changing the bit rate (section 7.3), changing the software key (section 7.4), changing a TIU (section 7.5) ; inserting (or removing) an ESC board (section 7.6), inserting, deleting or changing a telephone number in a station (section 7.7), customizing the service channels (section 7.8) ; changing the remote indications loops (section 7.9). changing the loops of the optional 16 TS/TC board (section 7.10) ; adding multiplexer protection to a configuration (section 7.11), changing a 1+0 configuration to a 1+1 configuration (section 7.12), changing a 1+0 or 1+1 configuration to an N+1 configuration (section 7.13), converting a repeater to a repeater with tributary drop/insert (section 7.14), converting a repeater to a terminal (section 7.15), changing the frequency in the branching filter band (section 7.16) ; changing the physical address of the equipment (section 7.17), changing local supervision mode (section 4.14), upgrading the software (section 7.18) ; events memory battery (section 6.18.9), power supply fuses (section 6.21.6), fans (section 6.24.2). Before any change of configuration, disable all remote controls.
the service channels:
S S S
remote indications and remote controls:
S S
the equipment:
S S S S S S
the supervision system:
S S S
the replacement of components:
S S S
When carrying out any operation on the boards (removing/reinstalling, changing the configuration), you should always wear an earthing wrist strap (for example: 3M Disposable Wrist Strap, reference 2209). IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THESE OPERATIONS BE CARRIED OUT BY TECHNICIANS CERTIFIED AND ACCREDITED BY ALCATEL.
September 2000
219/270
7.1 Commissioning inactive tributaries

p p p p p p Update the information sheet required for station installation (Appendix 1). Open the menu Operation parameters/Terminals/Tributary connections (see sections 4.5.1 and 6.10). Activate the desired tributaries on each channel, in transmit and receive modes. Send the new configuration. Close the Operation parameters application. Open the AS&C application and check that the new active tributaries are correctly represented by black lines and a number on a white background.
7.2 Changing 2 Mbit/s tributary impedance
p p p p p p
Update the information sheet required for station installation (Appendix 1). Take out TIU board. Set the straps of the TIU board or boards to the 75 or 120 configuration as required (see section 6.7.2 or 6.8.2 or 6.9.2). Reinsert the TIU board. Declare the impedance of the tributaries (see section 4.4.1 and 6.7.3 or 6.8.3 or 6.9.3). Check that there are no alarms in the AS&C application.
7.3 Changing bit rate
The various possible bit rates of the equipment depend on the software key/TIU board combination (see section 2.1). The change of bit rate may therefore require one and/or the other of these elements to be changed. WARNING, any change of bit rate entails a change of passband. Check that this is still compatible with the passband of the branching filters. The bit rate of the remote station should always be changed before that of the local station. p p p Update the information sheet required for station installation (Appendix 1). If you are changing the software key, refer to section 7.4. If you are changing the TIU board, refer to section 7.5.
220/270
September 2000
The presence of the symbol at the start of the description of a procedure indicates that it entails momentarily disconnecting the link.
p
Open the menu Operation parameters\Terminal\Bit rates or Operation parameters\Repeater\Bit rates. Enter the new rate. Open the menu Terminal\Tributary connection or Repeater\Tributary connection (see sections 4.5.1 and 6.10). Activate the desired tributaries on each channel, in transmit and in receive modes. Send the new configuration. Close the Operation parameters application. Open the AS&C application and check that the new active tributaries are correctly represented by black lines and a number on a white background.
p p p
7.4 Changing the software key

When you change the configuration (1+0, 1+1, etc) or the bit rate, it may be necessary to change the software key if it does not offer the desired functionality. The procedure for changing the key is as follows: p p p p Update the information sheet required for station installation (Appendix 1). Open the Alarms, Status and Controls application. In the general mimic diagram, zoom in on the GSU board. Undo the two thumbscrews and remove the software key from connector J225 marked SKU on the 3 Tx/Rx backplane mother board in the main rack; the SOFTWARE KEY MISSING message appears. Insert the new key and check that SOFTWARE KEY ALARM appears. Open the Operation parameters application and send the configuration again (File/Send). Close the Operation parameters application. After resynchronization, zoom in on the GSU board. Wait for the key alarm to disappear. The alarm will not appear if the characteristics of the key are not compatible with the configuration, and the PROVISIONNING REFUSED or PR alarm (with the 946LUX12 software) appears if the key is incompatible with the equipment. In this case, change the key and repeat the above operations from opening the Operation parameters application. If the problem persists, change the GSU board, 3CC05690AAxx.
p p p p p
7.5 Changing the bit rate (changing TIU)
p p p
Update the information sheet required for station installation (Appendix 1). Take out the TIU board. Install the new TIU board after checking the configuration of the impedances (see sections 6.7.2, 6.8.2, or 6.9.2). Repeat the commissioning operations as described in Chapter 5. In particular, declare the new configuration in the applications: see software configuration, sections 6.7.3, 6.8.3 and 6.9.3. Declare the bit rate, see section 7.3. Check that there are no alarms in the AS&C application.
p p
September 2000
221/270
7.6 Inserting (or removing) an ESC board

This operation is carried out: either to convert a repeater with no ESC into a repeater with ESC, p p or to add an ESC 2_3 or ESC 4_5 board in the ESC45 slot. Update the information sheet required for station installation (Appendix 1). In the Installation parameters\Tables menu, modify: S Station type: Repeater with ESC board (see sections 6.15 and 6.16). S Additional boards: ESC extension (see sections 6.15 and 6.16). Install the daughter board or boards (ESC1 to ESC5), and declare them via the menu: Installation parameters\Tables\ESC definition\ESC 3, ESC 4 or ESC 5 (see section 6.17). Close the application. Remember to change the switches on the backplane motherboard, see section 3.7.1.3. For deinstallation, proceed in the same way, deleting the ESC board or boards. Check that there are no alarms in the AS&C application.
p p p p p
7.7 Deleting/Inserting/Changing a telephone number

p p Update the information sheet required for station installation (Appendix 1). Open the Operation parameters/Terminal/Station number application. S To dispense with the use of the telephone on the equipment, check the Audio Service channel inhibition box. S To enable the use of the telephone on the equipment, make sure that the Audio Service channel inhibition box is not checked. Otherwise click it to disable it. S If the service channel is enabled, define the telephone number as indicated in section 4.5.1. Send the new configuration. Close the application. Check that there are no alarms in the AS&C application.
p p p
Numbers 000 to 010 and X00(1 pX p 9) are forbidden, number 00 is for a general call.
7.8 Customizing service channels

p p p p p Update the information sheet required for station installation (Appendix 1). Take out the ESC 23 or ESC 45 board. Install the daughter board or boards (ESC1 to ESC5), and declare them via the menu: Installation parameters\Tables\ESC definition\ESC 3, ESC 4 or ESC 5 (see section 6.17). Reinsert the board Check that there are no alarms in the AS&C application.
222/270
September 2000
7.9 Configuring TS and TC loops (standard configuration)

METHODOLOGY Changing the configuration of remote indication loops 2 to 8 entails moving the soldered links (swaps) on the GSU board.
p p p p p p p
Update the information sheet required for station installation (Appendix 1). If necessary, take out the GSU board (3CC05690AAxx) and change the position of the swaps. Reinsert the GSU board. Connect the new TS/TCs. Modify the TS/TC label via the menu: Operation parameters\Alarms\Housekeeping loops labels (or remote control labels). Check out operation of theRemote Indications via the Alarms, Status and Controls application (zoom in on MAIN/Housekeeping). Check that there are no alarms in the AS&C application.
7.10 Configuring the loops of the optional 16 TS/TC board

p p p p p p Update the information sheet required for station installation (Appendix 1). Alter the wiring of the loops, referring to the pinout for the connector strips (Appendix 8.4.3) and, in the case of the Remote Indications, see section 6.20. Declare the board present in the menu: Installation parameters/Tables/Additional boards/TS/TC extension unit. Send the new configuration. Check out operation of the Remote Indications and Remote Controls via the Alarms, Status and Controls application (zoom in on MAIN/Housekeeping). Check that there are no alarms in the AS&C application.
7.11 Adding multiplexer protection
p p
Update the information sheet required for station installation (Appendix 1). Insert a backup MSU board (3CC06201AAxx) in the protection position for each channel used in the 3 Tx/Rx backplane or backplanes of the mains extension racks, remembering to connect the front panel ribbon cable to the adjacent MSU board of each channel (see Figure 2 in section 2.1). Repeat the commissioning operations as described in Chapter 5, in particular, declare the new configuration in the applications: S Installation parameters\MUX protection\MUX protection and switching\Protection through MSU standby unit. Check that there are no alarms in the AS&C application.
September 2000
223/270
7.12 Changing a 1+0 configuration to 1 + 1

p p p
Caution! Changing a 1+0 configuration to a 1+1 configuration is possible only if the branching connections of the equipment initially supplied are extendable. Update the information sheet required for station installation (Appendix 1). Install the TX, RX and PSU modules and branching connections for the standby channel X, referring to Figure 4 in section 2.3. Then change the SKU key if necessary (see section 7.4, procedure for changing the key). Set up the SHF coaxial links between the transmit and receive ports of the TX and RX modules and the ports of the branching filters of the channel or ports of the HSB relay and the SHF coupler. Connect the 28/48 V power cables at one end to the power supply board of standby channel X and at the other end to the DC power source. Connect the fan power cable to the PSU of standby channel X. Power up standby channel X by operating the switch on the front panel of the PSU board. Repeat the commissioning of the two stations and of the link (section 5.2).
p p p p p
7.13 Changing a 1+0 or 1+1 configuration to N+1
Caution! Changing a 1+0 configuration to a 1+1 or N+1 configuration is possible only if the branching connections of the equipment initially supplied are of the extendable type and they will allow the number of channels planned to be increased. Some frequency plans have only three channels with the same polarization; in this case, the branching connections of normal channels 3 to 5 must be connected to the second antenna port. Depending on the situation, the configuration of the 3 Tx/Rx backplane mother board will need to be adjusted (see section 3.7). Above the 2+1 configuration, the equipment must be supplemented with an extension rack. Update the information sheet required for station installation (see Appendix 1). Install all the modules needed (TX, RX, PSU, MSU, TIU, LSU if necessary), and the branching connections of the channel or channels added (standby channel X and/or normal channel 2, and so on), referring to Figure 2 in section 2.1. Then change the SKU key if necessary (see section 7.4, Procedure for changing the key). Set up the SHF coaxial links between the transmit and receive ports of the TX and Rx modules and the branching filter ports of the new channels. Set up the output wiring for the PSU board or boards. If necessary, set up the interbackplane links between the main and extension racks. Connect the 24/48 V power cables at one end to the power supply board or boards of the new channel or channels and at the other end to the DC power source. Connect the fan power cable to the PSU of standby channel X. Power up the channel or channels (standby channel X and/or normal channel 2, and so on) by operating the front panel switch on the PSU board or boards.
p p
p p p
224/270
September 2000
p
Carry out the same operations as before on the remote station and, if necessary, in the other stations on the microwave link. Repeat the commissioning of the two stations and of the link (see section 5.2 of Chapter 5).
7.14 Converting a repeater without tributary drop and insert capability into a repeater with tributary drop and insert capability
Proceed as follows:
p p p
Update the information sheet required for station installation (Appendix 1). Wire the tributaries to be dropped and inserted for each of the channels concerned (see section 3.7) (see Figure 20). In each 3 Tx/Rx backplane, add a TIU board that is appropriate to the type and number of tributaries to be dropped and inserted, after first configuring it as described in sections 6.7, 6.8 or 6.9, for each channel involved. Set up the configuration in accordance with section 6.7.3, 6.8.3 or 6.9.3, respectively. Send the new configuration. See section 6.10, and open the Operation parameters application (see section 4.5.1) to update the screens: S Repeater\Tributary connection, by activating the tributaries for which drop or insert capability is to be added, S Repeater\AIS configuration. Send the new configuration. Check that there are no alarms in the AS&C application.
p p p
p p
7.15 Converting a repeater into a terminal
p p p p p p
Update the information sheet required for station installation (Appendix 1). Check the TIU board or boards of the equipment to see if they exist and change them if necessary according to the envisaged bit rate. Fit the engineering service channel boards required for the new configuration. Wire up the tributaries and service channels as for a first installation (sections 3.7 and 3.10).
Update the following screens: S Tables\Tributary boards, see sections 6.7.3, 6.8.3 or 6.9.3, S Tables\Additional boards, see sections 6.15 and 6.16, S Tables\ESC definition, see section 6.17. Send the new configuration. Open the Operation parameters application (see section 4.5.1) and update the corresponding Terminal menu screens.
p p
September 2000
225/270
p p
Send the new configuration. Check that there are no alarms in the AS&C application.
7.16 Changing frequency in the RF filter band
Changing frequency is possible only for the 2 x 2, 4 x 2 or 8 x 2 Mbit/s rates (for 16 x 2 in 16 QAM), taking into account the frequency bandwidth occupied relative to the passband of the branching filters. The frequency of the remote station should always be changed before that of the local station. p p p p p Update the information sheet required for station installation (Appendix 1). Change to local supervision mode in station A (section 4.14) Select M:0S:1 (Station B) Open the Operation parameters application (section 4.5.1) For each channel, modify the transmit and receive frequencies via the menus: Terminal or Repeater\Radio configuration\TX frequency and Terminal or Repeater\Radio configuration\RX frequency. Check that the duplex separation between the transmit frequency and the receive frequency is correctly observed. In a 1+1 HSB configuration, check that the transmit and receive frequencies of the two channels for each transmission direction are the same. Send the new configuration. Close the application. Select M:0S:0 (Station A). Open the Operation parameters application (section 4.5.1) For each channel, modify the transmit and receive frequencies via the menus: Terminal or Repeater\Radio configuration\Transmit frequency and Terminal or Repeater\Radio configuration\Receive frequency. Check that the duplex separation between the transmit frequency and the receive frequency is correctly observed. Send the new configuration. Close the application. Check that there are no alarms in the AS&C application. Quit local supervision (section 4.14.2).
p p p p p p p
p p p p p
7.17 Changing the physical address of the equipment

7.17.1 From the station configured as a network element
p p Update the information sheet required for station installation (Appendix 1). Go to Operation parameters/Equipment/Network element.
226/270
September 2000
p
Change the physical address number of the NE (see section 4.5.2). Send the new configuration. Close the application. Wait (about two minutes) for the terminal to be reconfigured. Check that there are no alarms in the AS&C application. Report the change of physical address of the equipment to the network supervisor.
p p p p p
7.17.2 From the station with mediation function (local supervision or master key)
p p p p p p p p Update the information sheet required for station installation (Appendix 1). Go to Operation parameters\Equipment\NE physical address. Select the secondary equipment (see section 4.5.2). Change the physical address number of the secondary equipment and click OK. Send the new configuration. Close the application. Check the EF alarm on this network element. Declare the new physical address of the equipment via the menu: Operation parameters\ Equipment\NE physical address on the master station and check that the EF alarm disappears.
7.18 Upgrading the software (changing from 946LUXn to 946LUXn+1)

These upgrades can be bought from our Customer Services Department. Consult your ALCATEL retailer. When making any change to the software installed on board the equipment, remember to update the installation information sheet in Appendix 1 and, if possible, notify Alcatels TAC Service. If you upgrade from version 946LUX10 of the software to version 946LUX11 or 946LUX12, check that key used carries at least the number 3CC07619AAAB. If not, replace it.
7.18.1 Installing the software on the CT

For these operations, the only requirement is that the CT should be connected to the equipment. p PC with only WINDOWS 95 installed: Install in turn (section 4.1.2): S NECTAS, S RTP, S 946LUXn (basic and extension, if appropriate), S 946LUXn+1 (basic and extension, if appropriate). p PC with WINDOWS 95, NECTAS, RTP and 946LUXn installed: S Check that the NECTAS version supports 946LUXn+1; if not update it. S Install (section 4.1.2) the 946LUXn+1 software (basic and extension if appropriate).
September 2000
227/270
7.18.2 Downloading the software of the NE

p p
Decompress the new file (.cmp) in the PC, then download the software to each network element (.bin) (see section 4.6). Wait 2 to 3 minutes for the craft terminal to reopen with the network element (NE) in 946LUXn.
228/270
September 2000
Appendix 1 Installation information

Station
Name of terminal in station * Station name Name of remote terminal * Remote terminal site Type Remote terminal azimuth
* CAUTION ! No more than eight characters; use only characters allowed by MS-DOS 1+0 1+1 1+1 SD 1+1 HSB 1+1 HSB/SD 1+1 FD hybrid
2+0 Hardware configuration 3+1
2+0 SD
2+1
2+1 SD
3+0
3+0 SD
3+1 SD
4+1
4+1 SD
5+1
5+1 SD
Master/Slave Software key
RCT
Max. config.
Max. capacity
Frequency range
Tributaries
Terminal bit rate (Limited by the interface boards and the software key installed)
Tributary board types
Tributary board type Tributary N_ 1 N_ 3 N_ 5 N_ 7 N_ 9 N_ 11 N_ 13 N_ 15 2 Mbit/s aux. Impedance : 75 or 120 Ohms for 2 Mbit/s channels only. Tributary cross connect Name Impedance
BNC-1.6/5.6-Terminal block

Tributary N_ 2 N_ 4 N_ 6 N_ 8 N_ 10 N_ 12 N_ 14 N_ 16
2 x 2 Mbit/s
4 x 2 Mbit/s
8 x 2 Mbit/s
16 x 2 Mbit/s
1 x 34 Mbit/s
4 x 2/ 8 Mbit/s inputs
8 x 2 Mbit/s inputs or 2 x 8 Mbit/s inputs
16 x 2 Mbit/s inputs or 4 x 8 Mbit/s inputs + aux 2 Mbit/s
34 Mbit/s + aux 2 Mbit/s
Name
Impedance
BNC-1.6/5.6-Terminal block
If no particular matrix is supplied by the network administrator, use the standard configuration.
September 2000
229/270
Radio configuration
Normal channel Channel 1 transmit frequency (FTx1) Channel 2 transmit frequency (FTx2) Channel 3 transmit frequency (FTx3) Channel 4 transmit frequency (FTx4) Channel 5 transmit frequency (FTx5) Channel 1 receive frequency (FRx1) Channel 2 receive frequency (FRx2) Channel 3 receive frequency (FRx3) Channel 4 receive frequency (FRx4) Channel 5 receive frequency (FRx5) Duplex separation Link identification code MHz Transmit Receive Values supplied by network administrator |FTx FRx | = Duplex separation Standby channel
S Channel 1 S Channel 2 S Channel 3 S Channel 4 S Channel 5 Engineering service channels (ESC)

Supervision Int ter termina al cabl le * rQ2 bit rate NE physical address Bit rate : 9600 bit/s for an 9400 XX network Address : 01 by default. Values supplied by network administrator Values between 0 (default) and 31, inserted on transmission and expected on reception, supplied by the network administrator.
SCC/NMS switching matrix Station telephone number N_ 4 and N_ 5 engineering service channel board Definition of ESCs
Apply standard configuration unless a specific matrix is supplied by the network administrator Caution! No more than one zero in the number. Value supplied by network administrator.
S ESC N_ 3
S ESC N_ 4 (Bit rate > 2 x 2 Mbit/s) S ESC N_ 5 (Bit rate > 2 x 2 Mbit/s)
* Check the boxes for which the interterminal link cables need to be installed. Performance thresholds (Triggering alarms)
Early switching request 2 x 2 Mbit/s 90 dBm 4 x 2 Mbit/s 87 dBm

Absent ESC23 ESC45 ESC-1, 2, 3, 4 ou 5 Point to multipoint analogue ESC with selective calling (2 W audio) ESC-1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 ESC-1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 ESC-1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 8 x 2 Mbit/s 84 dBm 16 x 2 Mbit/s 81 dBm 1 x 34 Mbit/s 81 dBm Early switching request 1E08 Switching request 1E06 Priority switching request 1E03
S Minimum values S Terminal values

Bit error ratio
S Average values S Terminal values

Propagation thresholds
Nominal power (dBm)
Received power threshold (dB)
Values specified by network administrator. The sum of the two values must not exceed the early switching request alarm value. Default values : 35 dBm; 35 dB

230/270
September 2000
Maintenance thresholds
Threshold
Section ES
Section US
PSAC
PSAD
Hop ES
Hop US
PSRC
Value
Remote signalling (TS) and remote controls (TC)

Install the loops required and name them in the software (NO: Normally open/NC: Normally closed). Loop TS N_ 1 TS N_ 3 TS N_ 5 TS N_ 7 TC N_ 1 Name Fans NO/NC Loop TS N_ 2 TS N_ 4 Name NO/NC

TS N_ 6 TS N_ 8 Name NO/NC Loop TS N_ 2 TS N_ 4 TS N_ 6 TS N_ 8 TS N_ 10 TS N_12 TC N_ 3 TC N_ 5 HA N_ 2 HA N_ 4 HA N_ 6 HA N_ 8 HA N_10 HA N_12 HA N_14 HA N_16 Name NO/NC
Specify the default alarm, equipment and environment alarms (UG, NUG, Disabled, Status).
16 TS/TC extension (& Equipment Alarm (AE) loops)

Loop TS N_ 1 TS N_ 3 TS N_ 5 TS N_ 7 TS N_ 9 TS N_ 11 TC N_ 2 TC N_ 4 HA N_ 1 HA N_ 3 HA N_ 5 HA N_ 7 HA N_ 9 HA N_ 11 HA N_13 HA N_15
Engineering service channel

Supervision SCC/NMS switching matrix Station telephone number N_ 4 and N_ 5 engineering service channel board Definition of ESCs Inter-t -termin nal ca able*
S ESC N_ 3 S ESC N_ 4 (Bit rate > 2 x 2 Mbit/s) S ESC N_ 5 (Bit rate > 2 x 2 Mbit/s)
* Check the boxes for which the interterminal link cables need to be installed.
September 2000
231/270
Appendix 2 Troubleshooting using AS&C

N_ Alarm, status or remote control label Fault or failure finding Look for the lowest level alarm identifier, by successively opening the lowerlevel screens by clicking the lefthand mouse button (when the mouse pointer becomes a magnifying glass on moving over the symbol of a module). The particular wording of the alarm at the origin of the alarm appears by clicking when the pointer passing above the alarm identifier changes to a hand. To move up a level in the screens, click on the righthand mouse button. URGent alarm: see definition in section 4.5.3 ; use the History log programs to detail the alarms. After locating and identifying the defect, replace the faulty module or board. URGent alarm: the search for the defect which has appeared can be undertaken later. See definition in section 4.5.3 ; use the History log programs to detail the alarms. After locating and identifying the defect, carry out the repair. NonURGent alarm: Indicates a forced switchover in transmission to normal channel N or standby channel X by remote control. URGent alarm: Incompatibility between the transmit frequency value requested and the value obtainable via the TX RF synthesized LO on channel N or standby channel X; check the transmit frequency and the subband of the equipment. Otherwise change the transmitter. NonURGent alarm: Transmitted power from the amplifier of channel N or standby channel X cut off by remote control. URGent alarm: Loss of output power from the transmit amplifier of channel N or standby channel X greater than 5 dB (check that there has been no transmitted power cutoff remote control); otherwise replace the transmitter. URGent alarm: Inconsistency between the choice of frequency requested on installation and the frequency band of the transmitter module for channel N or standby channel X. Check the installation and operational configurations of the transmitter. Otherwise, change the transmitter of channel N or standby channel X (the transmitter receives the configuration from the receiver). URGent alarm: Replace the failed transmitter module on channel N or standby channel X.
The numbers in the first column are those that appear on the screens in Chapter 6.
SYNTHESIS Summary alarm
UNDELAYED MAINTENANCE 1 Prompt maintenance alarm
DELAYED MAINTENANCE Deferred maintenance alarm.
MANUAL MODE Forced switching mode.
TX SYNTHESIZER Transmit synthesizer alarm.
POWER MODE Amplifier mode.
OUTPUT POWER Transmit power level alarm.
CONFIGURATION ERROR Configuration error (on the transmitter)
GENERAL ALARM General alarm (concerning the transmitter)
232/270
September 2000
N_
Alarm, status or remote control label
Fault or failure finding URGent alarm: Transmitter module on channel N or standby channel X absent or loss of dialogue with the GSU board. If the transmitter module is present, replace it (*) URGent received field alarm on normal channel N, standby channel X, diversity channel N or standby diversity channel X: check the receive frequency of the equipment, the continuity of the receive subsystem and then the remote transmit subsystem. Otherwise, change the failed module or modules. URGent alarm: The received field on normal channel N, standby channel X, diversity channel N or standby diversity channel X is less than the threshold defined in the menu Operation parameters\Thresholds\Propagation (see section 6.13.6.1)
UNIT MISSING 9 Module (transmitter) absent or dialogue problem.
10
RECEIVE POWER Received field alarm.
11
PROPAGATION Propagation alarm.
URGent alarm: The BER on normal channel N or ESR diversity channel N is greater than the value defined in 12 Early switching request on received field or the menu Operation parameters\Thresholds\Switching bit error ratio for the ESR threshold (see section 6.13.6.2). URGent alarm: The BER on standby channel X or Rx X ESR standby diversity channel X is greater than the value 12 Early switching request on received field or defined in the menu Operation bit error ratio parameters\Thresholds\Switching for the ESR threshold (see section 6.13.6.2) LOW BER 13 Performance switching request on low bit error ratio. URGent alarm: The BER on normal channel N or diversity channel N is greater than the value defined in the menu Operation parameters\Thresholds\Switching for the SR threshold (see section 6.13.6.3) URGent alarm: The BER on standby channel X or standby diversity channel X is greater than the value defined in the menu Operation parameters\Thresholds\Switching for the SR threshold (see section 6.13.6.3). URGent alarm: Check the frequency of the transmitter on normal channel N or standby channel X, and of the receiver on normal channel N or standby channel X, diversity channel N or standby diversity channel X. URGent alarm: Incompatibility between the receive frequency value requested and the value obtainable by the RF Rx synthesized LO on normal channel N, standby channel X, diversity channel N or standby diversity channel X; check the receive frequency and the subband of the LO. Otherwise change the receiver. URGent alarm: No signal at the input of normal channel N, standby channel X, diversity channel N or standby diversity channel X. Check the frequency of the transmitter on normal channel 1 or standby channel X and the bit rates of the equipment on both stations.
Rx X SR 13 Performance switching request on low bit error ratio.
FREQUENCY SHIFT 14 Alarm on frequency difference between transmission and reception.
15
Rx SYNTHESIZER Receive synthesizer alarm.
CARRIER UNLOCKED 16 Carrier unlocked or loss of demodulator input signal.
(*) Comment: If this alarm is indicated on all modules, change the GSU board.
September 2000
233/270
N_
Fault or failure finding

FEC INHIBITION 17 Forward error correction disabled.
NonURGent alarm: The forward error correcting function has been disabled by remote control on normal channel N, standby channel X, diversity channel N or standby diversity channel X. NonURGent alarm: The receive equalizer has been disabled by remote control on normal channel N, standby channel X, diversity channel N or standby diversity channel X. URGent alarm: Replace the receiver on normal channel N, standby channel X, diversity channel N or standby diversity channel X. URGent alarm: Inconsistency between the choice of frequency requested on installation and the frequency band of the receiver module on normal channel N, standby channel X, diversity channel N or standby diversity channel X. Check the installation and operational configurations of the receiver. Otherwise change the Rx module on normal channel N, standby channel X, diversity channel N or standby diversity channel X (switch by remote control to the other channel to avoid unwanted switching attempts on replacing the receiver module). Transmission is cut off for the time it takes to reload the configuration by the receiver. URGent alarm: Rx module on normal channel N, standby channel X, diversity channel N or standby diversity channel X absent or no dialogue with the GSU board. If the Rx module is present, replace it (*) URGent alarm: Replace the TIU board. URGent alarm: inconsistency between the tributaries described in the operational configuration and those accepted by the TIU board. Check the installation and operational configurations of the boards and the impedance hardware configuration. URGent alarm: TIU module absent or no dialogue with the GSU board. If the TIU module is present, replace it (*) URGent alarm: inconsistency between the daughter board(s) installed and the configuration declared on installing and defining service channels 2 & 3 or 4 & 5. Check the physical existence and the installation and operation configurations of the ESC daughter board(s) (see sections 4.4.1 & 4.5.1). Otherwise change the daughter board.
EQUALIZER INHIBITION 18 Receive equalizer disabled.
19
GENERAL ALARM General alarm (receiver).
20
CONFIGURATION ERROR Configuration error (on the receiver).
UNIT MISSING 21 Module (receiver) absent or dialogue problem. 22 GENERAL ALARM General alarm (TIU board)
23
CONFIGURATION ERROR Configuration error (TIU board)
24
UNIT MISSING Module (TIU) absent or dialogue problem.
25
CONFIGURATION ERROR Configuration error (ESC 2 - 3 module)
(*) Comment: If this alarm is indicated on all modules, change the GSU board.
234/270
September 2000
N_
Fault or failure finding URGent alarm: inconsistency between the (or both) daughter board(s) installed and the configuration declared on installing and defining service channels 4 & 5. Check the physical existence and the installation and operation configurations of the (or both) ESC daughter board(s) (see sections 4.4.1 & 4.5.1). Otherwise change the (or both) daughter board(s). URGent alarm: Replace the ESC 2 - 3 board URGent alarm: Replace the ESC 4 - 5 board URGent alarm: ESC 2 - 3 module absent or no dialogue with the GSU board. If the ESC 2 - 3 module is present, replace it (*) URGent alarm: ESC 4 - 5 module absent or no dialogue with the GSU board. If the ESC 4 - 5 module is present, replace it (*) URGent alarm: Use the analogue measurements program to check the state of the voltages on the PSU module. A short circuit may have occurred between a board or module powered. If at least one of the voltages is absent, replace the power supply for normal channel 1, standby channel X, diversity channel N or standby diversity channel X. URGent alarm: PSU module on normal channel 1, standby channel X, diversity channel N or standby diversity channel X absent or no dialogue with the GSU board (*) URGent alarm: no input signal from tributary n_i or the auxiliary 2 Mbit/s stream. Check for presence of the signal and the tributary or 2 Mbit/s channel wiring. URGent alarm: incompatibility between bit rate or encoding present at the input of tributary input n_i or the auxiliary 2 Mbit/s stream and that allowed by the (or both) TIU board(s). Check the installation and operation configurations of the (or both) TIU module(s). Caution! Never loop unused tributary ports at the ends of a link, simply disable them via the software. URGent alarm: insertion on transmission of an AIS on tributary n_i or the auxiliary 2 Mbit/s stream in the absence of a signal at the input. Check for presence of the signal and the wiring of the tributary or the auxiliary stream. NonURGent alarm: insertion of a pseudorandom bit pattern by remote control on tributary n_i or the auxiliary 2 Mbit/s stream (Caution! The PF4 measuring set from Wandel & Goltermann cannot be used to measure BER on this pattern).
25
CONFIGURATION ERROR Configuration error (ESC 4 - 5 module)
26 26
GENERAL ALARM General alarm (ESC 2 - 3 module) GENERAL ALARM General alarm (ESC 4 - 5 module)
UNIT MISSING 27 Module (ESC 2 - 3) absent or dialogue problem. UNIT MISSING 27 Module (ESC 4 - 5) absent or dialogue problem.
28
GENERAL ALARM General alarm (PSU module)
UNIT MISSING 29 Module (PSU) absent or dialogue problem.
30
TRIB.i or AUX 2MB: SIGNAL LOSS Loss of signal detected at the tributary.
31
TRIB.i or AUX 2MB: UNEXPECTED Tributary incoming signal fault.
32
TRIB.i or AUX 2MB: Tx AIS Insertion of an AIS on transmission.
33
TRIB.i RC or AUX 2MB RC: INSERTION Insertion of a pseudorandom bit pattern.
(*) Comment: if this alarm is indicated on all the modules, change the GSU board.
September 2000
235/270
N_ 34
Alarm, status or remote control label MUX_DEMUX NORMAL ALARM Normal MUX/DEMUX alarm

URGent alarm: MSU failed. If the fault persists after resetting the module, replace it. NonURGent alarm: Local baseband loopback by remote control of the aggregate to be transmitted to the aggregate received at the input of transmitter 1 or X (see section 2.8). URGent alarm: inconsistency between the installation parameters and the operation parameters. Check the configuration of the TIU board, the connection of the tributaries, MUX protection, tributary crossconnection and AIS generation. Otherwise, replace the MSU module. URGent alarm: If the alarm persists after a reset, replace the MSU module.
LOCAL LOOP 35 Local loopback.
36
CONFIGURATION ERROR Configuration error (MSU module).
37
GENERAL ALARM General alarm (MSU module).
38
URGent alarm: MSU module absent or no dialogue with UNIT MISSING the GSU board. If the MSU module is present, replace Module (MSU) absent or dialogue problem. it (*). URGent alarm: The bit error ratio is greater than that programmed to generate an ESR or the frame received from normal channel N is out of synchronization. URGent alarm: Loss of receive frame synchronization on normal channel N caused by a reception problem causing transmission of an AIS in reception. Check the frequency configuration of the RF channel and the received field level. URGent alarm: Receipt of a wrong frame identification code on normal channel N, standby channel X, diversity channel N or standby diversity channel X. Check the consistency of the configuration of the codes sent and received. Otherwise, check the received field level (receipt of an interference signal). NonURGent alarm: remote baseband loopback of tributary ni or the auxiliary 2 Mbit/s stream by remote control (see section 2.8). NonURGent alarm: Measurement of bit error ratio on tributary ni by remote control. NonURGent alarm: Measurement of bit error ratio on the auxiliary 2 Mbit/s stream by remote control. URGent alarm: generation of an AIS on reception on tributary ni. Check the configuration and presence of the remote transmit stream. URGent alarm: Generation of an AIS on reception on the auxiliary 2 Mbit/s stream. Check the configuration and presence of the stream on transmission in the remote station.
RX HIGH BER Priority switching request on high bit error 39 ratio or loss of frame synchronization (on reception on normal channel N) RX LOSS OF FRAME 40 Loss of frame synchronization alarm (in reception on normal channel N).
41
LINK IDENTITY CODE Loss of channel identification code alarm.
42
TRIB.i RC or AUX 2MB RC: DIST. LOOP Remote loopback. TRIB.i RC: BER MEAS. Bit error ratio measurement. AUX 2MB RC: BER MEAS. Measurement of bit error ratio. TRIB.i: RX AIS Generation of an AIS on reception.
43 43
44
AUX 2MB: RX AIS 44 Generation of an AIS on reception.
236/270
September 2000
N_
Fault or failure finding URGent alarm; An AIS is generated in the relay. Problem on the tributaries transmitted directly between the two equipments in the repeater station. Check the cable (ref : 3CC06688AAAA) and the configuration of the active and inactive tributaries in each of the two terminals and presence of the stream in trnasmission at the remote end. NonURGent alarm: Selection by remote control of the transmit channel by the GSU board (if the MUX protection option is selected): forced manual switching from the MSU board to the normal MUX or the standby MUX. NonURGent alarm: Selection by remote control of the receive channel by the GSU board in an N+1 configuration: indicates forced manual switching of the MSU board to normal channel N, standby channel X, diversity channel N or standby diversity channel X. URGent alarm: standby MSU failed. Replace the standby MSU module. URGent alarm: The BER is greater than that programmed to generate a PSR or the frame received on standby channel X is out of synchronization. URGent alarm: Loss of frame synchronization on reception on standby channel X, caused by a reception problem resulting in transmission of an AIS on reception. Check the frequency configuration of the RF channel and the received field level URGent alarm: Replace the GSU module. NonURGent housekeeping alarm n_ 1: at least one of the two fans in the 3 Tx/Rx backplane has failed. Change the fan or fans mounted above the backplane after first removing the power supply cable from P202 at the top of the mother board. NonURGent housekeeping dry loop alarms 2 to 8 or 9 to 20: according to the assignment of each loop (see section 7.9) Remote control: Housekeeping RC n_1 or housekeeping RC extension n_2 to 5 active. URGent alarm: This alarm prevents any change of configuration or reconfiguration of the equipment. Check to see whether the software key is correctly placed on the 9way Sub-D port marked SKU (J225 on the 3 Tx/Rx backplane board).
45
REPEATER ACCESS Relay AIS.
46
MUX_DEMUX MODE Forced switching mode.
47
SWITCHING MODE Forced switching mode.
48
MUX_DEMUX SPARE ALARM Protection MUX/DEMUX alarm.
RX X HIGH BER Priority switching request on high bit error 49 ratio or loss of frame synchronization (reception on channel X) RX X LO.SS OF FRAME 50 Loss of frame synchronization alarm (reception on standby channel X). GENERAL ALARM General alarm (GSU board)
51
HOUSEKEEPING 1 52 Alarm active. (In general: fan alarm)
53
HOUSEKEEPING 2 to 8 or 9 to 20 Active alarm. ENVIRONMENT CONTROL 1 to 5 Remote control activated.
54
55
SOFTWARE KEY MISSING No software key.
September 2000
237/270
N_

56
SOFTWARE KEY ALARM Modified key or key alarm.
URGent alarm: Alarm appearing on a change of key, when the new key does not have the same characteristics as the previous one. Check the new key by opening the Operation parameters application and sending the configuration (FIle/Send). The key alarm should disappear. URGent alarm: The new key is incompatible with the equipment. Change the key, or reset the equipment (applicable only in the 946LUX11 software version; in the 946LUX12 version, it is replaced by a CR alarm in the alarm synthesis line). URGent alarm: Time remaining in three hour multiples before the link will be cut off in response to a key alarm. Reinstall a key. URGent alarm: According to the assignment of each link alarm loop (see section 7.9). URGent alarm: Module absent or no dialogue with the GSU board. If the 16 TS/TC module is present, replace it (*) URGent alarm: Check the configuration of the installation and operation parameters and recitify any faults. URGent alarm: Replace the failed LSU board. URGent alarm: LSU module absent or no dialogue with the GSU board (*) URGent alarm: No dialogue with the MSU board for normal channel n_ 1. URGent alarm: No dialogue with the MSU board for normal channel n_ 2 URGent alarm: The BER is greater than that programmed to generate a PSR or the frame received on diversity channel N is out of synchronization. URGent alarm: Loss of frame synchronization on reception on diversity channel N caused by a reception problem resulting in transmission of an AIS on reception. Check the frequency configuration of the RF channel and the received field level. URGent alarm: The BER is greater than that programmed to generate a PSR or the frame received on standby diversity channel X is out of synchronization.
57
PROVISIONING REFUSED Configuration rejected.
58
TERM SHUTDOWN IN 24, 21, ..., 3 H Time before the link will be cut off.
EQUIPMENT ALARM 1 to 16 59 Activation of the dry loop of the corresponding alarm. UNIT MISSING 60 Module (16 TS/TC) absent or dialogue problem. 61 CONFIGURATION ERROR Configuration error (LSU board) GENERAL ALARM General alarm (LSU board) UNIT MISSING Module (LSU) absent or dialogue problem. ORDER WIRE Alarm active (LSU board) STANDBY ORDER WIRE Alarm active (LSU board)
62 63 64 65
DIV RX HIGH BER Priority switching request on high BER or 66 loss of frame synchronization (on reception, diversity channel N) DIV RX LOSS OF FRAME 67 Loss of frame synchronization (on reception on diversity channel N) BACKUP RX DIV HIGH BER Priority switching request on high BER or 68 loss of frame synchronization (reception, diversity channel X)
238/270
September 2000
N_
Fault or failure finding URGent alarm: Loss of frame synchronizatoin on reception on diversity channel X caused by a problem on reception resulting in transmission of an AIS on reception. Check the frequency configuration of the RF channel and the received field level.
BACKUP DIV RX LOSS OF FRAME 69 Loss of frame synchronization alarm (on reception on diversity channel X)
September 2000
239/270
Appendix 3 List of remote controls

Some remote controls to a remote station may cause the link to be disconnected, requiring an operator to be sent to that station: some of these remote controls, intended for a remote station, will be rejected by the software, other remote controls are disabled automatically after five minutes.
The remote controls available in the Alarms, States and Controls application are listed in the table below. Depending on the configuration, some may not be available to the operator.
These limitations are present only in the 946LUX11 (from revision index N_4) and 946LUX12 versions (all revisions). The remote controls involved are those indicated in the last column of the table below. REMOTE CONTROL LABEL EQUALIZER [Start] : inhibition EQUALIZER [End] : validation FEC [Start] : inhibition FEC [End] : validation Div. EQUAL. [Start] : inhibition Div. EQUAL. [End] : validation Div. FEC [Start] : inhibition Div. FEC [End] : validation AMPLIFIER [Start] : Power Off AMPLIFIER [End] : Power On TRIB. x [Start] : pseudo rand. seq. ins. valid. TRIB. x [End] : pseudo rand. seq. ins. inhib. TRIB. x [Start] : BER measure validated TRIB. x [End] : BER measure inhibited TRIB. x [Start] : distant loop validated TRIB. x [End] : distant loop inhibited FRAME [Start] : local loop validated FRAME [End] : local loop inhibited MAN.MODE [Start] : manual lockout validated MAN.MODE [End] : manual lockout inhibited RX X [Start] : manual switch. validated RX X [End] : manual switch. inhibited RX Div. [Start] : manual switch. validated RX Div. [End] : manual switch. inhibited RX X Div. [Start] : manual switch. validated RX X Div. [End] : manual switch. inhibited AUX. 2Mbit/s [Start] : pseudo rand. seq. ins. valid. AUX. 2Mbit/s [End] : pseudo rand. seq. ins. inhib. DISABLES/ENABLES Equalizer for each channel. Error correcting encoder for each channel. Equalizer for each diversity channel. Error correcting encoder for each diversity channel. Power amplifier for each channel. In the remote station: Automatic disabling after five minutes. Insertion of a pseudo-random bit pattern on tributary N_ x (for tests on this active tributary) Measurement of BER on tributary N_ x active (via the above pseudo-random bit pattern). Remote loopback on tributary N_ x. Local baseband loopback at the MSU output. In the remote station: Remote control rejected. Manual forcing of switchover on main receiver. In the remote station: Automatic disabling after five minutes. Manual forcing of switchover on standby receiver. In the remote station: Automatic disabling after five minutes. Manual forcing of switchover to the diversity receiver. In the remote station: Automatic disabling after five minutes. Manual forcing of switchover to the standby diversity receiver. In the remote station: Automatic disabling after five minutes. Insertion of a pseudo-random bit pattern on the 2 Mbit/s auxiliary bit stream (34 or 16x2 Mbit/s rate).
240/270
September 2000
REMOTE CONTROL LABEL AUX. 2Mbit/s [Start] : BER measure validated

DISABLES/ENABLES Measurement of BER on the 2 Mbit/s auxiliary bit stream (using the above pseudo-random bit pattern). Remote loopback on the auxiliary 2 Mbit/s stream (34 or 16x2 Mbit/s rate) Manual forcing of the normal multiplexer/demultiplexer (MUX protection). In the remote station: Automatic disabling after five minutes. Manual forcing on HSB standby transmitter (if protection of the MUX). In the remote station: Automatic disabling after five minutes. Manual forcing on HSB main transmitter. In the remote station : Automatic disabling after five minutes. Manual forcing on HSB standby transmitter. In the remote station: Automatic disabling after five minutes. x environment remote control. Equipment restart. Re-initialization of the maintenance alarm counters and cancellation of the URG(ent) and N(on-)URG(ent) alarms.
AUX. 2Mbit/s [End] : BER measure inhibited AUX. 2Mbit/s [Start] : distant loop validated AUX. 2Mbit/s [End] : distant loop inhibited MUX/DEMUX [Start] : normal lockout validated MUX/DEMUX [End] : normal lockout inhibited MUX/DEMUX [Start] : standby switching validated MUX/DEMUX [End] : standby switching inhibited TX 1 [Start] : manual lockout validated TX 1 [End] : manual lockout inhibited TX X [Start] : manual lockout validated TX X [End] : manual lockout inhibited CONTROL x [Start] : Exp. envir. ctrl x validated CONTROL x [End] : Exp. envir. ctrl x inhibited RESTART EQT : Restart equipment MAINTENANCE ALARMS : reset
September 2000
241/270
Appendix 4 List of RTP application alarms

Alarm mnemonic ALGNT ARAIS ATAIS ATIBR ATISL CABAL CAR CARD CLAL CRAL DPWSU DWSIP ESCAL GAIS IDUAL LICAL LSOW MUXAL NREQT NSTAT ODUAL OISL OK PWSUP RDDC RDDCA RDDCP MEANING Alignment alarm (= misalignment) Generation of auxiliary receive AIS Generation of auxiliary transmit AIS Auxiliary tributary input bit rate error Auxiliary tributary input signal loss Cable alarm Carrier misaligned Diversity carrier misaligned Common loss alarm (or common mode alarm) Configuration rejected alarm Diversity power supply alarm Power supply alarm Engineering service channel alarm General transmit AIS IDU (InDoor Unit) alarm not applicable to the 9400 LX Loss of channel identification code alarm LSU (Logic Switching Unit) or order wire (9400 LX N+1) alarm MUX / DEMUX alarm No response from equipment No response from station ODU (OutDoor Unit) alarm not applicable to the 9400 LX Optical input signal lost not applicable to the 9400 LX No alarm Power supply alarm Receiver diversity switching request alarm Receiver diversity early switching request alarm Diversity receiver priority switching request alarm
242/270
September 2000
Alarm mnemonic
MEANING Loss of fr1ame alignment diversity receiver alarm Not applicable in 9400 LX 19 version Diversity received power alarm not applicable to the 19 9400 LX Receive diversity synthesizer alarm Receive AIS generation Receiver diversity alarm Receiver switching request alarm Receiver early switching request alarm Receiver priority switching request alarm Receiver frame alignment loss alarm Received power alarm Receive synthesizer alarm Software key alarm STM0 synchronization loss Tributary interface alarm (or loss of STM0 sync) TIU LX =TIAL input signal fail not applicable to the 9400LX Tributary input bit rate error Tributary input signal loss Transmit AIS generation Transmitter alarm Block synchronization alarm Transmitted power alarm Transmit synthesizer alarm
RDMVT RDRPW RDSYN RXAIS RXDAL RXDC RXDCA RXDCP RXMVT RXRPW RXSYN SKAL STMSL TIAL TIBR TISL TXAIS TXAL TXBSY TXPWA TXSYN
September 2000
243/270
Appendix 5 Creating user profiles

Figure 74 shows a typical profile file.
The profiles are stored in a text file named 946lux1x.prf. This can be edited using any text editor such as NOTEPAD in WINDOWS.
Figure 74 Typical profile file
Each profile comprises: a line identifying the profile, ending with : a first line of codes, separated by , characters. These codes each define an application to which the operator with the profile can obtain read mode access. The line ends with the ; character. a second line of codes, separated by , characters. These codes each define an application to which the operator with the profile can obtain write mode access. The line ends with the ; character.
The codes are listed in the table below. CODE 0 13 33 46 52 60 APPLICATION Alarms, states and remote controls Performance monitoring (G784) Analogue measurements Software downloading Administrative functions Operation parameters CODE 12 31 40 51 58 63 APPLICATION Performance monitoring (G821) Radio transmission parameters Maintenance memory Remote inventory Installation parameters Transparent application for the user (code to be inserted mandatorily in each profile).
244/270
September 2000
Appendix 6 Editing the initialization files

A.6.1 WIN.INI file

The WIN.INI file contains information used to: enable the date and time to be updated in an unsupervised network, change the polling interval of the equipment for refreshing the measurements of the RTP application.
This file, located in the Win95 directory, can be edited using any text editor such as Windows NOTEPAD. The information to be modified can be found under the [PEX] heading in the file (Figure 75).
Figure 75 Typical WIN.INI file
A.6.1.1 Updating the date and time on an unsupervised network

p With the PC not connected to the equipment: S check that the PCs date and time are correct. If not, correct them (it is these values that will be taken into account by the network) S edit the WIN.INI file S in the [PEX] section, replace the line CT_TIME=CLIENT with the line CT_TIME=MANAGER S save the file. p p p p Connect the PC to the networks Master station. Launch the application Administrative functions\Operator\Date and click OK. The network takes its date and time from the PC. Exit the application. Restore the WIN.INI file to its initial state.
September 2000
245/270
A.6.1.2 Editing the RTP polling interval (POLRTP variable)

p p
Edit the WIN.INI file. In the [PEX] section, create a line that reads POLRTP=xx, with xx representing the required value (in seconds) for polling. When this line is omitted, the setting defaults to 10 seconds. The screen in Figure 76 shows an example with the polling interval set to 5 seconds. Save the file.
Figure 76 WIN.INI set to program a polling interval of 5 seconds
A.6.2 File 946LUX1x.INI - POLMEA variable

The 946LUX1x.INI file includes a POLMEA variable which can be used to alter the polling interval of the equipment for refreshing the analogue measurements. This file, located in the directory c:\Alcatel\946LUX1x, can be edited using any text editor such as WINDOWS NOTEPAD. The information to be changed is in the [MEASUREMENTS] section of the file. You edit the file in the same way as for the POLRTP variable in the WIN.INI file. In the event of a network problem, the polling interval used as a basis for display of the analogue measurements results, can be increased as follows: p p Edit the 946LUX1x.INI file. In the [MEASURES] section, change the value xx on the line POLMEA=xx, where xx is the required value (in seconds) for polling. Reducing the default value (five seconds) is not recommended, because of the risk of overloading the supervision bus. A value between 30 and 60 seconds is recommended. Save changes to the file.
246/270
September 2000
Appendix 7 Set of installation consumables ref : 3CC07673AAAA INFRASET01

This set is defined for four stations. ITEM NUMBER 1AB009800003 77050795 1AB035020054 1AB009800046 77059892 1AB025460001 1AB025460003 77970278 77974586 1AC000570014 1AC000570017 1AC000570010 1AC001250004 1AD012980003 1AD012980002 1AD020450002 DESCRIPTION Crimp female lug with contacts Lug 25604 Crimp insulat. 5.7mm ring lug Crimp insulat. 6.3 x 0.8 yellow female lug with contacts Expansion bolt 4620 M6-10L with 6 x 50/50 screw Coax. connector 75 *1.6/5.6 for cable: L910-34 straight male Coax. connector 75 *AU*1.6/5.6 for cable : L910.34 bent male Desoldering braid 7/10 mm diameter solder wire Black heatshrinkable, 3.2 to 1.6 mm sheath Black heatshrinkable, 4.8 to 2.4 mm sheath Black heatshrinkable, 9.5 to 4.8 mm sheath Black heatshrinkable, 19 to 9.5 mm sheath Black Colson cable tie, length: 350 x 9 mm Black Colson cable tie, length: 173 x 6 mm ty-rap cable tie, 46 M-8, 184 x 4.7 mm QUANTITY 4 4 2 2 1 2 2 1 200 gr 1.2 m 1.2 m 1.2 m 1.2 m 100 200 100
September 2000
247/270
Appendix 8 User ports on the 3 Tx/Rx backplane

Figure 77 Connection area on the 3 Tx/Rx backplane (main ETSI rack and extension ETSI rack)
248/270
September 2000
A.8.1 Connectors on the 3 Tx/Rx backplane mother board

The connectors on the 3 Tx/Rx backplane mother board are divided into two separate areas: the top part for the mdoules and boards and the bottom part for connections or branch links between station equipment, and to the user interfaces. In the top part, the following connectors are used for internal interconnection: P102 : connector for the cable to the HSB switching RF relay (power supply and control signal for the bistable relay), J159 : connector for the cable to the control panel (signalling, manual controls and audio ports for telephone handsets), J208 : connector for the fan alarm cable connected to the fan power supply board located in the top part of the 3 Tx/Rx backplane.
The table below correlates the connector numbers and their markings. CONNECTOR J144 J145 J146 J147 * J148 * J149 * J150 * J151 * J152 * J154 * J155 * J156 J157 CHANNEL X-5 ESC1-NMS1 2M-AUX ESC 2-3 REPEATER Tributary ports for channel X (5) ESC 1 interface, direction 1 (Network management) Auxiliary 2 Mbit/s bit stream port Digital transmission link for ESC 2 and 3 between the two units of a relay station. Linked to the appropriate connector on the other unit. In a repeater station, linked to the corresponding connector in the main rack of the other direction for aggregate transmission. Interface with the space diversity backplane: S for direction 1 backplane (EastWest): linked to J127 on the space diversity backplane S for direction 2 backplane (WestEast): linked to J128 on the space diversity backplane Link with the rack top control panel ESC 1 interface, direction 2 (Network management) ESC 2 interface, direction 1 ESC 3 interface, direction 1 ESC 4 interface, direction 1 ESC 5 interface, direction 1 CHANNEL 2-4 Tributary ports for channel 2 (4) CHANNEL 1-3 Tributary ports for channel 1 (3) MARKING PSU 1-3 PSU 2-4 PSU X-5 FUNCTION Power supply for channel 1 (n_ 3) via PSU module 1 (3) of the main (extension) rack Power supply for channel 2 (n_ 4) via PSU module 2 (4) of the main (extension) rack Power supply for channel X (n_ 5) via PSU module X (5) of the main (extension) rack
J158
DIVERSITY
J159 J160 * J161 * J162 * J163 * J164 *
FRONT PANEL ESC1-NMS2 ESC 2 ESC 3 ESC 4 ESC 5
September 2000
249/270
CONNECTOR J165 J166 * J167 * J168 * J169 * J170 *
MARKING ESC1-EXT ESC 2 ESC 3 ESC 4 ESC 5
FUNCTION
Reserved for future Alcatel expansion ESC 2 interface, direction 2 ESC 3 interface, direction 2 ESC 4 interface, direction 2 ESC 5 interface, direction 2
Maintenance interface (reserved for factory tests) and interface for MAINTENANCE received field information on receivers 1 and X (or 3 and 5, AGC V extension) (0 to 4 VDC) ESC 4-5 2+1 RACK 5+1 RACK VENT 16 TS/TC
(OPTIONAL BOARD)
J171 J172 J173 J208 J209 J210 * J211
Digital transmission link for ESC 4 and 5 between the two directions (3 Tx/Rx backplanes) of a relay station. Linked to the corresponding connector on the other backplane. Extension. To connector J173 on the extension 3 Tx/Rx backplane. Extension. To connector J172 on the main 3 Tx/Rx backplane. Fan alarm input (cable from the fan power supply board installed in the top part of the backplane). 16 TS/TC interface (optional) Basic TS/TC (GSU) HDLC bus interface linking the GSU board to the boards on the extension and diversity backplanes Interface for HDLC and CAN buses, the first linking the GSU board to the boards in the extension and diversity backplanes and the second linking the LSU board to the different MSU boards on the extension backplane. Reserved for Alcatel future use Connector receiving the software key (SKU) appropriate to the configuration and enabling the equipment to operate (presence imperative).
TS/TC (GSU) BUS (IN)
J212
BUS (OUT)
J213 J225
LOOP POWER SKU
* User ports, pin out details given below.
250/270
September 2000
A.8.2 Tributary ports

A.8.2.1 2 Mbit/s tributaries

The user ports below named Tributaries 1-8 and Tributaries 9-16 correspond to the 37way connectors marked CHANNEL 1-3/2-4/X-5 in the connection area of the main and extension 3 Tx/Rx backplanes.
Connector Tributary N Pin I+ I Pin O+ O TIU-F1 board 3CC05862AAxx TIU-F2 board 3CC05868AAxx TIU-F3 board 3CC05869AAxx TIU-F6 board 3CC05873AAxx 1 trib. 1 2 21 12 30 2 3 22 13 31 3 4 23 14 32 Tributaries 1-8 4 5 24 15 33 5 6 25 16 34 6 7 26 17 35 7 8 27 18 36 8 9 28 19 37 9 2 21 12 30 10 3 22 13 31 11 4 23 14 32 Tributaries 9-16 12 5 24 15 33 13 6 25 16 34 14 7 26 17 35 15 8 27 18 36 16 9 28 19 37
4 x 2 Mbit/s tributaries 8 x 2 Mbit/s tributaries 16 x 2 Mbit/s tributaries
Pins 20/29: 0 volts. At 75 I+, O+ are the input and output live points and I, O are the earth for these same signals. Depending on the boards installed, some connector pins will not be available (shaded areas of the table).
A.8.2.2 8 Mbit/s tributaries

The user ports are on tributaries 1 to 4 of the Tributaries 1-8 37way connectors marked CHANNEL 1-3/2-4/X-5 in the connection area of the main and extension 3 Tx/Rx backplanes (see section An.8.2.1). To simplify the wiring, use a mini adapter card which mates with each Tributaries 1-8 connector: 3CC 07080 AAxx: port minicard for Sub D/BNC bit streams 4 ports (IAU_B4), 3CC 07083 AAxx: port minicard for Sub D/1.6-5.6 bit streams 4 ports (IAU_C4).
A.8.2.3 3x8 Mbit/s + 4x2 Mbit/s configuration

This configuration is possible only with the TIU-F3 board. The three 8 Mbit/s ports are on tributaries 1 to 3 of the Tributaries 1-8 37way connectors and the four 2 Mbit/s ports are on tributaries 9 to 11 of the Tributaries 9-16 37way connectors marked CHANNEL 1-3/2-4/X-5 in the connection area of the main and extension 3 Tx/Rx backplanes (see section Appendix 8.2.1).
A.8.2.4 34 Mbit/s tributary

The user ports are on the Tributaries 1-8 37way connectors marked CHANNEL 1-3/2-4/X-5 in the connection area of the main and extension 3 Tx/Rx backplanes.
PIN SIGNAL In+ ground 10 Out+ 11 ground 20 X TIU : 3CC05871AAxx 1
34 Mbit/s signal
To simplify the wiring, use an adapter card which mates with each Tributaries 1-8 connector: either card 3CC07176AAxx with two BNC coaxial connectors,
September 2000
251/270
or card 3CC07177AAxx with two DIN 1.6/5.6 coaxial connectors.
A.8.2.5 Auxiliary 2 Mbit/s stream

This uses the 9way female SubD connector J155 marked 2M AUX in the connection area of the main 3 Tx/Rx backplane.
PIN SIGNAL In+ Auxiliary 2 Mbit/s 1 In 6 Out+ 4 Out 8 TIU : 3CC05868AAxx 3CC05869AAxx X
In a 120 Ohms configuration , the auxiliary 2 Mbit/s stream is connected to the distributor using a shielded multipair cable of type L904-2 (2 pairs). This cable and the 9way Sub-D connector are supplied as options (see Appendix 12). In a 75 Ohms configuration, access can be simplified by the use of an adapter card installed on connector J155: either the 75 Ohms 1.6/5.6 card, reference: 3CC07423AAxx, or the 75 Ohms BNC card, reference: 3CC07422AAxx. The auxiliary 2 Mbit/s signal is connected to the distributor by 75 Ohm coaxial cable (see Appendix 12). I+ & O+ are the live input and output points and I & O are the earth points for these same signals; 0 V is on pin 3.
A.8.3 Engineering service channel ports

The various ESCs are available on the following connectors in the connection area: CONNECTOR Direction 1 Direction 2 ESC1 (NMS) (NMS1) J154 (NMS2) J160 ESC2 J161 J166 ESC3 J162 J167 ESC4 J163 J168 ESC5 J164 J169
A.8.3.1 ESC1, network interface (rQ2 bus)

The table below gives the pinout of the 9way female Sub-D connectors, J154 marked NMS1 and J160 marked NMS2 in the connection area of the 3 Tx/Rx backplane. Pin n_
1 2 3 4 5
Signal
RS 485 data in (+) RS 485 clock in (+) Ground RS 485 data out () RS 485 clock out ()
Pin n_
6 7
Signal
RS 485 data in () RS 485 clock in ()
8 9
RS 485 data out (+) RS 485 clock out (+)
Note : Connector J165 is reserved for factory use.. A.8.3.2 ESC2, telephone service channel with selective calling
This is a pointtomultipoint analogue service channel with selective calling. The table below gives the pinout of the 9way female Sub-D connectors J161 and J166 marked ESC2 in the connection area. Pin n_
1 2
Signal
Audio signal from user (+)
Pin n_
6 7
Signal
Audio signal from user () Mwire signal
252/270
September 2000
Pin n_
Signal
0V Audio signal to user () Ewire signal
Pin n_
Signal
3 4 5
8 9
Audio signal to user (+) + 5 V protected
A.8.3.3 ESC 3, 4 and 5

Note: when a second channel with selective calling is installed, it is available on the ESC 4 outputs and the wiring is the same as for ESC 2. The table below gives the pinout of the 9way female Sub-D connectors in the connection area. Connectors J162, J163, J164 (direction 1) Signal P i n 64 kbit/s G.703 channel, PP
Signal A out (+) Signal A out () Signal A in (+) Signal A in () N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. Earth
Connectors J167, J168, J169 (direction 2) Signal
Analogue ESC channel, PP

Audio A (+) OUT Audio A () OUT Audio A (+) IN Audio A (-) IN N.C. EWIRE A N.C. MWIRE A Earth

P i n
64 kbit/s G.703 channel, PP

Signal B out (+) Signal B out () Signal B in (+) Signal B in () N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. Earth

Audio B (+) OUT Audio B () OUT Audio B (+) IN Audio B (-) IN N.C. EWIRE B N.C. MWIRE B Earth
Analogue ESC channel, PM

8 4 1 6 9 5 2 7
8 4 1 6 9 5 2 7
Key: N.C. = Not Connected; PP = Point to Point ; PM = Point to Multipoint.
September 2000
253/270
Connectors J162, J163, J164 (direction 1)

P i n
8 4 1 6 9 5 2 7 3
V.11 / V.28* signal 64 kbit/s channel point to point

Data A out (+) Data A out () Data A in (+) Data A in () Clock A out (+) Clock A out () Clock A in (+) Clock A in () Earth
9.6 kbit/s max. point to point

Signal PP1 out (+) Signal PP1 out () Signal PP1 in (+) Signal PP1 in () NC NC NC NC Earth
9.6 kbit/s max. PM

Signal PM1 out (+) Signal PM1 out () Signal PM1 in (+) Signal PM1 in () NC NC NC NC Earth
2 x 4.8 kbit/s max. PM + PP

Signal PM1A out (+) Signal PM1A out () Signal PM1A in (+) Signal PM1A in () Signal PP2A out (+) Signal PP2A out () Signal PP2A in (+) Signal PP2A in () Earth
2 x 4.8 kbit/s max. point to point

Signal PP1A out (+) Signal PP1A out () Signal PP1A in (+) Signal PP1A in () Signal PP2A out (+) Signal PP2A out () Signal PP2A in (+) Signal PP2A in () Earth
N.C. = Not Connected ; PP = Point to Point ; PM = Point to Multipoint ; * In V.28 mode, the () signals are earthed. Connectors J167, J168, J169 (direction 2) P i n 8 4 1 6 9 5 2 7 3 V.11 / V.28* signal 64 kbit/s channel point to point
Data B out (+) Data B out () Data B in (+) Data B in () Clock B out (+) Clock B out () Clock B in (+) Clock B in () Earth
9.6 kbit/s max. point to point

Signal PP2 out (+) Signal PP2 out () Signal PP2 in (+) Signal PP2 in () NC NC NC NC Earth
9.6 kbit/s max. Point to MultiPt

Signal PM1 out (+) Signal PM1 out () Signal PM1 in (+) Signal PM1 in () NC NC NC NC Earth
2 x 4.8 kbit/s max. 2 x 4.8 kbit/s max. PM + PP point to point

Signal PM1A out (+) Signal PM1A out () Signal PM1A out (+) Signal PM1A in () Signal PP2B out (+) Signal PP2B out () Signal PP2B in (+) Signal PP2B in () Earth Signal PP1B out (+) Signal PP1B out () Signal PP1B in (+) Signal PP1B in () Signal PP2B out (+) Signal PP2B out () Signal PP2B in (+) Signal PP2B in () Earth
N.C. = Not Connected ; PP = Point to Point ; PM = Point to Multipoint.
254/270
September 2000
A.8.4 Alarms, remote indications and remote controls (TS/TC)

A.8.4.1 TS/TC connector (GSU)

25way female Sub-D connector J210. For the urgent, nonurgent, attended alarm and housekeeping remote control relays, the loop formed by the common and normally closed contacts is normally open in the absence of an alarm. PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 MEANING NC contact of the urgent alarm indication relay NO contact of the urgent alarm indication relay Common contact of the nonurgent alarm indication relay NC contact of the alarm attended status indication relay NO contact of the alarm attended relay Common contact of the housekeeping remote control relay Reserved for Alcatel (fan alarms) TS 3 input TS 5 input TS 7 input Reserved for Alcatel Reserved for Alcatel Reserved for Alcatel Common contact of the urgent alarm indication relay NC contact of the nonurgent alarm indication relay NO contact of the nonurgent alarm indication relay Common contact of the alarm attended status indication relay NC contact of the housekeeping remote control relay NO contact of the housekeeping remote control relay TS 2 input TS 4 input TS 6 input TS 8 input Reserved for Alcatel 0 Volt
September 2000
255/270
A.8.4.2 Sub-D/WAGO adapter board 3CC07444AAxx

The Sub-D/WAGO adapter board (optional) is installed on the TS/TC connector J210 (GSU) in the connection area to simplify TS/TC wiring operations. It supports WAGO terminal blocks TB101 and TB102.
Figure 78 Sub-D/WAGO adapter board CONNECTION Pn

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 0 Volt 0 Volt Input TS 4 0 Volt Input TS 3 0 Volt Input TS 2 0 Volt Not used
TB101
Normaly Closed contact of the urgent alarm indication relay Common contact of the urgent alarm indication relay Normaly Open contact of the urgent alarm indication relay
TB102
Normaly Closed contact of the alarm attended status indication relay Common contact of the alarm attended status indication relay Normaly Open contact of the alarm attended status indication relay
Normaly Closed contact of the nonurgent alarm indication relay Common contact of the nonurgent alarm indication relay Normaly Open contact of the nonurgent alarm indication relay
Normaly Closed contact of the housekeeping remote control relay Common contact of the housekeeping remote control relay Normaly Open contact of the housekeeping remote control relay
0 Volt Input TS 5
0 Volt Input TS 6
0 Volt Input TS 7
0 Volt Input TS 8

0 Volt
256/270
September 2000
A.8.4.3 TS/TC connections on the 16 TS/TC board (optional)

The terminal blocks are located on the 16 TS/TC option board (ref : 3CC05705AAAA), which is in turn linked by ribbon cable to connector J209 in the connection area of the 3 Tx/Rx backplane mother board.
Figure 79 Markings on the housing of the 16 TS/TC board Equipment alarm remote indications 1 to 16
S Normaly Closed contact S Common contact S Normaly Open contact
Outputs
Connections 1 to 16 Connections 1 to 16 Connections 1 to 16
Connector
TB101 TB102 TB103
Housekeeping remote controls 2 to 5

S Normaly Closed contact S Common contact S Normaly Open contact
Outputs
Connections 17 to 20 Connections 17 to 20 Connections 17 to 20
Connector
TB101 TB102 TB103
Housekeeping TS
N_3 N_6 N_9 N_12 N_2 N_5 N_8 N_11 N_1 N_4 N_7 N_10
Loop port
21 25 29 33 21 25 29 33 21 25 29 33
Earth
22 26 30 34 22 26 30 34 22 26 30 34
Pin 3
23 27 31 35 23 27 31 35 23 27 31 35
Pin 4
24 28 32 36 24 28 32 36 24 28 32 36
Connector
TB101
TB102
TB103
September 2000
257/270
To configure the housekeeping remote indication (TS) loops as normally open or normally closed, refer to Figure 80 and the table below.
Figure 80 Access to the housekeeping TS loops Type of information output by the external equipment Insulated loop, normally open in normal operation Insulated loop, normally closed in normal operation Wiring Loop on 1-2 and strap between 3 and 4 Loop on 1-2
+5 V Pin 3
A.8.5 Maintenance and AGC voltage connector

The table below gives the pinout of the 9way female Sub-D connector J170 marked MAINT AGCV in the connection area of the main or extension 3 Tx/Rx backplane. Pin 1 ASSIGNMENT AGC voltage output for the channel 1 or 3 receiver Pin 6 7/8 9 Reserved for factory tests AGC voltage output for the channel X or 5 receiver ASSIGNMENT
2/3/4 Reserved for factory tests 5 0V
258/270
September 2000
Loop access
Appendix 9 User ports on the diversity backplane

Connection area
Figure 81 Connection area on the diversity backplane (diversity ETSI rack)
The connectors on the diversity backplane mother board are divided into two separate areas: the top part for the modules and boards and the bottom part used mainly for backplane interconnections; just one connector (J129) is available to the operator for commissioning operations. The table below lists the functions of the various connectors in the connection area. CONNECTOR J127 J128 J129 * J130 J131 MARKING DIVERSITY DIR1 DIVERSITY DIR2 AGC V BUS DIR1 BUS DIR1 FUNCTION+ Interface with the main or extension rack backplane, direction 1: to J158 of that backplane Interface with main or extension rack backplane, direction 2 : to J158 of that backplane Received field information concerning diversity receivers 1 (3), directions 1 and 2 Bus input for information transfer between boards and GSU, direction 1 Bus output for transfer of information between boards and GSU, direction 1
September 2000
259/270
CONNECTOR J132 J133
MARKING BUS DIR2 BUS DIR2
FUNCTION+
Bus input for transfer of information between boards and GSU, direction 2 Bus output for transfer of information between boards and GSU, direction 2
* User port, pinout given below. AGC VOLTAGE CONNECTOR The table below gives the pinout of the 9way female Sub-D connector J129 marked AGC V in the connection area of the diversity backplane for channels 1, 2 and X or extension channels 3, 4 and 5 in both directions. Pin 1 2/3/4 5 0V ASSIGNMENT AGC voltage output for the channel 1 or 3 diversity receiver, direction 1 Pin 6 7/8 9 AGC voltage output for the channel 1 or 3 diversity receiver, direction 2 ASSIGNMENT
260/270
September 2000
Appendix 10 F interface
The table below gives the pinout of the 9way female Sub-D connector marked F on the rack top control panel (see Figure 63), for connecting the supervision PC. Pin 2 3 7 8 5 ASSIGNMENT Received data - V.28 format Transmitted data V.28 format Request To Send Clear To Send GND Pin 1 6 4 9 ASSIGNMENT Data Carrier Detect Data Set Ready Data Terminal Ready Not connected
September 2000
261/270
Appendix 11 List of abbreviations

MNEMONIC ADC AGC AIS CAN CT DTMF ECT EMC ESC ESD ESR ETSI FEC FD HDB3 HDLC HSB I2C IDU IF ITU LED LO NE NMS OCT PSU ENGLISH Analog/Digital Converter Automatic Gain Control Alarm Indication Signal Control Area Nethwork (Serial Bus) Craft Terminal Dual-Tone Multi Frequency Equipment Craft Terminal ElectroMagnetic Compatibility Engineering Service Channel ElectroStatic Discharge Early Switching Request Poste dEXploitation (PEX) Multifrquence en code 2 Poste dExploitation Equipement (PEE) Compatibilit ElectroMagntique (CEM) Voie De Service (VDS) Dcharges ElectroStatiques (DES) Demande de Commutation Anticipe (DCA) FRENCH Convertisseur Analogique/Numrique (CAN) Commande Automatique de Gain (CAG) Signal dIndication dAlarme (SIA)
European Telecommunications Standards Institut de Standardisation des Institute Tlcommunications Europennes Forward Error Correction Frequency Diversity High Density Binary 3 code (3rd order) High-level Data Link Control Hot StandBy Inter Integrated Circuit InDoor Unit Intermediate Frequency International Telecommunication Union Light Emitting Diode Local Oscillator Network element Network Management System Office Craft Terminal Power Supply Unit Coffret intrieur Frquence Intermdiaire (FI) Union Internationale des Tlcommunications Diode lectroluminescente Oscillateur Local (OL) Elment de rseau (ER) Systme de Gestion de Rseau Poste dExploitation Local (PEL) Carte Alimentation Code Correcteur dErreurs (CCE) Diversit de Frquence Code Haute Densit Binaire dordre 3 Liaison de donnes haut niveau Veille active
262/270
September 2000
MNEMONIC
ENGLISH Radio Frequency Remote Signalling/Remote Control Receiver Space Diversity Switching Request Terminal Point Transmitter Transceiver Manufacturing unit Voltage Controlled Xtal Oscillator Engineering Service Channel (ESC)
FRENCH Frquence Radio Tlsignalisation/Tlcommande Rcepteur Diversit despace Demande de Commutation (DC) Point Terminal Emetteur Emetteur/Rcepteur (E/R) Unit de fabrication Oscillateur quartz contrl en tension Voie De Service
RF TS/TC RX SD SR TP TX Tx/Rx UF VCXO VDS
September 2000
263/270
Appendix 12 Table of catalogue items

This table can be used to map the various items in the installation manual to the marketing identifiers by which they are sold. The composition of each item is given by way of example, the definitive list being generated according to the equipment configuration. Installations
Installation toolkit
Item
9400LXT004
Comments
Miniscrewdriver for CMS switch, MarsActel OSA3 tools 1 wrench for adjusting the rack feet
Article
77072804 1AD016040001 3CC07956AAxx 77096484 3CC07568AAxx 3CC08010AAxx
Sub-D pin crimping tool 608868 - 1 HDE 20 Coaxial tail 7/8 GHz flextwist Distributor panel 8 x 2 Mbit/s (19)
9400LXT005 9400LXI405 9400LXI310 9400XXI408 75 Ohms / 1,6/5,6
3CC08061AAxx 3CC07885ABxx 3CC08061ABxx 3CC07759ABxx
9400XXI408 + 2 x 9400XXI405 9400XXI408
75 Ohms / BNC
120 Ohms - EMC
3CC07810AAxx 3CC07658AAxx 3CC08062AAxx 3CC07658AAxx 3CC08061AAxx 2x3CC07885ABxx 3CC07897AAxx 3CC08061ABxx 2x3CC07759ABxx 3CC07898AAxx 3CC07810AAxx 2x3CC07658AAxx 3CC07881AAxx 3CC08062AAxx 2x3CC07658AAxx 3CC07881AAxx 3CC07844AAxx 3CC07885ABxx
9400XXI408
120 Ohms - not EMC
Distributor panel 16 x 2 Mbit/s (19)
9400XXI416
75 Ohms / 1.6/5.6
9400XXI416 + 4 x 9400XXI405 9400XXI416
75 Ohms / BNC
120 Ohms - EMC
9400XXI416
120 Ohms - not EMC
Distributor panel 8 x 2 Mbit/s 1 channel (Top of rack)
9400LXI408
75 Ohms / 1,6/5,6 EMC: 3CC06199AAxx Not EMC: 3CC07890AAxx
9400LXI408 + 2 x 9400XXI405 9400LXI408
75 Ohms BNC EMC: 3CC06199AAxx Not EMC: 3CC07890AAxx 120 Ohms EMC: 3CC06199AAxx
3CC07844ABxx 3CC07759ABxx
3CC07190AAxx 3CC07658AAAxx 3CC07889AAxx 3CC07658AAxx
9400LXI408
120 Ohms Not EMC: 3CC07899AAxx
264/270
September 2000
Installations
Item
9400LXI416
Comments
75 Ohms / 1,6/5,6 EMC: 3CC06199AAxx Not EMC: 3CC07890AAxx
Article
3CC07844AAxx 2x3CC07885ABxx 3CC07897ABxx 3CC07844ABxx 2x3CC07885ABxx 3CC078978ABxx
Distributor panel 16 x 2 Mbit/s 1 channel (Top of rack)
9400LXI416 + 4 x 9400XXI405 9400LXI416
75 Ohms BNC EMC: 3CC06199AAxx Not EMC: 3CC07890AAxx 120 Ohms EMC: 3CC07190AAxx 3CC06199AAxx
2x3CC07658AAxx 3CC07881AAAxx
9400LXI416
120 Ohms Not EMC: 3CC07899AAxx 3CC07890AAxx 2x3CC07658AAxx 3CC07881AAxx 3CC07422AAxx 3CC07423AAxx 3CC07080AAxx 3CC07083AAxx 3CC07176AAxx 3CC07177AAxx 3CC08812AAxx 3CC08813AAxx 3CC08815AAxx 3CC08816AAxx 3CC05527AAxx 3CC05526AAAxx 3CC05527AAxx 3CC07921AAxx 3CC08814AAxx 3CC08811AAxx 3CC08817AAxx 3CC07917AAxx 3CC08809AAxx 3CC08810AAxx 77096294 3CC08165AAxx 3CC08211AAxx 77096294 3CC08209AAxx 3CC08212AAxx
Distributor miniboard aux. 2 Mbit/s
9400XXI402
BNC 1.6/5.6
Distributor miniboard 4 x 2 Mbit/s
9400XXI448
BNC 1.6/5.6
Distributor miniboard 34 Mbit/s
9400XXI434
BNC 1.6/5.6
Power supply cable for normal current
9400XXC501
48 V length 20 m 24 V length 20 m
Power supply cable for high current
9400XXC503
48 V length 20 m 24 V length 20 m
75 Ohms 1.6/5.6 connector kit
9400XXI506
cable length 30 m 1.6/5.6 connector kit cable length 30 m BNC connector kit 16 mm2 y/g length 20 m length 15 m length 15 m 1 length 15 m length 30 m 48 V
75 Ohms BNC connector kit
9400XXI506 9400XXI405 9400XXC502 9400XXI508 9400XXI509 9400XXI505 9400XXI504 9400XXI507 9400XXC511
Earth cable Singlepair alarm cable 15pair alarm cable 10pair 120 Ohms terminal block 16pair 120 Ohms 2 Mbit/s cable Twopair 120 Ohms auxiliary 2 Mbit/s cable Sixport 19 power panel
9400XXC511
24 V
September 2000
265/270
Installations
Sixport distribution unit
Item
9400XXC512
Comments
48 V
Article
77096248 3CC08165AAxx 3CC08211AAxx 77096248 3CC08209AAxx 3CC08212AAxx 77096497
9400XXC512
24 V
Fuseholder + additional 6 A fuse Kit of consumables Metallic cable tray Set of waveguide supports indoor AGC voltage measurement cable Telephone handset Compressor 115 mm extender 265 mm extender PVC cable tray
FUSKIT0001 INFRASET01 INFRA00003 INFRA00007 9400LXT003 9400XXB000 9400LXO001 9400LXT001 9400LXT002 INFRA00004 for 4 meters 1 for 4 stations kit for 6 metres of cable 3 supports
3CC07673AAxx 3CC07580AAxx 3CC07583AAAxx 3CC08545AAxx 3CC07946AAxx 1AF01052AAAA 3CC06403AAxx 3CC06404AAxx 3CC06511AAxx
266/270
September 2000
Appendix 13 List of models

A.13.1 Baseband equipment

Fonctionnal unit
Power Supply Unit Multiplex & Switching Unit Multiplex & Switching Unit Stdby General Supervision Unit
Model Number
77096496 3CC05691AAxx 3CC06201AAxx 3CC05690AAxx 3CC05690ABxx
ICS
n.a. 04 (AAAC) 02 (AAAB) 04 04 03 01 02 01 01 01 01 01 02 01 01 01 01 02 02 01 01 02 01 01 04 01 02 n.a.
Logic & Switching Unit Tributary Interface Unit 16 x 2 Mb Tributary Interface Unit 34 Mb Tributary Interface Unit 8 x 2 Mb Tributary Interface Unit 4 x 2 Mb Tributary Interface Unit 2/8 Mb Engineering Service Channel 23
3CC05706AAxx 3CC05869AAxx 3CC05871AAxx 3CC05868AAxx 3CC05862AAxx 3CC05873AAxx 3CC05708AAxx 3CC05708ABxx
Telephone set Engineering Service Chann 45 (mother board) 64kb G703 (daughter board) 4wires analog (daughter board) 64kb V11/V28 (daughter board) 9600 / 4800 bds (daughter board) 9600 / 4800 bds (daughter board) TS / TC extension unit Extender board 115 mm Extender board 265 mm Software Key Unit
3CC07946AAxx 3CC05709AAxx 3CC05710AAxx 3CC05711AAxx 3CC05712AAxx 3CC05713AAxx 3CC06482AAxx 3CC05705AAxx 3CC06403AAxx 3CC06404AAxx 3CC07619AAxx 3CC07619ABxx
SIMM daughter board LUX10 SIMM daughter board LUX11 SIMM daughter board LUX12 Dehydrator
3CC06353AAxx 3CC06353ABxx 3CC06353ACxx 1AF01052AAAA
September 2000
267/270
A.13.2 RF equipment
RF modules
9414 LX 4QAM Transmitter 16QAM Transmitter 4QAM Receiver 16QAM Receiver Duplexed RF filter 9420 LX 1.7 2.1 4QAM Transmitter 4QAM Receiver Duplexed RF filter 9420 LX 1.9 2.3 4QAM Transmitter 4QAM Receiver Duplexed RF filter 9420 LX 2.3 2.7 4QAM Transmitter 4QAM Receiver Duplexed RF filter 9470 LX 4QAM Transmitter 16QAM Transmitter 4QAM Receiver
Model Number
3CC08715AAxx 3CC08776AAxx 3CC08714AAxx 3CC08962AAxx 3CC05770AAxx 3CC05696AAxx 3CC05699AAxx 3CC05764AAxx 3CC05697AAxx 3CC05700AAxx 3CC05764AAxx 3CC05698AAxx 3CC05701AAxx 3CC05764AAxx 3CC05702AAxx 3CC08440AAxx 3CC05703AAxx 3CC08439AAxx
ICS
01 02 01 02 01 01 03 01 01 03 01 01 03 01 01 02 02 03 02 01 01
16QAM Receiver Duplexed RF filter (7.1 7.7) (7.7 8.5)
3CC08941AAxx 3CC05772AAxx 3CC05773AAxx
268/270
September 2000
Appendix 14 Preparing the coaxial tail

A.14.1 Wiring of the straight plug
Back nut cap
Braid clamp
Strip the cable over 8.5 mm
Comb the braid and fold it back on the braid clamp. Strip inner conductor over 5 mm.
September 2000
269/270
A.14.2 Wiring the N series elbow connector

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its contents not permitted without written authorization from ALCATEL 16 mm across flats
RADIALL connector R 161 168 000

14.3 mm across flats
BACK NUT
WASHER
GASKET
BRAID CLAMP CENTRE CONTACT
BODY
Strip the outer sheathing. Stripped length
Fit the back nut, washer and gasket on the cable. Mount the braid clamp ring. Fold back and cut away excess braid. Strip inner insulation.
SOLDER Solder the contact to the core of the cable.
Screw the assembly into the body of the connector (recommended torque 500 N.cm).
Hex.:
16 mm across flats
END OF DOCUMENT
270/270
September 2000

Alcatel 9400 LX Manual

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Alcatel 9400 LX Manual

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Alcatel 9400 LX

with 946LUX11/946LUX12 supervision

PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY

How to reach the TAC team :

PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY

4.3.1 File and Receive menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3.2 Operator menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

153 153 154 154 155

219 220 220 220 221

................................. ................................. ................................. ................................. .................................

198 199 200 201 202

221 222 222 222 223 223 223 224 224

Appendix 1 Installation information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix 2 Troubleshooting using AS&C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix 3 List of remote controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix 4 List of RTP application alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix 5 Creating user profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

245 245 245 246 246

Appendix 7 Set of installation consumables ref : 3CC07673AAAA INFRASET01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

248 249 251

252 252 252 253 255 255 256 257 258

Appendix 9 User ports on the diversity backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix 11 List of abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Appendix 12 Table of catalogue items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

267 267 268

269 269 270

A.8.2.1 A.8.2.2 A.8.2.3 A.8.2.4 A.8.2.5

251 251 251 251 252

1.1 Structure of the manual

1.2 Using the manual

1.3 Safety instructions

1.3.1 General rules

Presence of heat-radiating mechanical parts

Other earth terminal

1.3.2.3 Other symbols Indicates compliance with European standards

1.3.3 Symbols used in the document

1.3.4 Declaration of conformity with European EMC directives

1.3.5 Certificate of conformity with European safety standards

18/270 PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY

2 Description of the equipment

This manual describes the ETSI rack version.

2.1 General characteristics of the equipment

Single ETSI rack, shown closed

Double ETSI rack, half open

4port TIUF1 (3CC05862AAAA)

2x2 8port TIUF2 (3CC05868AAAA)

2x2 4x2 1x8

2x2 4x2 1x8

34 Mbit/s TIUF5 (3CC05871AAAA) 8 Mbit/s TIUF6 (3CC05873AAAA)

34 + 2 Mbit/s auxiliary 2 or 8 Mbit/s and/or 2 Mbit/s auxiliary

4QAM 16QAM Note :

3.5 MHz 1.75 MHz (**)

Compressor * RX-1 TX-2 RX-2 TX-X RX-X

ESC45 * TIU-1 TIU-2 TIU-X * GSU Branch connection area

Branch connection area

Branch connection area

2.2 Operation of the equipment in 1+0 configuration

TIU TX MSU FILTER

ESC 1 GSU SKU TS / TC extension (optional) 7 TS 1 TC PSU

On reception : deframing of the aggregate signal, extraction (dropping):

demultiplexing of the tributaries, applied to the TIU board.

digital/analogue conversion and analogue baseband filtering,

2.3 Operation of the equipment in 1+1 configurations

MSU1 bkp MSU1*

MSU1 bkp MSU1*